Skip to main content

Full text of "The atom and the Bohr theory of its structure : an elementary presentation"

See other formats


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

MASSACHUSETTS  INSTITUTE 
OF  TECHNOLOGY 


The  Old  Corner  Book 
Store,  Inc. 
Boston,  -  Mass. 


v 


* 


V 


« 


. 


. 


1 


. 

. 

■ 

. 


/ 


•  ■ 

■ 


' 

■ 


. 

*  *■ 


j 


' 


' 


■ 


. 

_  . 


- 


r 


— 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 
OF  ITS  STRUCTURE 


Original  Title:  “  Bohr s  Atomteori ,  almenfatteligt  fremstillet 

Translated  from  the  Danish  by  R.  B.  Lindsay x 
Fellow  of  the  American- Scandinavian  Foundation , 

1923,  and  Rachel  T.  Lindsay 


THE  ATOM 


AND 

THE  BOHR  THEORY 
OF  ITS  STRUCTURE 

An  Elementary  Presentation 


BY 

H.  A.  KRAMERS 

I.ECTURER  AT  THE  INSTITUTE  OF  THEORETICAL  PHYSICS  IN  THE 
UNIVERSITY  OF  COPENHAGEN 

AND 

HELGE  HOLST 

LIBRARIAN  AT  THE  ROYAL  TECHNICAL  COLLEGE  OF  COPENHAGEN 

WITH  A  FOREWORD  BY 

SIR  ERNEST  RUTHERFORD,  F.R.S* 


NEW  YORK 

ALFRED  A.  KNOPF 


.  I .  'j 


PRINTED  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN  BY  MORRISON  AND  GIBB  LTD.,  EDINBURGH 


PREFACE 

At  the  close  of  the  nineteenth  century  and  the 

beginning  of  the  twentieth,  our  knowledge  of  the 

activities  in  the  interior  of  matter  experienced  a 

development  which  surpassed  the  boldest  hopes  that 
could  have  been  entertained  by  the  chemists  and 

physicists  of  the  nineteenth  century.  The  smallest 
particles  of  chemistry,  the  atoms  of  the  elements,  which 
hitherto  had  been  approached  merely  by  inductive 
thought,  now  became  tangible  realities,  so  to  speak,  which 
could  be  counted  and  whose  tracks  could  be  photo¬ 
graphed.  A  series  of  remarkable  experimental  investiga¬ 
tions,  stimulated  largely  by  the  English  physicist,  J.  J. 
Thomson,  had  disclosed  the  existence  of  negatively 
charged  particles,  the  so-called  electrons,  20Yo  the  mass 
of  the  smallest  atom  of  the  known  elements.  A  theory 
of  electrons,  based  on  Maxwell’s  classical  electro¬ 
dynamical  theory  and  developed  mainly  through  the 
labours  of  Lorentz  in  Holland  and  Larmor  in  England, 
had  brought  the  problem  of  atomic  structure  into  close 
connection  with  the  theory  of  radiation.  The  experi¬ 
ments  of  Rutherford  proved,  beyond  a  doubt,  that 
atoms  were  composed  simply  of  light,  negative  electric 
particles,  and  small  heavy,  positive  electric  particles. 

vii 


136802 


Vlll 


PREFACE 


The  new  "  quantum  theory  ”  of  Planck  was  proving 
itself  very  powerful  in  overcoming  grave  difficulties  in 
the  theory  of  radiation.  The  time  thus  seemed  ripe 
for  a  comprehensive  investigation  of  the  fundamental 
problem  of  physics— the  constitution  of  matter,  and  an 
explanation  in  terms  of  simple  general  laws  of  the 
physical  and  chemical  properties  of  the  atoms  of  the 
elements. 

During  the  first  ten  years  of  the  new  century  the 
problem  was  attacked  with  great  zeal  by  many  scientists, 
and  many  interesting  atomic  models  were  developed  and 
studied.  But  most  of  these  had  more  significance  for 
chemistry  than  for  physics,  and  it  was  not  until  1913 
that  the  work  of  the  Danish  physicist,  Niels  Bohr,  paved 
the  way  for  a  really  physical  investigation  of  the  problem 
in  a  remarkable  series  of  papers  on  the  spectrum  and 
atomic  structure  of  hydrogen.  The  ideas  of  Bohr, 
founded  as  they  were  on  the  quantum  theory,  were 
startling  and  revolutionary,  but  their  immense  success 
in  explaining  the  facts  of  experience  after  a  time  won 
for  them  the  wide  recognition  of  the  scientific  world,  and 
stimulated  work  by  other  investigators  along  similar 
lines.  The  past  decade  has  witnessed  an  enormous 
development  at  the  hands  of  scientists  in  all  parts  of  the 
world  of  Bohr’s  original  conceptions ;  but  through  it  all 
Bohr  has  remained  the  leading  spirit,  and  the  theory 
which,  at  the  present  time,  gives  the  most  comprehensive 
view  of  atomic  structure  may,  therefore,  most  properly 
bear  the  name  of  Bohr. 


PREFACE 


IX 


It  is  the  object  of  this  book  to  give  the  reader  a 
glimpse  of  the  fundamental  conceptions  of  this  theory, 
together  with  some  of  the  most  significant  results  it 
has  attained.  The  book  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs 
of  those  who  wish  to  keep  abreast  of  modern  develop¬ 
ments  in  science,  but  have  neither  time  nor  inclination 
to  delve  into  the  highly  mathematical  abstract  literature 
in  which  the  developments  are  usually  concealed.  It 
is  with  this  in  mind  that  the  first  four  chapters  have  been 
devoted  to  a  general  survey  of  those  parts  of  physics 
and  chemistry  which  have  close  connection  with  atomic 
theory.  No  attempt  has  been  made  at  a  mathematical 
development,  and  the  physical  meaning  of  such  mathe¬ 
matical  formulae  as  do  occur  has  been  clearly  emphasized 
in  the  text.  It  is  hoped,  however,  that  even  those 
readers  whose  acquaintance  with  atomic  theory  is  more 
than  casual,  will  find  the  book  a  stimulus  to  further 
study  of  the  Bohr  theory. 

Here  we  wish  to  record  our  best  thanks  to  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Lindsay  for  the  ability  and  the  great  care  with 
which  they  have  carried  out  the  translation  from  the 
Danish  original. 


FOREWORD 

During  the  last  decade  there  has  been  a  great  advance 
in  our  knowledge  of  the  structure  of  the  atom  and  of  the 
relation  between  the  atoms  of  the  chemical  elements. 
In  the  later  stages,  science  owes  much  to  the  remarkable 
achievements  of  Professor  Niels  Bohr  and  his  co-workers 
in  Copenhagen.  For  the  first  time,  we  have  been  given 
a  consistent  theory  to  explain  the  arrangement  and 
motion  of  the  electrons  in  the  outer  atom.  The  theory 
of  Bohr  is  not  only  able  to  account  in  considerable 
detail  for  the  variation  in  the  properties  of  the  elements 
exemplified  by  the  periodic  law,  but  also  for  the  main 
features  of  the  spectra,  both  X-ray  and  optical,  shown 
by  all  elements. 

This  volume,  written  by  Dr.  Kramers  and  Mr.  Holst, 
gives  a  simple  and  interesting  account  of  our  knowledge 
of  atomic  structure,  with  special  reference  to  the  work 
of  Professor  Bohr.  Dr.  Kramers  is  in  an  especially 
fortunate  position  to  give  a  first-hand  account  of  this 
subject,  for  he  has  been  a  valued  assistant  to  Professor 
Bohr  in  developing  his  theories,  and  has  himself  made 
important  original  contributions  to  our  knowledge  in 
this  branch  of  inquiry. 


XI 


I 


xii  FOREWORD 

I  can  confidently  recommend  this  book  to  English 
readers  as  a  clearly  written  and  accurate  account  of  the 
development  of  our  ideas  on  atomic  structure.  It  is 
written  in  simple  language,  and  the  essential  ideas 
are  explained  without  mathematical  calculations.  This 
book  should  prove  attractive  not  only  to  the  general 
scientific  reader,  but  also  to  the  student  who  wishes  to 
gain  a  broad  general  idea  of  this  subject  before  entering 
into  the  details  of  the  mathematical  theory. 

E.  RUTHERFORD. 


Cavendish  Laboratory, 
Cambridge,  8 th  October  1923. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Preface  .  .  .  .  .  .  vii 

Foreword  .  .  .  .  .  .  xi 

CHAP. 

I.  Atoms  and  Molecules  .....  i 

II.  Light  Waves  and  the  Spectrum  .  .  -34 

III.  Ions  and  Electrons  .  .  .  .  .61 

IV.  The  Nuclear  Atom  .  .  .  .  -83 

V.  The  Bohr  Theory  of  the  Hydrogen  Spectrum  .  105 

VI.  Various  Applications  of  the  Bohr  Theory  .153 

VII.  Atomic  Structure  and  the  Chemical  Properties 

of  the  Elements  .  .  .  .  .180 

1 

Interpretation  of  Symbols  and  Physical  Con¬ 
stants  .......  209 


COLOURED  PLATES 

PLATE 

I.  Spectrum  Plates  according  to  the  Original 

Drawings  of  Bunsen  and  Kirchhoff  .  At  end 

II.  Principal  Features  of  Atomic  Structure  in 
Some  of  the  Elements — Atomic  Structure 
of  Radium  .....  At  end 


xm 


THE 


ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 
OF  ITS  STRUCTURE 

CHAPTER  I 
ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


Introduction. 

As  early  as  400  B.c.  the  Greek  philosopher,  Demo¬ 
critus,  taught  that  the  world  consisted  of  empty  space 
and  an  infinite  number  of  small  invisible  particles.  These 
particles,  differing  in  form  and  magnitude,  by  their 
arrangements  and  movements,  by  their  unions  and 
disunions,  caused  the  existence  of  physical  bodies  with 
different  characteristics,  and  also  produced  the  observed 
variations  in  these  bodies.  This  theory,  which  no  doubt 
antedated  Democritus,  later  became  known  as  the 
Atomic  Theory,  since  the  particles  were  called  atoms, 
i.e.  the  “  indivisible.” 

But  the  atomic  conception  was  not  the  generally 
accepted  one  in  antiquity.  Aristotle  (384-322  b.c.) 
was  not  an  atomist,  and  denied  the  existence  of  dis¬ 
continuous  matter  ;  his  philosophy  had  a  tremendous 
influence  upon  the  ideas  of  the  ancients,  and  even  upon 
the  beliefs  of  the  Middle  Ages.  It  must  be  confessed 
that  his  conception  of  the  continuity  of  matter  seemed 
to  agree  best  with  experiment,  because  of  the  apparent 


1 


2 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


homogeneity  of  physical  substances  such  as  metal,  glass, 
water  and  air.  But  even  this  apparent  homogeneity 
could  not  be  considered  entirely  inconsistent  with  the 
atomic  theory,  for,  according  to  the  latter,  the  atoms 
were  so  small  as  to  be  invisible.  Moreover,  the  atomic 
theory  left  the  way  open  for  a  more  complete  under¬ 
standing  of  the  properties  of  matter.  Thus  when  air  was 
compressed  and  thereafter  allowed  to  expand,  or  when 
salt  was  dissolved  in  water  producing  an  apparently  new 
homogeneous  liquid,  salt  water,  or  when  silver  was 
melted  by  heat,  or  light  changed  colour  on  passing 
through  wine,  it  was  clear  that  something  had  happened 
in  the  interior  of  the  substances  in  question.  But 
complete  homogeneity  is  synonymous  with  inactivity. 
How  is  it  possible  to  obtain  a  definite  idea  of  the 
inner  activity  lying  at  the  bottom  of  these  changes 
of  state,  if  we  do  not  think  of  the  phenomenon  as  an 
interplay  between  the  different  parts  of  the  apparently 
homogeneous  matter  ?  Thus,  in  the  examples  above, 
the  decrease  in  the  volume  of  the  air  might  be  considered 
as  due  to  the  particles  drawing  nearer  to  each  other  ; 
the  dissolving  of  salt  in  water  might  be  looked  upon 
as  the  movement  of  the  salt  particles  in  between  the 
water  particles  and  the  combination  of  the  two  kinds  ; 
the  melting  of  silver  might  naturally  appear  to  be  due 
to  the  loosening  of  bonds  between  the  individual  silver 
particles. 

The  atomic  theory  had  thus  a  sound  physical  basis, 
and  proved  particularly  attractive  to  those  philosophers 
who  tried  to  explain  the  mysterious  activity  of  matter 
in  terms  of  exact  measurements.  The  atomic  hypo¬ 
thesis  was  never  completely  overthrown,  being  supported 
after  the  time  of  Aristotle  by  Epicurus  ( c .  300  b.c.),  who 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


3 


introduced  the  term  “atom,”  and  by  the  Latin  poet, 
Lucretius  (c.  75  b.c.)  in  his  De  Rerum  Natura.  Even 
in  the  Middle  Ages  it  was  supported  by  men  of  inde¬ 
pendent  thought,  such  as  Nicholas  of  Autrucia,  who 
assumed  that  all  natural  activities  were  due  to  unions 
or  disunions  of  atoms.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  in 
1348  he  was  forced  to  retract  this  heresy.  With  the 
impetus  given  to  the  new  physics  by  Galileo  (1600)  the 
atomic  view  gradually  spread,  sometimes  explicitly 
stated  as  atomic  theory,  sometimes  as  a  background  for 
the  ideas  of  individual  philosophers.  Various  investi¬ 
gators  developed  comprehensive  atomic  theories  in  which 
they  attempted  to  explain  nearly  everything  from 
purely  arbitrary  hypotheses  ;  they  occasionally  arrived 
at  very  curious  and  amusing  conceptions.  For  example, 
about  1650  the  Frenchman,  Pierre  Gassendi,  following 
some  of  the  ancient  atomists,  explained  the  solidity  of 
bodies  by  assuming  a  hook-like  form  of  atom  so  that  the 
various  atoms  in  a  solid  body  could  be  hooked  together. 
He  thought  of  frost  as  an  element  with  tetrahedral 
atoms,  that  is,  atoms  with  four  plane  faces  and  with  four 
vertices  each  ;  the  vertices  produced  the  characteristic 
pricking  sensation  in  the  skin.  A  much  more  thorough 
treatment  of  the  atomic  theory  was  given  by  Boscowich 
(1770).  He  saw  that  it  was  unnecessary  to  conceive 
of  the  atoms  as  spheres,  cubes,  or  other  sharply  defined 
physical  bodies  ;  he  considered  them  simply  as  points  in 
space,  mathematical  points  with  the  additional  property 
of  being  centres  of  force.  He  assumed  that  any  two 
atoms  influenced  each  other  with  a  force  which  varied, 
according  to  a  complicated  formula,  with  the  distance 
between  the  centres.  But  the  time  was  hardly  ripe  for 
such  a  theory,  inspired  as  it  evidently  was  by  Newton’s 


4 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


teachings  about  the  gravitational  forces  between  the 
bodies  of  the  universe.  Indeed  there  were  no  physical 
experiments  whose  results  could,  with  certainty,  be 
assumed  to  express  the  properties  of  the  individual  atoms. 


The  Atomic  Theory  and  Chemistry. 

In  the  meantime  atomic  investigations  of  a  very 
different  nature  had  been  influencing  the  new  science  of 
chemistry,  in  which  the  atomic  theory  was  later  to  prove 


dryness 


Fig.  i. — The  four  elements  and  the  four  fundamental  characteristics. 


itself  extraordinarily  fruitful.  It  was  particularly  un¬ 
fortunate  that  in  chemistry,  concerned  as  it  is  with  the 
inner  activities  of  the  elements,  Aristotle’s  philosophy 
was  long  the  prevailing  one.  He  adopted  and  developed 
the  famous  theory  of  the  four  “  elements,”  namely,  the 
dry  and  cold  earth,  the  cold  and  damp  water,  the  damp 
and  warm  air,  the  warm  and  dry  fire.  These  "  elements  ” 
must  not  be  confused  with  the  chemical  elements  known 
at  the  present  day  ;  they  were  merely  representatives 
of  the  different  consistent  combinations  of  the  four 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


5 


fundamental  qualities,  dryness  and  wetness,  heat  and 
cold.  From  the  symmetry  in  the  system  these  were 
supposed  to  be  the  principles  by  means  of  which  all  the 
properties  of  matter  could  be  explained.  Neither  the 
four  "  elements  ”  nor  the  four  fundamental  qualities 
could  be  clearly  defined  ;  they  were  vague  ideas  to 
be  discussed  in  long  dialectic  treatises,  but  were 
founded  upon  no  physical  quantities  which  could  be 
measured. 

A  system  of  chemistry  which  had  its  theoretical 
foundations  in  the  Greek  elemental  conceptions  naturally 
had  to  work  in  the  dark.  Undoubtedly  this  uncertainty 
contributed  to  the  relatively  insignificant  results  of  all 
the  labour  expended  in  the  Middle  Ages  on  chemical 
experiments,  many  of  which  had  to  do  with  the  attempt 
to  transmute  the  base  metals  into  gold.  Naturally  there 
were  many  important  contributions  to  chemistry,  and 
the  theories  were  changed  and  developed  in  many  ways 
in  the  course  of  time.  The  alchemists  of  the  Middle 
Ages  thought  that  metal  consisted  only  of  sulphur  and 
quicksilver ;  but  the  interpretation  of  this  idea  was 
influenced  by  the  Greek  elemental  theory  which  was 
maintained  at  the  same  time  ;  thus  these  new  metal 
“  elements  ”  were  considered  by  many  merely  as  the 
expressions  of  certain  aspects  of  the  metallic  charac¬ 
teristics,  rather  than  as  definite  substances,  identical 
with  the  elements  bearing  these  names.  It  is,  however, 
necessary  to  guard  against  attributing  to  a  single  con¬ 
ception  too  great  influence  on  the  historical  development 
of  the  chemical  and  physical  sciences.  That  the  growth 
of  the  latter  was  hindered  for  so  long  a  time  was  due  more 
to  the  uncritical  faith  in  authority  and  to  the  whole 
characteristic  psychological  point  of  view  which  governed 


6 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


Western  thought  in  the  centuries  preceding  the  Renais¬ 
sance. 

Robert  Boyle  (1627-1691)  is  one  of  the  men  to  whom 
great  honour  is  due  for  brushing  aside  the  old  ideas 
about  the  elements  which  had  originated  in  obscure 
philosophical  meditations.  To  him  an  element  was 
simply  a  substance  which  by  no  method  could  be 
separated  into  other  substances,  but  which  could  unite 
with  other  elements  to  form  chemical  compounds 
possessing  very  different  characteristics,  including  that 
of  being  decomposable  into  their  constituent  elements. 
Undoubtedly  Boyle’s  clear  conception  of  this  matter 
was  connected  with  his  representation  of  matter  as  of  an 
atomic  nature.  According  to  the  atomic  conception, 
the  chemical  processes  do  not  depend  upon  changes 
within  the  element  itself,  but  rather  in  the  union  or 
disunion  of  the  constituent  atoms.  Thus  when  iron 
sulphide  is  produced  by  heating  iron  and  sulphur 
together,  according  to  this  conception,  the  iron  atoms 
and  the  sulphur  atoms  combine  in  such  a  way  that  each 
iron  atom  links  itself  with  a  sulphur  atom.  There  is 
then  a  definite  meaning  in  the  statement  that  iron 
sulphide  consists  of  iron  and  sulphur,  and  that  these  two 
substances  are  both  represented  in  the  new  substance. 
There  is  also  a  definite  meaning,  for  instance,  in  the 
statement  that  iron  is  an  element,  namely,  that  by  no 
known  means  can  the  iron  be  broken  down  into  different 
kinds  of  atoms  which  can  be  reunited  to  produce  a 
substance  different  from  iron. 

The  clarity  which  the  atomic  interpretation  gave  to 
the  conception  of  chemical  elements  and  compounds 
was  surely  most  useful  to  chemical  research  in  the  follow¬ 
ing  years ;  but  before  the  atomic  theory  could  play  a 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


7 


really  great  role  in  chemistry,  it  had  to  undergo  consider¬ 
able  development.  In  the  time  of  Boyle,  and  even  later, 
there  was  still  uncertainty  as  to  which  substances  were 
the  elements.  Thus,  water  was  generally  considered 
as  an  element.  According  to  the  so-called  phlogiston 
theory  developed  by  the  German  Stahl  (1660-1734), 
a  theory  which  prevailed  in  chemistry  for  many  years, 
the  metals  were  chemical  compounds  consisting  of  a 
gaseous  substance,  phlogiston,  which  was  driven  off 
when  the  metals  were  heated  in  air,  and  the  metallic 
oxide  which  was  left  behind.  It  was  not  until  the  latter 
half  of  the  eighteenth  century  that  the  foundation  was 
laid  for  the  new  chemical  science  by  a  series  of  dis¬ 
coveries  and  researches  carried  on  by  the  Swedish 
scientist  Scheele,  the  Englishmen  Priestley  and  Caven¬ 
dish,  and  particularly  by  the  Frenchman  Lavoisier.  It 
was  then  discovered  that  water  is  a  chemical  compound 
of  the  gaseous  elements  oxygen  and  hydrogen,  that  air 
is  principally  a  mixture  (not  a  compound)  of  oxygen  and 
nitrogen,  that  combustion  is  a  chemical  process  in  which 
some  substance  is  united  with  oxygen,  that  metals  are 
elements,  while  metallic  oxides,  on  the  other  hand,  are 
compounds  of  metal  and  oxygen,  etc.  Of  special 
significance  for  the  atomic  theory  was  the  fact  that 
Lavoisier  made  weighing  one  of  the  most  powerful  tools 
of  scientific  chemistry. 

Weighing  had  indeed  been  used  previously  in  chemical 
experiments,  but  the  experimenters  had  been  satisfied 
with  very  crude  precision,  and  the  results  had  little 
influence  on  chemical  theory.  For  example,  the  phlo¬ 
giston  theory  was  maintained  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  it 
was  well  known  that  metallic  oxide  weighed  more  than 
the  metal  from  which  it  was  obtained.  Lavoisier  now 


8 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


showed,  by  very  careful  weighings,  that  chemical  com¬ 
binations  or  decompositions  can  never  change  the  total 
weight  of  the  substances  involved  ;  a  given  quantity  of 
metallic  oxide  weighs  just  as  much  as  the  metal  and  the 
oxygen  taken  individually,  or  vice  versa.  From  the 
point  of  view  of  the  atomic  theory,  this  obviously  means 
that  the  weight  of  individual  atoms  is  not  changed  in 
the  combinations  of  atoms  which  occur  in  the  chemical 
processes.  In  other  words,  the  weight  of  an  atom  is  an 
invariable  quantity.  Here,  then,  we  have  the  first  pro¬ 
perty  of  the  atom  itself  to  be  established  by  experiment 
— a  property,  indeed,  which  most  atomists  had  already 
tacitly  assumed. 

Moreover,  by  the  practice  of  weighing  it  was  deter¬ 
mined  that  to  every  chemical  combination  there  corresponds 
a  definite  weight  ratio  among  the  constituent  parts.  This 
also  had  been  previously  accepted  by  most  chemists  as 
highly  probable ;  but  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  law 
at  one  time  was  assailed  from  several  sides. 

In  comparing  the  weight  ratios  in  different  chemical 
compounds  certain  rules  were,  in  the  meantime,  obtained. 
In  many  ways  the  most  important  of  these,  the  so-called 
law  of  multiple  proportions,  was  enunciated  in  the  begin¬ 
ning  of  the  last  century  by  the  Englishman,  John 
Dalton.  As  an  example  of  this  law  we  may  take  two 
compounds  of  carbon  and  hydrogen  called  methane  or 
marsh  gas  and  ethylene,  in  which  the  quantities  of 
hydrogen  compounded  with  the  same  quantity  of  carbon 
are  as  two  is  to  one.  Another  example  may  be  seen 
in  the  compounds  of  carbon  and  oxygen.  In  the  two 
compounds  of  carbon  and  oxygen,  carbon  monoxide  and 
carbon  dioxide,  the  weight  ratios  between  the  carbon 
and  oxygen  are  respectively  as  three  to  four  and  three 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


9 


to  eight.  A  definite  quantity  of  carbon  has  thus  in  carbon 
dioxide  combined  with  just  twice  as  much  oxygen  as  in 
carbon  monoxide.  No  less  than  five  oxygen  com¬ 
pounds  with  nitrogen  are  known,  where  with  a  given 
quantity  of  nitrogen  the  oxygen  is  combined  in  ratios  of 
one,  two,  three,  four  and  five. 

These  simple  number  relations  can  be  explained  very 
easily  by  the  atomic  theory,  by  assuming,  first,  that  all 
atoms  of  the  same  element  have  the  same  weight ;  and 
second,  that  in  a  chemical  combination  between  two 
elements  the  atoms  combine  to  form  an  atomic  group 
characteristic  of  the  compound  in  question — a  compound 
atom ,  as  Dalton  called  it,  or  a  molecule ,  as  the  atomic 
group  is  now  called.  These  molecules  consist  of  com¬ 
paratively  few  atoms,  as,  for  example,  one  of  each  kind, 
or  one  of  one  kind  and  two,  three  or  four  of  another,  or 
two  of  one  kind  and  three  or  four  of  another,  etc.  When 
three  elements  are  involved  in  a  chemical  compound  the 
molecule  must  contain  at  least  three  atoms,  but  there 
may  be  four,  five,  six  or  more.  The  law  of  multiple 
proportions  thus  takes  on  a  more  complicated  character, 
but  it  remains  apparent  even  in  this  case. 

When  Dalton  in  the  beginning  of  last  century  formu¬ 
lated  the  theory  of  the  formation  of  chemical  compounds 
from  the  atoms  of  the  elements,  he  at  once  turned  atomic 
theory  into  the  path  of  more  practical  research,  and  it 
was  soon  evident  that  chemical  research  had  then  ob¬ 
tained  a  valuable  tool.  It  may  be  said  that  Dalton’s 
atomic  theory  is  the  firm  foundation  upon  which  modern 
chemistry  is  built. 

While  Dalton’s  theory  could  not  give  information 
about  the  absolute  weights  in  grams  of  the  atoms  of 
various  elements,  it  could  say  something  about  the 


10  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


relative  atomic  weights,  i.e.,  the  ratios  of  the  weights  of 
the  different  kinds  of  atoms,  although  it  is  true  that  these 
ratios  could  not  always  be  determined  with  certainty. 
If,  for  example,  the  ratio  between  the  oxygen  and  hydro- 


T  9 

3 

tTiryUe 

A 

5 

6 

e 

o 

O 

© 

vJ 

© 

9  10 

©  © 

II 

© 

12 

© 

13 

© 

14 

© 

17 

© 

18 

© 

19 

© 

20 

o 

21 

oo 

0® 

JBi/ntury 

23  v 

(DO 

24 

8 


35  16 


95 


Ternary 

26  27  28 

(DOG)  CKDO 


29 


J 


Fig.  2. — For  description,  see  opposite  page. 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


11 


gen  in  water  is  found  to  be  as  eight  to  one,  then  the 
weight  ratio  between  the  oxygen  atom  and  the  hydrogen 
atom  will  be  as  eight  to  one,  if  the  water  molecule  is 
composed  of  one  oxygen  atom  and  one  hydrogen  atom 
(as  Dalton  supposed,  see  Fig.  2).  But  it  will  be  as  sixteen 
to  one,  if  the  water  molecule  is  composed  of  one  oxygen 
and  two  hydrogen  atoms  (as  we  now  know  to  be  the  case). 
On  the  other  hand,  a  ratio  of  seven  to  one  will  be  com¬ 
patible  with  the  experimental  ratio  of  eight  to  one  only 
if  we  assume  that  the  water  molecule  consists  of  fifteen 
atoms,  eight  of  oxygen  and  seven  of  hydrogen,  a  very 
improbable  hypothesis.  In  another  case  let  us  compare 
the  quantities  of  oxygen  and  of  hydrogen  which  are 
compounded  with  the  same  quantities  of  carbon  in  the 
two  substances,  carbon  monoxide  and  methane  respec¬ 
tively.  On  the  assumption  that  the  molecules  in  question 
have  a  simple  structure,  we  can  draw  conclusions  about 
the  ratio  of  the  atomic  weights  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen. 
Now,  if  a  ratio  such  as  seven  to  one  or  fourteen  to  one  is 

Fig.  2. — Representation  of  a  part  of  Dalton’s  atomic  table  (of  1808) 
where  the  atom  of  each  element  has  its  own  symbol,  and 
chemical  compounds  are  indicated  by  the  union  of  the  atoms 
of  the  elements  into  groups  by  2,  3,  4  .  .  .  (binary,  ternary, 
quaternary  .  .  .  atoms).  Below  are  given  the  designations  of 
the  different  atoms,  and  in  parentheses  the  atomic  weight  given 
by  Dalton  with  that  of  hydrogen  as  unity  and  the  designations 
of  the  indicated  atomic  groups. 

Atoms  of  the  Elements.- — 1.  Hydrogen  (1)  ;  2.  Azote  (5)  ;  3.  Carbon 
(5)  ;  4.  Oxygen  (7)  ;  5.  Phosphorus  (9)  ;  6.  Sulphur  (13)  ;  7.  Mag¬ 
nesia  (20)  ;  8.  Lime  (23)  ;  9.  Soda  (28)  ;  10.  Potash  (42)  ;  11.  Strontites 
(46)  ;  12.  Barytes  (68)  ;  13.  Iron  (38)  ;  14.  Zinc  (56)  ;  15.  Copper  (56)  ; 
16.  Lead  (95)  ;  17.  Silver  (100)  ;  18.  Platina  (100)  ;  19.  Gold  (140)  ; 
20.  Mercury  (167). 

Chemical  Compounds. — 21.  Water;  22.  Ammonia;  23.  26.  27.  and 
30.  Oxygen  compounds  of  Azote  ;  24.  29.  and  33.  Hydrogen  com¬ 
pounds  of  Carbon;  25.  Carbon  monoxide;  28.  Carbon  dioxide;  31. 
Sulphuric  acid  ;  32.  Hydro-sulphuric  acid. 


12  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


obtained  while  the  analysis  of  water  gives  eight  to  one 
or  sixteen  to  one,  then  either  the  structure  of  the  mole¬ 
cule  is  more  complicated  than  was  assumed,  or  the 
analyses  must  be  improved  by  more  careful  experiments. 
We  can  thus  understand  that  the  atomic  theory  can 
serve  as  a  controlling  influence  on  the  analysis  of  chemical 
compounds. 

In  order  to  choose  between  the  different  possible 
ratios  of  atomic  weights,  for  example,  the  eight  to  one 
or  the  sixteen  to  one  in  the  case  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen, 
Dalton  had  to  make  certain  arbitrary  assumptions. 
The  first  of  these  is  that  two  elements  of  which  only  one 
compound  is  known  appear  with  but  one  atom  each  in 
a  molecule.  Partly  on  account  of  this  assumption  and 
partly  on  account  of  the  incompleteness  of  his  analyses, 
Dalton’s  values  of  the  ratios  of  the  atomic  weights  of 
the  atoms  and  his  pictures  of  the  structure  of  molecules 
differ  from  those  of  the  present  day,  as  is  obvious  from 
Fig.  2. 

A  much  firmer  foundation  for  the  choice  made 
appears  later  in  the  Avogadro  Law,  starting  with  the 
fact  that  different  gases  show  great  similarity  in  their 
physical  conduct — for  instance,  all  expand  by  an  in¬ 
crease  of  1/273  of  their  volume  with  an  increase  in  tem¬ 
perature  from  o°  C.  to  i°  C. — the  Italian,  Avogadro,  in 
1811,  put  forward  the  hypothesis  that  equal  volumes  of 
all  gases  at  the  same  temperature  and  pressure  contain 
equal  numbers  of  molecules.  A  few  examples  suffice 
to  show  the  usefulness  of  this  rule. 

When  one  volume  of  the  gas  chlorine  unites  with  one 
volume  of  hydrogen  there  result  two  volumes  of  the  gas, 
hydrogen  chloride,  at  the  same  temperature  and  pres¬ 
sure.  According  to  Avogadro’s  Law  one  molecule  of 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


13 


chlorine  and  one  molecule  of  hydrogen  unite  to  become 
two  molecules  of  hydrogen  chloride,  and  since  each  of 
these  two  molecules  must  contain  at  least  one  atom  of 
hydrogen  and  one  atom  of  chlorine,  it  follows  that 
one  molecule  of  chlorine  must  contain  two  atoms  of 
chlorine  and  that  one  molecule  of  hydrogen  must  con¬ 
tain  two  atoms  of  hydrogen.  From  this  one  can  see 
that  even  in  the  elements  the  atoms  are  united  into 
molecules.  It  is  now  well  established  that  most  ele¬ 
ments  have  diatomic  molecules,  though  some,  including 
mercury  and  many  other  metals,  are  monatomic.  When 
oxygen  and  hydrogen  unite  to  form  water,  one  litre  of 
oxygen  and  two  litres  of  hydrogen  produce  two  litres  of 
water  vapour  at  same  temperature  and  pressure.  Ac¬ 
cordingly,  one  molecule  of  oxygen  and  two  molecules 
of  hydrogen  form  two  molecules  of  water.  If  the 
oxygen  molecule  is  diatomic  like  the  hydrogen,  then  one 
molecule  of  water  contains  one  atom  of  oyxgen  and  two 
atoms  of  hydrogen.  Since  the  weight  ratio  between  the 
oxygen  and  hydrogen  in  water  is  eight  to  one,  the  atomic 
weight  of  oxygen  must  be  sixteen  times  that  of  hydrogen. 

Through  such  considerations,  supported  by  certain 
other  rules,  it  has  gradually  proved  possible  to  obtain 
reliable  figures  for  the  ratios  between  the  atomic  weights  of 
all  known  elements  and  the  atomic  weight  of  hydrogen. 
For  convenience  it  was  customary  to  assign  the  number  I 
to  the  latter  and  to  call  the  ratio  between  the  weight  of 
the  atom  of  a  given  element  and  the  weight  of  the 
hydrogen  atom  the  atomic  weight  of  the  element  in 
question.  Thus  the  atomic  weight  of  oxygen  is  16, 
that  of  carbon  12,  because  one  carbon  atom  weighs  as 
much  as  12  hydrogen  atoms.  Nitrogen  has  the  atomic 
weight  14,  sulphur  32,  copper  63-6,  etc. 


14  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


A  summary  of  the  chemical  properties  and  chemical 
compounds  was  greatly  facilitated  by  the  symbolic 
system  initiated  by  the  Swedish  chemist,  Berzelius.  In 
this  system  the  initial  of  the  Latin  name  of  the  element 
(sometimes  with  one  other  letter  from  the  Latin  name) 
is  made  to  indicate  the  element  itself,  an  atom  of  the 
element,  and  its  atomic  weight  with  respect  to  hydrogen 
as  unity,  while  a  small  subscript  to  the  initial  designates 
the  number  of  atoms  to  be  used.  For  example,  in  the 
chemical  formula  for  sulphuric  acid,  H2S04,  the  symbolic 
formula  means  that  this  substance  is  a  chemical  com¬ 
pound  of  hydrogen,  sulphur  and  oxygen,  that  the  acid 
molecule  consists  of  two  atoms  of  hydrogen,  one  atom  of 
sulphur  and  four  atoms  of  oxygen,  and  that  the  weight 
ratios  between  the  three  constituent  parts  is  as  2x1=2 
to  32  to  4x16=64,  or  as  1  :  16  :  32.  To  say  that  the 
chemical  formula  of  zinc  chloride  is  ZnCl2  means  that 
the  zinc  chloride  molecule  consists  of  one  atom  of  zinc 
and  two  atoms  of  chlorine.  Furthermore  the  changes 
which  take  place  in  a  chemical  process  may  be  indi¬ 
cated  in  a  very  simple  way.  Thus  the  decomposition 
of  water  into  hydrogen  and  oxygen  may  be  represented 
by  the  so-called  chemical  “  equation  ”  2H2CH*2H2-f  02, 
where  H2  and  02  signify  the  molecules  of  hydrogen  and 
oxygen  respectively.  Conversely,  the  combination  of 
hydrogen  and  oxygen  to  form  water  will  be  given  by  the 
equation  2H2  +  02->2H20. 

As  a  consequence  of  the  development  of  the  atomic 
theory  the  atoms  of  the  elements  became,  so  to  speak,  the 
building  stones  of  which  the  elements  and  the  chemical 
compounds  are  built.  It  can  also  be  said  that  the  atoms 
are  the  smallest  particles  which  the  chemists  reckon  with 
in  the  chemical  processes,  but  it  does  not  follow  from  the 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


15 


theory  that  these  building  stones  in  themselves  are  in¬ 
divisible.  The  theory  leaves  the  way  open  to  the  idea 
that  they  are  composed  of  smaller  parts.  A  belief 
founded  on  such  an  idea  was  indeed  enunciated  by  the 
Englishman,  Prout,  a  short  time  after  Dalton  had 
developed  his  atomic  theory.  Prout  assumed  that 
the  hydrogen  atoms  were  the  fundamental  ones,  and 
that  the  atoms  of  the  other  elements  consisted  of  a 
smaller  or  larger  number  of  the  atoms  of  hydrogen. 
This  might  explain  the  fact  that  within  the  limits  of 
experimental  error,  many  atomic  weights  seemed  to 
be  integral  multiples  of  that  of  hydrogen — 16  for 
oxygen,  14  for  nitrogen,  and  12  for  carbon,  etc.  This 
led  to  the  possibility  that  the  same  might  hold  for  all 
elements,  and  this  hypothesis  gave  impetus  to  very 
careful  determinations  of  atomic  weights.  These,  how¬ 
ever,  showed  that  the  assumption  of  the  integral 
multiples  could  not  be  verified.  It  therefore  seemed 
as  if  Prout’s  hypothesis  would  have  to  be  given  up.  It 
has,  however,  recently  come  into  its  own  again,  al¬ 
though  the  situation  is  more  complicated  than  Prout 
had  imagined  (see  p.  97). 

Dalton’s  atomic  theory  gave  no  information  about 
the  atoms  except  that  the  atoms  of  each  element  had 
a  definite  constant  weight,  and  that  they  could  combine 
to  form  molecules  in  certain  simple  ratios.  What  the 
forces  are  which  unite  them  into  such  combinations, 
and  why  they  prefer  certain  unions  to  others,  were 
very  perplexing  problems,  which  could  only  be  solved 
when  chemical  and  physical  research  had  collected  a 
great  mass  of  information  as  a  surer  source  of  speculation. 

From  the  knowledge  of  atomic  weights  it  was  easy 
to  calculate  what  weight  ratios  might  be  found  to  exist 


16  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


in  chemical  compounds,  the  molecules  of  which  con¬ 
sisted  of  simple  atomic  combinations.  Thus  many 
compounds  which  were  later  produced  in  the  laboratory 
were  first  predicted  theoretically,  but  only  a  small  part 
of  the  total  number  of  possible  compounds  (corre¬ 
sponding  to  simple  atomic  combinations)  could  actually 
be  produced.  Clearly  it  was  one  of  the  greatest  problems 
of  chemistry  to  find  the  laws  governing  these  cases. 

It  had  early  been  known  that  the  elements  seemed 
to  fall  into  two  groups,  characterized  by  certain  funda¬ 
mental  differences,  the  metals  and  the  metalloids. 
In  addition,  there  were  recognized  two  very  important 
groups  of  chemical  compounds,  i.e.  acids  and  bases, 
possessing  the  property  of  neutralizing  each  other  to 
form  a  third  group  of  compounds,  the  so-called  salts. 
The  phenomenon  called  electrolysis,  in  which  an  electric 
current  separates  a  dissolved  salt  or  an  acid  into  two 
parts  which  are  carried  respectively  with  and  against 
the  direction  of  the  current,  indicates  strongly  that  the 
forces  holding  the  atoms  together  in  the  molecule  are  of 
an  electrical  nature,  i.e.  of  the  same  nature  as  those 
forces  which  bring  together  bodies  of  opposite  electrical 
charges.  One  is  led  to  denote  all  metals  as  electro¬ 
positive  and  all  metalloids  as  electronegative,  which 
means  that  in  a  compound  consisting  of  a  metal  and  a 
metalloid  the  metal  appears  with  a  positive  charge  and 
the  metalloid  with  a  negative  charge.  The  chemist 
Berzelius  did  a  great  deal  to  develop  electrical  theories 
for  chemical  processes.  Great  difficulties,  however, 
were  encountered,  some  proving  for  the  time  being  in¬ 
surmountable.  Such  a  difficulty,  for  example,  is  the 
circumstance  that  two  atoms  of  the  same  kind  (like  two 
hydrogen  atoms)  can  unite  into  a  diatomic  molecule, 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


17 


although  one  might  expect  them  to  be  similarly  electrified 
and  to  repel  rather  than  attract  each  other. 

Another  circumstance  playing  a  very  important 
part  in  determining  the  chemical  compounds  which  are 
possible,  is  the  consideration  of  what  is  called  valence . 

As  mentioned  above,  one  atom  of  oxygen  combines 
with  two  atoms  of  hydrogen  to  form  water,  while  one 
atom  of  chlorine  combines  with  but  one  atom  of  hydro¬ 
gen  to  form  hydrogen  chloride.  The  oxygen  atom  thus 
seems  to  be  “  equivalent  ”  to  two  hydrogen  atoms  or  two 
chlorine  atoms,  while  one  chlorine  atom  is  “  equivalent  ” 
to  one  hydrogen  atom.  The  atoms  of  hydrogen  and 
chlorine  are  for  this  reason  called  monovalent,  while  that 
of  oxygen  is  called  divalent.  Again  an  acid  is  a  chemical 
compound  containing  hydrogen,  in  which  the  hydrogen 
can  be  replaced  by  a  metal  to  produce  a  metallic  salt. 
Thus,  when  zinc  is  dissolved  by  sulphuric  acid  to  form 
hydrogen  and  the  salt  zinc  sulphate,  the  hydrogen  of 
the  acid  is  replaced  by  the  zinc  and  the  chemical  change 
may  be  expressed  by  the  formula 

Zn  +  H2S04->  H2 + ZnS04 

In  this,  one  atom  of  zinc  changes  place  with  two  atoms 
of  hydrogen.  The  zinc  atom  is  therefore  divalent. 
This  is  consistent  with  the  fact  that  one  zinc  atom  will 
combine  with  one  oxygen  atom  to  form  zinc  oxide.  To 
take  another  example,  if  silver  is  dissolved  in  nitric 
acid,  one  atom  of  silver  is  exchanged  for  one  atom  of 
hydrogen.  Silver,  therefore,  is  monovalent,  and  we 
should  expect  that  one  atom  of  oxygen  would  unite  with 
two  atoms  of  silver.  Some  elements  are  trivalent,  as, 
for  example,  nitrogen,  which  combines  with  hydrogen  to 

form  ammonia,  NH3  ;  others,  again,  are  tetra valent,  such 
2 


18  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


as  carbon,  which  unites  with  hydrogen  to  form  marsh 
gas  CH4,  and  with  oxygen  to  form  carbon  dioxide  C02. 
A  valence  greater  than  seven  or  eight  has  not  been  found 
in  any  element. 


A  B 


C 


Fig.  3. — -Rough  illustrations  of  the  valences  of  the  elements. 

A.  Hydrogen  chloride  (HC1)  ;  B.  Water  (HtO)  ;  C.  Methane  (CH4)  ; 

D.  Ethylene  (C2H4). 

If  we  consider  the  matter  rather  roughly  and  more 
or  less  as  Gassendi  did,  we  can  explain  the  concept  of 
valence  by  assuming  that  the  atoms  possess  hooks ; 
thus  hydrogen  and  chlorine  are  each  furnished  with 
one  hook,  oxygen  and  zinc  with  two  hooks,  nitrogen  with 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


19 


three  hooks,  etc.  When  a  hydrogen  atom  and  a  chlorine 
atom  are  hooked  together,  there  are  no  free  hooks  left, 
and  consequently  the  compound  is  said  to  be  saturated. 
When  one  hydrogen  atom  is  hooked  into  each  of  the  hooks 
of  an  oxygen  or  carbon  atom  the  saturation  is  also 
complete  (see  Fig.  3,  A,  B,  C). 

The  matter  is  not  so  simple  as  this,  however,  since 
the  same  element  can  often  appear  with  different  valences. 
Iron  may  be  divalent,  tri valent  or  hexa valent  in  different 
compounds.  In  many  cases,  however,  where  an  examina¬ 
tion  of  the  weight  ratios  seems  to  show  that  an  element 
has  changed  its  valence,  this  is  not  really  true.  It  was 
mentioned  previously  that  carbon  forms  another  com¬ 
pound  with  hydrogen  in  addition  to  CH4,  namely,  ethy¬ 
lene,  containing  half  as  much  hydrogen  in  proportion 
to  the  same  amount  of  carbon.  With  the  aid  of  Avo- 
gadro’s  Law,  it  is  found  that  the  ethylene  molecule  is 
not  CH2  but  C2H4.  Thus  we  can  say  that  the  two  carbon 
atoms  in  the  molecule  are  held  together  by  two  pairs  of 

hooks,  and  consequently  the  compound  can  be  expressed 
_  .  .  .  H— C— H 

by  the  formula  \\  where  the  dashes  correspond  to 

H— C— H 

hooks  (cf.  Fig.  3,  D).  Such  a  formula  is  called  a 
structural  formula. 

Even  if  we  are  not  allowed  to  think  of  the  atoms  in 
the  molecules  as  held  together  by  hooks,  it  is  well  to  have 
some  sort  of  concrete  picture  of  molecular  structure. 
It  is  possible  to  represent  the  tetravalent  carbon  atom 
in  the  form  of  a  tetrahedron,  and  to  consider  the  united 
atoms  or  atomic  groups  as  placed  at  the  four  vertices. 
With  such  a  spatial  representation  we  can  get  an  idea 
about  many  chemical  questions  which  otherwise  would 
be  difficult  to  explain.  We  know,  for  example,  that 


20 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


two  compound  molecules  having  the  same  kind  and 
number  of  atoms  and  the  same  bonds  (and  hence  the 
same  structural  formulae),  may  yet  be  different  in  that 
they  are  images  of  each  other  like  a  pair  of  gloves.  Sub¬ 
stances  whose  molecules  are  symmetrical  in  this  way 
can  be  distinguished  from  each  other  by  their  different 
action  on  the  passage  of  light.  This  molecular  chemistry 
of  space,  or  stereo-chemistry  as  it  is  called,  has  proved 
of  great  importance  in  explaining  difficult  problems  in 
organic  chemistry,  i.e.  the  chemistry  of  carbon.  Al¬ 
though  there  have  never  been  many  chemists  who 
really  have  believed  the  carbon  atom  to  be  a  rigid 
tetrahedron,  we  must  admit  that  in  this  way  it  has 
been  possible  to  get  on  the  track  of  the  secrets  of 
atomic  structure. 

In  comparing  the  properties  of  the  elements  with 
their  atomic  weights,  there  has  been  discovered  a 
peculiar  relation  which  remained  for  a  long  time  without 
explanation,  but  which  later  suggested  a  certain  connec¬ 
tion  between  the  inner  structure  of  an  atom  and  its 
chemical  properties.  We  refer  to  the  natural  or  periodic 
system  of  the  elements  which  was  enunciated  in  1869  by 
the  Russian  chemist,  Mendelejeff,  and  about  the  same 
time  and  independently  by  the  German,  Lothar  Meyer. 
This  system  will  be  understood  most  clearly  by  examining 
the  table  on  p.  23,  where  the  elements  with  their  respec¬ 
tive  atomic  weights  and  chemical  symbols  are  arranged 
in  numbered  columns  so  that  the  atomic  weights  increase 
upon  reading  the  table  from  left  to  right  or  from  top  to 
bottom.  It  will  be  seen  that  in  each  of  the  nine  columns 
there  are  collected  elements  with  related  properties, 
forming  what  may  be  called  chemical  families.  The 
table  as  here  given  is  of  a  recent  date  and  differs  from 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


21 


the  old  table  of  Mendelejeff,  both  in  the  greater  number 
of  elements  and  in  the  particulars  of  the  arrangement. 
With  each  element  there  is  associated  a  number  which 
indicates  its  position  in  the  series  with  respect  to 
increasing  atomic  weight.  Thus  hydrogen  has  the  num¬ 
ber  i,  helium  2,  etc.,  up  to  uranium,  the  atom  of  which 
is  the  heaviest  of  any  known  element,  and  to  which  the 
number  92  is  given.  In  each  of  the  columns  the  elements 
fall  naturally  into  two  sub-groups,  and  this  division  is 
indicated  in  the  table  by  placing  the  chemical  symbols 
to  the  right  or  left  in  the  column. 

On  close  examination  it  becomes  evident  that  the 
regularity  in  the  system  is  not  entirely  simple.  First 
of  all  some  cases  will  be  found  where  the  atomic  weight 
of  one  element  is  greater  than  that  of  the  following 
element.  (The  cases  of  argon  and  potassium  on  the  one 
hand  and  cobalt  and  nickel  on  the  other  are  examples.) 
Such  an  interchange  is  absolutely  necessary  if  the 
elements  which  belong  to  the  same  chemical  family  are 
to  be  placed  in  the  same  column.  As  a  second  instance 
of  irregularity,  attention  must  be  called  to  Column  VIII. 
in  the  table.  While  in  the  first  score  or  so  of  elements 
it  is  always  found  that  two  successive  elements  have 
different  properties  and  clearly  belong  to  distinct 
chemical  families,  in  the  so-called  iron  group  (iron, 
cobalt  and  nickel)  we  meet  with  a  case  where  success¬ 
ive  elements  resemble  each  other  in  many  respects 
(for  instance,  in  their  magnetic  properties).  Since  there 
are  two  more  such  “  triads  ”  in  the  periodic  system, 
however,  we  cannot  properly  call  this  an  irregularity. 
But  in  addition  to  these  difficulties  there  is  what  we 
may  even  call  a  kind  of  inelegance  presented  by  the  so- 
called  “  rare  earths  ”  group.  In  this  group  there  follow 


22  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

after  lanthanum  thirteen  elements  whose  properties  are 
rather  similar,  so  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  separate 
them  from  each  other  in  the  mixtures  in  which  they 
occur  in  the  minerals  of  nature.  (In  the  table  these 
elements  are  enclosed  in  a  frame.) 

On  the  other  hand,  the  apparent  absence  of  an 
element  in  certain  places  in  the  table  (indicated  by  a 
dash)  cannot  by  any  means  be  looked  upon  as  irregular. 
In  Mendelejeff’s  first  system  there  were  many  vacant 
spaces.  With  the  help  of  his  table  Mendelejeff  was,  to 
some  extent,  able  to  predict  the  properties  of  the  missing 
elements.  An  example  of  this  is  the  case  of  the  element 
between  gallium  and  arsenic.  This  is  called  germanium, 
and  was  discovered  to  have  precisely  the  properties 
which  had  been  predicted  for  it — a  discovery  which  was 
one  of  the  greatest  triumphs  in  favour  of  the  reality 
of  the  periodic  system.  On  the  whole,  the  elements 
discovered  since  the  time  of  Mendelejeff  have  found 
their  natural  positions  in  the  table.  This  is  seen,  for 
example,  in  the  case  of  the  so-called  “inactive  gases” 
of  the  atmosphere,  helium,  argon,  neon,  xenon,  krypton 
and  niton,  which  have  the  common  property  of  being 
able  to  form  no  chemical  combinations  whatever.  Their 
valence  is  therefore  zero,  and  in  the  table  they  are 
placed  by  themselves  in  a  separate  column  headed 
with  zero. 

To  explain  the  mystery  of  the  periodic  system,  it  was 
necessary  to  make  clear  not  only  the  regularity  of  it, 
but  also  the  apparent  irregularities  which  seemed  to  be 
arbitrary  individual  peculiarities  of  certain  elements  or 
groups.  In  the  periodic  system,  chemistry  laid  down 
some  rather  searching  tests  for  future  theories  of  atomic 
structure. 


p 


THE  PERIODIC  OR  NATURAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 


44  Ruthenium  45  Rhodium 

Ru  ioi"7  Rh  102*9 

46  Palladium 

Pd  106*7 

r-t  H 

VIII. 

,±j  p 
rt  01 

40  10 

CJ  0 

«  %% 

00^2 
—  m00 

5  ul  <N 

S-4  O 

VO 

62  Samarium 
Sm  150*4 

66  Dysprosium 

Dy  162*5 

ium  71  Cassiopeium 

d  Cp  175*0 

76  Osmium  77  lridiun 

Os  190*9  Ir  192* 

78  Platinum 

Pt  195*2 

VII. 

O 

V  *0 
C  m 

£ 

On 

LO 

O  * 

.5  co 

j-. _ 

i° 

CJ 

H 

<U 

c/5 

O 

C 

a 

gP 

rt 

Sc 

lO>*H 

M  ^ 

ON 
O  4 
c  On 

.5 

£  * 
oCQ 

u 

W 

to 

CO 

1 

CO 

tJ" 

j 

ON 

V  'C 

c  « 

•  ^  M 

T3 

0  ^ 

CO 

10 

1m  60  Neodymium  61  — 

Nd  144*3 

Gadolinium  65  Terbium 

Gd  157*3  .  Tb  T59"2 

69  Thulium  70  Ytterb 

Tm  t68’5  Yb  173*1 

m 

m 

00 

VI. 

8  Oxygen 

O  16 

M 

3  m 

43  C/3 

_a 

"3 

C/3 

VD 

H 

g 

.2 

1  P 

A  Jo 

U  tH 

•*o 

a 

C4 

g  ON 

D  ^ 

•  G  <L> 

Sw 

"3 

in 

■"t* 

CO 

42  Molybdenum 
Mo  96*0 

52  Tellurium 
Te  127*5 

G 

<U 

if. ) 

W) 

2  0 

3  C- 
Ho? 
n-  * 

84  Polonium 

Po  210*0 

G 

.2 

’£ 

rt 

u> 

00 

CO 

N  N 

> 

O 

c  V 

M 

M> 

0  55 

w 

2 

</)  0 
la 

oA 

co 

0 

Ph 

10 

M 

s 

.2 

#r3 

ctf 

■9p 

>  w 
^  vo 

C?> 

33  Arsenic 

As  75*0 

r* 

B 

*J3 

.  0  10 

iz  #r° 

on 

'IrO 

X 

C  <N 

2  0 

S  <N 

•  H  M 

<c/} 

M 

IO 

.g  ^ 

Gvo^ 

-oi  G 

0  ?  C 

<D  *g  VO 

C/)  J-<  t-LJ  M 

2^  g  £j  *- 

*  |p“h 

ON  *0  M  VO 

IO  Q  IO 

73  Tantalum 
Ta  181*5 

83  Bismuth 

Bi  209*0 

91  Protactinium 

Pa? 

IV. 

6  Carbon 

C  12*0 

14  Silicon 

Si  28*3 

s 

.2 

’£ 

.ts  m 

H  CO 

(N 

£  ^ 
g  *<N 

'£  ^ 
g3  O 

EO 

H 

O 

O 

N 

co 

40  Zirconium 
Zr  90*6 

ts 

CO 

C  M 

H  a 
0^ 

to 

2  H 

3  3 

WH  g  yi 

c  co  O  CO 

G  (N  VO  VO 

•2'o  ^  M 

S  ^  0  0 

O  0 

72  Hafnium 
Hf  179 

T3  0 
d  CN 

•-'Oh 

M 

00 

90  Thorium 
Th  232*1 

s 

-2 

s 

3 

On 

g  On 

5  vo 

2 

00 

2  2* 

£V 

G 

III. 

5  Boroi 
B  ii’o 

.S 

6  M 

Jv. 

<  0 
cert 

'S 

§r 

0 

C/3  -T 

M  O 

M  C/3 

•2  3 
150 
O 

H 

CO 

.2 
*  1— < 

•*-» 

**  00 

On00 

2  H 

'a  c 

G  HH 
HH 

ON 

57  Lan¬ 
thanum 
La  139*0 

^3  CQ 

1h 

H 

H 

00 

89  Actinii 
Ac? 

II. 

4  Beryllium 
Be  9‘i 

12  Magnesium 
Mg  24*3 

20  Calcium 
Ca  40*1 

3- 

10 

0  'O 
.2  c 
isj  N 

0 

co 

38  Strontium 
Sr  87*6 

48  Cadmium 
Ca  1 12*4 

56  Barium 
Ba  137*3 

' 

80  Mercury 
Hg  200*6 

88  Radium 
Ra  226*0 

HH 

1  Hydrogen 
H  1 '008 

3  Lithium 
Li  6*94 

1 1  Sodium 
Na  23*0 

s 

.2 

*on 

I 

w 

O  M 
^  ON 

O'  fO 

VO 

Is 

a  3 

c3° 

On 

W 

£ 

3 

s 

■3  1/1 

2  CO 

^4= 

47  Silver 

Ag  107*9 

G 

3 

S?5 

O  J? 

“3  <A 

« 

ON 
T3  m 

'o  3 
0<J 

ON 

1 

OO 

O 

2  Helium 
He  4*00 

c  p 
0  0 

OJ  N 

5?  1) 
o£ 

H 

18  Argon 

A  39‘9 

36  Krypton 
i  Kr  82*9 

r* 

0  P 
c  0 

V  ro 

X  M 

10 

86  Niton 

Ni  222*0 

23 


24  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


The  Molecular  Theory  of  Physics. 

From  a  consideration  of  the  chemical  properties  of 
the  elements  we  shall  now  turn  to  an  examination  of 
the  physical  characteristics,  although  in  a  certain  sense 
chemistry  itself  is  but  one  special  phase  of  physics. 

If  matter  is  really  constructed  of  independently 
existing  particles — atoms  and  molecules — the  interplay 
of  the  individual  parts  must  determine  not  only  the 
chemical  activities,  but  also  the  other  properties  of 
matter.  Since  most  of  these  properties  are  different 
for  different  substances,  or  in  other  words  are  “  molecular 
properties/'  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  in  many 
cases  explanations  can  be  more  readily  given  by  con¬ 
sidering  the  molecules  as  the  fundamental  parts.  It  is 
natural  that  the  first  attempts  to  develop  a  molecular 
theory  concerned  gases,  for  their  physical  properties  are 
much  simpler  than  those  of  liquids  or  solids.  This 
simplicity  is  indeed  easily  understood  on  the  molecular 
theory.  When  a  liquid  by  evaporation  is  transformed 
into  a  gas,  the  same  weight  of  the  element  has  a  vol¬ 
ume  several  hundred  times  greater  than  before.  The 
molecules,  packed  together  tightly  in  the  liquid,  in  the 
gas  are  separated  from  each  other  and  can  move  freely 
without  influencing  each  other  appreciably.  When  two 
of  them  come  very  close  to  each  other,  mutually  re¬ 
pulsive  forces  will  arise  to  prevent  collision.  Since  it 
must  be  assumed  that  in  such  a  “  collision  ”  the  individual 
molecules  do  not  change,  they  can  then  to  a  certain  extent 
be  considered  as  elastic  bodies,  spheres  for  instance. 

From  considerations  of  this  nature  the  kinetic  theory 
of  gases  developed.  According  to  this  a  mass  of  gas 
consists  of  an  immense  number  of  very  small  molecules. 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


25 


Each  molecule  travels  with  great  velocity  in  a  straight 
line  until  it  meets  an  obstruction,  such  as  another 
molecule  or  the  wall  of  the  containing  vessel ;  after 
such  an  encounter  the  molecule  travels  in  a  second 
direction  until  it  collides  again,  and  so  on.  The 
pressure  of  the  gas  on  the  wall  of  the  container  is  the 
result  of  the  very  many  collisions  which  each  little  piece 
of  wall  receives  in  a  short  interval  of  time.  The  magni¬ 
tude  of  the  pressure  depends  upon  the  number,  mass 
and  velocity  of  the  molecules.  The  velocity  will  be 
different  for  the  individual  molecules  in  a  gas,  even  if  all 
the  molecules  are  of  the  same  kind,  but  at  a  given 
temperature  an  average  velocity  can  be  determined  and 
used.  If  the  temperature  is  increased,  this  average 
molecular  velocity  will  be  increased,  and  if  at  the  same 
time  the  volume  is  kept  constant,  the  pressure  of  the 
gas  on  the  walls  will  be  increased.  If  the  tempera¬ 
ture  and  the  average  velocity  remain  constant  while 
the  volume  is  halved,  there  will  be  twice  as  many  mole¬ 
cules  per  cubic  centimetre  as  before.  Therefore,  on 
each  square  centimetre  of  the  containing  wall  there  will 
be  twice  as  many  collisions,  and  consequently  the 
pressure  will  be  doubled.  Boyle’s  Law,  that  the  pressure 
of  a  gas  at  a  given  temperature  is  inversely  proportional 
to  its  volume,  is  thus  an  immediate  result  of  the  molecular 
theory. 

The  molecular  theory  also  throws  new  light  upon 
the  correspondence  between  heat  and  mechanical  work 
and  upon  the  law  of  the  conservation  of  energy,  which 
about  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century  was  enunci¬ 
ated  by  the  Englishman,  Joule,  the  Germans,  Mayer 
and  Helmholtz,  and  the  Dane,  Colding.  A  brief  dis¬ 
cussion  of  heat  and  energy  will  be  given  here,  since 


26  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

some  conception  of  these  phenomena  is  necessary  in 
understanding  what  follows. 

To  lift  a  stone  of  5  pounds  through  a  distance  of 
10  feet  demands  an  expenditure  of  work  amounting  to 
5x10=50  foot-pounds;  but  the  stone  is  now  enabled 
to  perform  an  equally  large  amount  of  work  in  falling 
back  these  10  feet.  The  stone,  by  its  height  above  the 
earth  and  by  the  attraction  of  the  earth,  now  has  in  its 
elevated  position  what  is  called  “  potential  ”  energy  to 
the  amount  of  50  foot-pounds.  If  the  stone  as  it  falls 
lifts  another  weight  by  some  such  device  as  a  block  and 
tackle,  the  potential  energy  lost  by  the  falling  stone  will 
be  transferred  to  the  lifted  one.  If  the  apparatus  is 
frictionless,  the  falling  stone  can  lift  5  pounds  10  feet  or 
10  pounds  5  feet,  etc.,  so  that  all  the  5°  foot-pounds  of 
potential  energy  will  be  stored  in  the  second  stone.  If 
instead  of  being  used  to  lift  the  second  stone,  the  original 
stone  is  allowed  to  fall  freely  or  to  roll  down  an  inclined 
plane  without  friction,  the  velocity  will  increase  as  the 
stone  falls,  and,  as  the  potential  energy  is  lost,  another 
form  of  energy,  known  as  energy  of  motion  or  kinetic 
energy ,  is  gained.  Conversely,  a  body  when  it  loses  its 
velocity  can  do  work,  such  as  stretching  a  spring  or  setting 
another  body  in  motion.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  stone 
is  fastened  to  a  cord  and  is  swinging  like  a  pendulum 
in  a  vacuum  where  there  is  no  resistance  to  its  motion. 
The  pendulum  will  alternately  sink  and  rise  again  to 
the  same  height.  As  the  pendulum  sinks,  the  potential 
energy  will  be  changed  into  kinetic  energy,  but  as  it 
rises  again  the  kinetic  will  be  exchanged  for  potential. 
Thus  there  is  no  loss  of  energy,  but  merely  a  continuous 
exchange  between  the  two  forms. 

If  a  moving  body  meets  resistance,  or  if  its  free  fall  is 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


27 


halted  by  a  fixed  body,  it  might  seem  as  if,  at  last,  the 
energy  were  lost.  This,  however,  is  not  the  case,  for 
another  transformation  occurs.  Every  one  knows  that 
heat  is  developed  by  friction,  and  that  heat  can  produce 
work,  as  in  a  steam-engine.  Careful  investigations  have 
shown  that  a  given  amount  of  mechanical  work  will 
always  produce  a  certain  definite  amount  of  heat,  that  is, 
400  foot-pounds  of  work,  if  converted  into  heat,  will 
always  produce  1  B.T.U.  of  heat,  which  is  the  amount 
necessary  to  raise  the  temperature  of  1  pound  of  water 
i°  F.  Conversely,  when  heat  is  converted  into  work, 
1  B.T.U.  of  heat  “  vanishes  ”  every  time  400  foot-pounds 
of  work  are  produced.  Heat  then  is  just  a  special  form 
of  energy,  and  the  development  of  heat  by  friction  or 
collision  is  merely  a  transformation  of  energy  from  one 
form  to  another. 

With  the  assistance  of  the  molecular  theory  it  becomes 
possible  to  interpret  as  purely  mechanical  the  transforma¬ 
tion  of  mechanical  work  into  heat  energy.  Let  us  suppose 
that  a  falling  body  strikes  a  piston  at  the  top  of  a  gas- 
filled  cylinder,  closed  at  the  bottom.  If  the  piston  is 
driven  down,  the  gas  will  be  compressed  and  therefore 
heated,  for  the  speed  of  the  molecules  will  be  increased 
by  collisions  with  the  piston  in  its  downward  motion. 
In  this  example  the  kinetic  energy  given  to  the  piston  by 
the  exterior  falling  body  is  used  to  increase  the  kinetic 
energy  of  the  molecules  of  the  gas.  When  the  molecules 
contain  more  than  one  atom,  attention  must  also  be 
given  to  the  rotations  of  the  atoms  in  a  molecule  about 
each  other.  A  part  of  any  added  kinetic  energy  in  the 
gas  will  be  used  to  increase  the  energy  of  the  atomic 
rotations. 

The  next  step  is  to  assume  that,  in  solids  and  liquids, 


28  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

heat  is  purely  a  molecular  motion.  Here,  too,  the 
development  of  heat  after  collision  with  a  moving  body 
should  be  treated  as  a  transformation  of  the  kinetic 
energy  of  an  individual,  visible  body  into  an  inner  kinetic 
energy,  divided  among  the  innumerable  invisible  mole¬ 
cules  of  the  heated  solid  or  liquid.  In  considering  the 
internal  conduct  of  gases  it  is  unnecessary  (at  least  in 
the  main)  to  consider  any  inner  forces  except  the  re¬ 
pulsions  in  the  collisions  of  the  molecules.  In  solids 
and  liquids,  however,  the  attractions  of  the  tightly 
packed  molecules  for  each  other  must  not  be  neglected. 
Indeed  the  situation  is  too  complicated  to  be  explained 
by  any  simple  molecular  theory.  Not  all  energy  trans¬ 
formations  can  be  considered  as  purely  mechanical. 
For  instance,  heat  can  be  produced  in  a  body  by  rays 
from  the  sun  or  from  a  hot  fire,  and,  conversely,  a  hot 
body  can  lose  its  heat  by  radiation.  Here,  also,  we 
are  concerned  with  transformations  of  energy  ;  therefore 
the  law  for  the  conservation  of  energy  still  holds,  i.e.  the 
total  amount  of  energy  can  neither  be  increased  nor 
decreased  by  transformations  from  one  form  to  another. 
For  the  production  of  i  B.T.U.  of  heat  a  definite  amount 
of  radiation  energy  is  required;  conversely,  the  same 
amount  of  radiation  energy  is  produced  when  i  B.T.U. 
of  heat  is  transformed  into  radiation.  This  change 
cannot,  however,  be  explained  as  the  result  of  mechanical 
interplay  between  bodies  in  motion. 

The  mechanical  theory  of  heat  is  very  useful  when 
we  restrict  ourselves  to  the  transfer  of  heat  from  one 
body  to  another,  which  is  in  contact  with  it.  When 
applied  to  gases  the  theory  leads  directly  to  Avogadro’s 
Law.  If  two  masses  of  gas  have  the  same  tempera¬ 
ture,  i.e.,  if  no  exchange  of  heat  between  them  takes 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


29 


place  even  if  they  are  in  contact  with  each  other,  then 
the  average  value  of  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  molecules 
must  be  the  same  in  both  gases.  If  one  gas  is  hydrogen 
and  the  other  oxygen,  the  lighter  hydrogen  molecules 
must  have  a  greater  velocity  than  the  heavier  oxygen 
molecules ;  otherwise  they  cannot  have  the  same 
kinetic  energy  (the  kinetic  energy  of  a  body  is  one-half 
the  product  of  the  mass  and  the  square  of  the  velocity). 
Since  the  pressure  of  a  gas  depends  upon  the  kinetic 
energy  of  the  molecules  and  upon  their  number  per  cubic 
centimetre,  at  the  same  temperature  and  pressure  equal 
volumes  must  contain  equal  numbers  of  oxygen  and  of 
hydrogen  molecules.  As  Joule  showed  in  1851,  from 
the  mass  of  a  gas  per  cubic  centimetre  and  from  its 
pressure  per  square  centimetre,  the  average  velocity 
of  the  molecules  can  be  calculated.  For  hydrogen  at 
o°  C.  and  atmospheric  pressure  the  average  velocity 
is  about  5500  feet  per  second ;  for  oxygen  under  the 
same  conditions  it  is  something  over  1300  feet  per 
second. 

All  these  results  of  the  atomic  and  molecular  theory, 
however,  gave  no  information  about  the  absolute  weight 
of  the  individual  atoms  and  molecules,  nor  about  their 
magnitude  nor  the  number  of  molecules  in  a  cubic  centi¬ 
metre  at  a  given  temperature  and  pressure.  As  long  as 
such  questions  were  unsolved  there  was  a  suggestion  of 
unreality  in  the  theory.  The  suspicion  was  easily  aroused 
that  the  theory  was  merely  a  convenient  scheme  for  pic¬ 
turing  a  series  of  observations,  and  that  atoms  and  mole¬ 
cules  were  merely  creations  of  the  imagination.  The 
theory  would  seem  more  plausible  if  its  supporters  could 
say  how  large  and  how  heavy  the  atoms  and  molecules 
were.  The  molecular  theory  of  gases  showed  how  to 


1 


30  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

solve  these  problems  which  chemistry  had  been  powerless 
to  solve. 

Let  ns  assume  that  the  temperature  of  a  mass  of 
gas  is  ioo°  C.  at  a  certain  altitude,  and  o°  C.  one  metre 
lower,  i.e.,  the  molecules  have  different  average  velocities 
in  the  two  places.  The  difference  between  the  velocities 
will  gradually  decrease  and  disappear  on  account  of 
molecular  collisions.  We  might  expect  this  “  levelling 
out  ”  process  or  equilibration  to  proceed  very  rapidly 
because  of  the  great  velocity  of  the  molecules,  but  we 
must  consider  the  fact  that  the  molecules  are  not 
entirely  free  in  their  movements.  In  reality  they  will 
travel  but  very  short  distances  before  meeting  other 
molecules,  and  consequently  their  directions  of  motion 
will  change.  It  is  easy  to  understand  that  the  differ¬ 
ence  between  the  velocities  of  the  molecules  of  the 
gas  will  not  disappear  so  quickly  when  the  molecules 
move  in  zigzag  lines  with  very  short  straight  stretches. 
The  greater  velocity  in  one  part  of  the  gas  will  then 
influence  the  velocity  in  the  other  part  only  through 
many  intermediate  steps.  Gases  are  therefore  poor 
conductors  of  heat.  When  the  molecular  velocity  of  a 
gas  and  its  conductivity  of  heat  are  known,  the  average 
length  of  the  small  straight  pieces  of  the  zigzag  lines 
can  be  calculated— in  other  words,  the  length  of  the 
mean  free  path.  This  length  is  very  short  ;  for  oxygen 
at  standard  temperature  and  pressure  it  is  about  one 
ten-thousandth  of  a  millimetre,  or  o*i  [i>}  where  (M  is 
0*001  millimetre  or  one  micron. 

In  addition  to  the  velocity  of  the  molecules,  the 
length  of  the  mean  free  path  depends  upon  the  average 
distance  between  the  centres  of  two  neighbouring  mole¬ 
cules  (in  other  words,  upon  the  number  of  molecules 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


31 


per  cubic  centimetre)  and  upon  their  size.  There  is 
difficulty  in  defining  the  size  of  molecules  because,  as  a 
rule,  each  contains  at  least  two  atoms ;  but  it  is  help¬ 
ful  to  consider  the  molecules,  temporarily,  as  elastic 
spheres.  Even  with  this  assumption  we  cannot  yet 
determine  their  dimensions  from  the  mean  free  path, 
since  there  are  two  unknowns,  the  dimensions  of  the 
molecules  and  their  number  per  cubic  centimetre.  Upon 
these  two  quantities  depends,  however,  also  the  volume 
which  will  contain  this  number  of  molecules,  if  they  are 
packed  closely  together.  If  we  assume  that  we  meet 
such  a  packing  when  the  substance  is  condensed  in 
liquid  form,  this  volume  can  be  calculated  from  a 
knowledge  of  the  ratio  between  the  volume  in  liquid 
form  and  the  volume  of  the  same  mass  in  gaseous  form 
(at  o°  C.  and  atmospheric  pressure).  Then  from  this 
result  and  the  length  of  the  mean  free  path  the  two 
unknowns  can  be  determined.  Although  the  assump¬ 
tions  are  imperfect,  they  serve  to  give  an  idea  about 
the  dimensions  of  the  molecules  ;  the  results  found  in 
this  way  are  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  those 
derived  later  by  more  perfect  methods  of  an  electrical 
nature. 

The  radius  of  a  molecule,  considered  as  a  sphere, 
is  of  the  order  of  magnitude  o-i  where  ^  means 
io-6  millimetre  or  o-ooi  micron.  Even  if  a  mole¬ 
cule  is  by  no  means  a  rigid  sphere,  the  value  given 
shows  that  the  molecule  is  almost  unbelievably  small, 
or,  in  other  words,  that  it  can  produce  appreciable 
attraction  and  repulsion  in  only  a  very  small  region 
in  space. 

The  number  of  molecules  in  a  cubic  centimetre  of 
gas  at  o°  C.  and  atmospheric  pressure  has  been  calculated 


32 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


with  fair  accuracy  as  approximately  27  X  io18.  From 
this  number  and  from  the  weight  of  a  cubic  centimetre 
of  a  given  gas  the  weight  of  one  molecule  can  be  found. 
One  hydrogen  molecule  weighs  about  1-65  Xio-24  grams, 
and  one  gram  of  hydrogen  contains  about  6xio23 
atoms  and  3  X  io23  molecules.  The  weight  of  the  atoms 
of  the  other  elements  can  be  found  by  multiplying  the 
weight  of  the  hydrogen  atom  by  the  relative  atomic 
weight  of  the  element  in  question — 16  for  oxygen,  14 
for  nitrogen,  etc.  If  the  pressure  on  the  gas  is  reduced 
as  much  as  possible  (to  about  one  ten-millionth  of  an 
atmosphere)  there  will  still  be  3X1012  molecules  in  a 
cubic  centimetre,  and  the  average  distance  between 
molecules  will  be  about  one  micron.  The  mean  free  path 
between  two  collisions  will  be  considerable,  about  two 
metres,  for  instance,  in  the  case  of  hydrogen. 

The  values  found  for  the  number,  weight  and 
dimensions  of  molecules  are  either  so  very  large  or  so 
extremely  small  that  many  people,  instead  of  having 
more  faith  in  the  atomic  and  molecular  theory,  perhaps 
may  be  more  than  ever  inclined  to  suppose  the  atoms 
and  molecules  to  be  mere  creations  of  the  imagination. 
In  fact,  it  is  only  two  or  three  decades  ago  that  some 
physicists  and  chemists — led  by  the  celebrated  German 
scientist,  Wilhelm  Ostwald— denied  the  existence  of 
atoms  and  molecules,  and  even  went  so  far  as  to  try  to 
remove  the  atomic  theory  from  science.  When  these 
sceptics,  in  defence  of  their  views,  said  that  the  atoms 
and  molecules  were,  and  for  ever  would  be,  completely 
inaccessible  to  observation,  it  had  to  be  admitted  at 
that  time  that  they  were  seemingly  sure  of  their  argu¬ 
ment,  in  this  one  objection  at  any  rate. 

A  series  of  remarkable  discoveries  at  the  close  of 


ATOMS  AND  MOLECULES 


33 


the  nineteenth  century  so  increased  our  knowledge  of 
the  atoms  and  improved  the  methods  of  studying 
them  that  all  doubts  about  their  existence  had  to  be 
silenced.  However  incredible  it  may  sound,  we  are 
now  in  a  position  to  examine  many  of  the  activities  of  a 
single  atom,  and  even  to  count  atoms,  one  by  one, 
and  to  photograph  the  path  of  an  individual  atom.  All 
these  discoveries  depend  upon  the  behaviour  of  atoms  as 
electrically  charged,  moving  under  the  influence  of  elec¬ 
trical  forces.  This  subject  will  be  developed  in  another 
section  after  a  discussion  of  some  phenomena  of  light, 
an  understanding  of  which  is  necessary  for  the  apprecia¬ 
tion  of  the  theory  of  atomic  structure  proposed  bv  Niels 
Bohr. 

In  the  molecular  theory  of  gases,  where  we  have  to 
do  with  neutral  molecules,  much  progress  has  in  the  last 
years  been  made  by  the  Dane,  Martin  Knudsen,  in  his 
experiments  at  a  very  low  pressure,  when  the  molecules 
can  travel  relatively  far  without  colliding  with  other 
molecules.  While  his  researches  give  information  on 
many  interesting  and  important  details,  his  work  gives 
at  the  same  time  evidence  of  a  very  direct  nature  con¬ 
cerning  the  existence  of  atoms  and  molecules. 


CHAPTER  II 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 

The  Wave  Theory  of  Light. 

There  have  been  several  theories  about  the  nature 
of  light.  The  great  English  physicist,  Isaac  Newton 
(1642-1727),  who  was  a  pioneer  in  the  study  of  light  as 
well  as  in  that  of  mechanics,  favoured  an  atomic  ex¬ 
planation  of  light ;  i.e.y  he  thought  that  it  consisted  of 
particles  or  light  corpuscules  which  were  emitted  from 
luminous  bodies  like  projectiles  from  a  cannon.  In 
contrast  to  this  “  emission  ”  theory  was  the  wave  theory 
of  Newton’s  contemporary,  the  Dutch  scientist,  Huygens. 
According  to  him,  light  was  a  wave  motion  passing  from 
luminous  bodies  into  a  substance  called  the  ether,  which 
filled  the  otherwise  empty  universe  and  permeated  all 
bodies,  at  least  all  transparent  ones.  In  the  nineteenth 
century  the  wave  theory,  particularly  through  the  work 
of  the  Englishman,  Young,  and  the  Frenchman,  Fresnel, 
came  to  prevail  over  the  emission  theory.  Since  the 
wave  theory  plays  an  important  part  in  the  following 
chapters,  a  discussion  of  the  general  characteristics 
of  all  wave  motions  is  appropriate  here.  The  examples 
will  include  water  waves  on  the  surface  of  a  body  of 
water,  and  sound  waves  in  air. 

Let  us  suppose  that  we  are  in  a  boat  which  is  anchored 

34 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


35 


on  a  body  of  water  and  let  us  watch  the  regular  waves 
which  pass  us.  If  there  is  neither  wind  nor  current,  a 
light  body  like  a  cork,  lying  on  the  surface,  rises  with 
the  wave  crests  and  sinks  with  the  troughs,  going  forward 
slightly  with  the  former  and  backward  with  the  latter, 
but  remaining,  on  the  whole,  in  the  same  spot.  Since 
the  cork  follows  the  surrounding  water  particles,  it  shows 
their  movements,  and  we  thus  see  that  the  individual 


Fig.  4. — Photograph  of  the  interference  Fig.  5. — A  section  of  the  same  picture 

between  two  similar  wave  systems.  enlarged. 

(From  Grimsehl,  Lehrbuch  dev  Physik.) 


particles  are  in  oscillation,  or  more  accurately,  in  circu¬ 
lation,  one  circulation  being  completed  during  the  time 
in  which  the  wave  motion  advances  a  wave-length,  i.e.,  the 
distance  from  one  crest  to  the  next.  This  interval  of 
time  is  called  the  time  of  oscillation ,  or  the  period.  If  the 
number  of  crests  passed  in  a  given  time  is  counted,  the 
oscillations  of  the  individual  particles  in  the  same  time 
can  be  determined.  The  number  of  oscillations  in  the 
unit  of  time,  which  we  here  may  take  to  be  one  minute, 
is  called  the  frequency.  If  the  frequency  is  forty  and  the 


36 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


wave-length  is  three  metres,  the  wave  progresses  3X40 
=  120  metres  in  one  minute.  The  velocity  with  which 
the  wave  motion  advances,  or  in  other  words  its  velocity 
of  propagation ,  is  then  120  metres  per  minute.  We  thus 
have  the  rule  that  velocity  of  propagation  is  equal  to  the 
product  of  frequency  and  wave-length  (cf.  Fig.  8). 

On  the  surface  of  a  body  of  water  there  may  exist 
at  the  same  time  several  wave  systems  ;  large  waves 
created  by  winds  which  have  themselves  perhaps  died 
down,  small  ripples  produced  by  breezes  and  running  over 
the  larger  waves,  and  waves  from  ships,  etc.  The  form 
of  the  surface  and  the  changes  of  form  may  thus  be  very 
complicated  ;  but  the  problem  is  simplified  by  com¬ 
bining  the  motions  of  the  individual  wave  systems  at 
any  given  point.  If  one  system  at  a  given  time  gives  a 
crest  and  another  at  the  same  instant  also  gives  a  crest 
at  the  same  point,  the  two  together  produce  a  higher 
crest.  Similarly,  the  resultant  of  two  simultaneous 
troughs  is  a  deeper  trough  ;  a  crest  from  one  system  and 
a  simultaneous  trough  from  the  other  partially  destroy 
or  neutralize  each  other.  A  very  interesting  yet  simple 
case  of  such  “  interference  ”•  of  two  wave  systems  is 
obtained  when  the  systems  have  equal  wave-lengths  and 
-equal  amplitudes.  Such  an  interference  can  be  pro¬ 
duced  by  throwing  two  stones,  as  much  alike  as  possible, 
into  the  water  at  the  same  time,  at  a  short  distance  from 
each  other.  When  the  two  sets  of  wave  rings  meet 
'  there  is  created  a  network  of  crests  and  troughs. 
Figs.  4  and  5  show  photographs  of  such  an  interference, 
produced  by  setting  in  oscillation  two  spheres  which 
were  suspended  over  a  body  of  water. 

In  Fig.  6  there  is  a  schematic  representation  of  an 
interference  of  the  same  nature.  Let  us  examine  the 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


37 


situation  at  points  along  the  lower  boundary  line.  At 
o,  which  is  equidistant  from  the  two  wave  centres,  there 
is  evidently  a  wave  crest  in  each  system  ;  therefore 
there  is  a  resultant  crest  of  double  the  amplitude  of  a 
single  crest  if  the  two  systems  have  the  same  amplitude. 
Half  a  period  later  there  is  a  trough  in  each  system  with 


Fig.  6. — Schematic  representation  of  an  interference. 

a  resultant  trough  of  twice  the  amplitude  of  a  single 
trough.  Thus  higher  crests  and  deeper  troughs  alter¬ 
nate.  The  same  situation  is  found  at  point  2,  a  wave¬ 
length  farther  from  the  left  than  from  the  right  wave 
centre  ;  in  fact,  these  results  are  found  at  all  points 
such  as  2,  2',  4  and  4',  where  the  difference  in  distance 


38 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


from  the  two  wave  centres  is  an  even  number  of  wave¬ 
lengths.  At  the  point  i,  on  the  other  hand,  where  the 
difference  between  the  distance  from  the  centres  is  one- 
half  a  wave-length,  a  crest  from  one  system  meets  a 
trough  from  the  other,  and  the  resultant  is  neither  crest 
nor  trough  but  zero.  There  is  the  same  result  at  points 
i',  3,  3',  5,  5',  etc.,  where  the  difference  between  the 
distances  from  the  two  wave  centres  is  an  odd  number 
of  half  wave-lengths.  By  throwing  a  stone  into  the 
water  in  front  of  a  smooth  wall  an  interference  is  ob¬ 
tained,  similar  to  the  one  described  above.  The  waves 


Fig.  7. — Waves  which  are  reflected  by  a  board  and  pass 

through  a  hole  in  it. 

are  reflected  from  the  wall  as  if  they  came  from  a  centre 
at  a  point  behind  the  wall  and  symmetrically  placed 
with  respect  to  the  point  where  the  stone  actually  falls. 

When  a  wave  system  meets  a  wall  in  which  there  is 
a  small  hole,  this  opening  acts  as  a  new  wave  centre, 
from  which,  on  the  other  side  of  the  wall,  there  spread 
half-rings  of  crests  and  troughs.  But  if  the  waves  are 
small  and  the  opening  is  large  in  proportion  to  the  wave¬ 
length,  the  case  is  essentially  different.  Let  us  suppose 
that  wave  rings  originate  at  every  point  of  the  opening. 
As  a  result  of  the  co-operation  of  all  these  wave  systems 
the  crests  and  troughs  will  advance,  just  as  before,  in 
the  original  direction  of  propagation,  i.e.f  along  straight 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


39 


lines  drawn  from  the  original  wave  centre  through  the 
opening  ;  lines  of  radiation,  we  may  call  them.  It  can 
be  shown,  however,  that  as  these  lines  of  radiation 
deviate  more  and  more  from  the  normal  to  the  wall,  the 
interference  between  wave  systems  weakens  the  resultant 
wave  motion.  If  the  deviation  from  the  normal  to  the 
wall  is  increased,  the  weakening  varies  in  magnitude, 
provided  that  the  waves  are  sufficiently  small ;  but  even 
if  the  wave  motions  at  times  may  thus  “  flare  up  ”  some¬ 
what,  still  on  the  whole  they  will  decrease  as  the  deviation 
from  the  normal  to  the  wall  is  increased.  The  smaller 
the  waves  in  comparison  to  the  opening,  the  more 
marked  is  the  decrease  of  the  wave  motions  as  the 
distance  from  the  normal  to  the  wall  is  increased,  and 
the  more  nearly  the  waves  will  move  on  in  straight  lines. 
That  light  moves  in  straight  lines,  so  that  opaque 
objects  cast  sharp  shadows,  is  therefore  consistent  with 
the  wave  theory,  provided  the  light  waves  are  very 
small ;  though  it  is  reasonable  to  expect  that  on  the 
passage  of  light  through  narrow  openings  there  will 
be  produced  an  appreciable  bending  in  the  direction 
of  the  rays.  This  supposition  agrees  entirely  with 
experiment.  As  early  as  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth 
century,  the  Italian  Grimaldi  discovered  such  a  dif¬ 
fraction  of  light  which  passes  through  a  narrow  opening 
into  a  dark  room. 

In  both  light  and  sound  the  use  of  such  terms  as 
wave  and  wave  motion  is  figurative,  for  crests  and 
troughs  are  lacking.  But  this  choice  of  terms  is  com¬ 
mendable,  because  sound  and  light  possess  an  essential 
property  similar  to  one  possessed  by  water  waves. 
What  happens  when  a  tuning-fork  emits  sound-waves 
into  the  surrounding  air,  is  that  the  air  particles  are  set 


40  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


in  oscillation  in  the  direction  of  the  propagation  of  sound. 
All  the  particles  of  air  have  the  same  period  as  the  tuning- 
fork,  and  the  number  of  oscillations  per  second  deter¬ 
mines  the  pitch  of  the  note  produced ;  but  the  air 
particles  at  different  distances  from  the  tuning-fork 
are  not  all  simultaneously  in  the  same  phase  or  condition 
of  oscillation.  If  one  particle,  at  a  certain  distance 
from  the  source  of  sound  and  at  a  given  time,  is  moving 
most  rapidly  away  from  the  source,  then  at  the  same 


c 


Fig.  8. — Schematic  representation  of  a  wave. 

A  and  B  denote  crests  ;  C  denotes  a  trough. 

X  =  wave-length,  a  =  amplitude  of  wave. 

If  T  denotes  the  time  the  wave  takes  to  travel  from  A  to  B,  and 
v=i/T  the  frequency,  the  wave  velocity  v  will  be  equal  to  X/T  =  Xi'. 

Points  P  and  P'  are  points  in  the  same  phase. 

time  there  is  another  particle,  somewhat  farther  along 
the  direction  of  propagation,  which  is  moving  towards 
the  source  most  rapidly.  This  alternation  of  direction 
will  exist  all  along  the  path  of  the  sound.  Where  the 
particles  are  approaching  each  other,  the  air  is  in  a  state 
of  condensation,  and  where  the  particles  are  drawing 
apart,  the  air  is  in  a  state  of  rarefaction.  While  the 
individual  particles  are  oscillating  in  approximately  the 
same  place,  the  condensations  and  rarefactions,  like 
troughs  and  crests  in  water,  advance  with  a  velocity 
which  is  called  the  velocity  of  sound.  If  we  call  the 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


41 


distance  between  two  consecutive  points  in  the  same 
phase  a  wave-length,  and  the  number  of  oscillations  in  a 
period  of  time  the  frequency,  then,  as  in  the  case  of 
water  waves,  the  velocity  of  propagation  will  be  equal 
to  the  product  of  frequency  and  wave-length. 

Light,  like  sound,  is  a  periodic  change  of  the  condi¬ 
tions  in  the  different  points  of  space.  These  changes 
which  emanate  from  the  source  of  light,  in  the  course 
of  one  period  advance  one  wave-length,  i.e.,  the  distance 
between  two  successive  points  in  the  same  phase  and 
lying  in  the  direction  of  propagation.  As  in  the  cases  of 
sound  and  water  waves,  the  velocity  of  propagation  or  the 
velocity  of  light  is  equal  to  the  product  of  frequency  and 
wave-length.  If  this  velocity  is  indicated  by  the  letter 
c,  the  frequency  by  v  and  the  wave-length  by  a,  then 

c  c 

c=v\  or  v=  -  or  a  = 

A  V 

The  velocity  of  light  in  free  space  is  a  constant,  the 
same  for  all  wave-lengths.  It  was  first  determined  by 
the  Danish  astronomer  Ole  Rpmer  (1676)  by  observa¬ 
tions  of  the  moons  of  Jupiter.  According  to  the  measure¬ 
ments  of  the  present  day  the  velocity  of  light  is  about 
1,000,000  feet  or  300,000  kilometres  per  second.  In 
centimetres  it  is  thus  about  3  X  io10. 

Efforts  have  been  made  to  consider  light  waves,  like 
sound  waves,  as  produced  by  the  oscillations  of  particles, 
not  of  the  air,  but  of  a  particular  substance,  the  “  ether,” 
filling  and  permeating  everything  ;  but  all  attempts  to 
form  definite  representations  of  the  material  properties 
of  the  ether  and  of  the  movements  of  its  particles  have 
been  unsuccessful.  The  electromagnetic  theory  of  light , 
enunciated  about  fifty  years  ago  by  the  Scottish  physi- 


42  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


cist,  Maxwell,  has  furnished  information  of  an  essentially 
different  character  concerning  the  nature  of  light  waves. 

Let  us  suppose  that  electricity  is  oscillating  in  a 
conductor  connecting  two  metal  spheres,  for  instance. 
The  spheres,  therefore,  have,  alternately,  positive  and 
negative  charges.  Then  according  to  Maxwell’s  theory 
we  shall  expect  that  in  the  surrounding  space  there  will 
spread  a  kind  of  electromagnetic  wave  with  a  velocity  equal 
to  that  of  light.  Wherever  these  waves  are,  there  should 
arise  electric  and  magnetic  forces  at  right  angles  to  each 
other  and  to  the  direction  of  propagation  of  the  waves  ; 
the  forces  should  change  direction  in  rhythm  with  the 
movements  of  electricity  in  the  emitting  conductor. 
By  way  of  illustration  let  us  assume  that  we  have  some¬ 
where  in  space  an  immensely  small  and  light  body  or  par¬ 
ticle  with  an  electric  charge.  If,  in  the  region  in  question, 
an  electromagnetic  wave  motion  takes  place,  then  the 
charged  particle  will  oscillate  as  a  result  of  the  periodically 
changing  electrical  forces.  The  particle  here  plays  the 
same  role  as  the  cork  on  the  surface  of  the  water  (cf .  p.  35) ; 
the  charged  body  thus  makes  the  electrical  oscillations 
in  space  apparent  just  as  the  cork  shows  the  oscillations 
of  the  water.  In  addition  to  the  electrical  forces  there 
are  also  magnetic  forces  in  an  electromagnetic  wave. 
We  can  imagine  that  they  are  made  apparent  by  using  a 
very  small  steel  magnet  instead  of  the  charged  body. 
According  to  Maxwell’s  theory,  the  magnet  exposed  to 
the  electromagnetic  wave  will  perform  rapid  oscillations. 
Maxwell  came  to  the  conclusion  that  light  consisted  of 
electromagnetic  waves  of  a  similar  nature,  but  much 
more  delicate  than  could  possibly  be  produced  and  made 
visible  directly  by  electrical  means. 

In  the  latter  part  of  the  nineteenth  century  the 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


43 


German  physicist,  H.  Hertz,  succeeded  in  producing 
electromagnetic  waves  with  oscillations  of  the  order  of 
magnitude  of  100,000,000  per  second,  corresponding  to 
wave-lengths  of  the  order  of  magnitude  of  several  metres. 
(\=c/v=  3  x  io10/io8=3OO  cm.).  Moreover,  he  proved  the 
existence  of  the  oscillating  electric  forces  by  producing 
electric  sparks  in  a  circle  of  wire  held  in  the  path  of  the 
waves.  He  showed  also  that  these  electromagnetic  waves 
were  reflected  and  interfered  with  each  other  according  to 
the  same  laws  as  in  the  case  of  light  waves.  After  these 
discoveries  there  could  be  no  reasonable  doubt  that  light 
waves  were  actually  electromagnetic  waves,  but  so  small 
that  it  would  be  totally  impossible  to  examine  the  oscilla¬ 
tions  directly  with  the  assistance  of  electric  instruments. 

But  there  was  in  this  work  of  Hertz  no  solution  of  the 
problems  about  the  nature  of  ether  and  the  processes 
underlying  the  oscillations.  More  and  more,  scientists 
have  been  inclined  to  rest  satisfied  with  the  electro¬ 
magnetic  description  of  light  waves  and  to  give  up 
speculation  on  the  nature  of  the  ether.  Indeed,  within 
the  last  few  years,  specially  through  the  influence  of 
Einstein’s  theory  of  relativity,  many  doubts  have  arisen 
as  to  the  actual  existence  of  the  ether.  The  disagree¬ 
ment  about  its  existence  is,  however,  more  a  matter  of 
definition  than  of  reality.  We  can  still  talk  about  light 
as  consisting  of  ether  waves  if  we  abandon  the  old 
conception  of  the  ether  as  a  rigid  elastic  body  with 
definite  material  properties,  such  as  specific  gravity, 
hardness  and  elasticity. 

The  Dispersion  of  Light. 

It  has  been  said  that  the  wave-length  of  light  is 
much  shorter  than  that  of  the  Hertzian  waves.  This 


44  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


does  not  mean  that  all  light  waves  have  the  same  wave¬ 
length  and  frequency.  The  light  which  comes  to  us 
from  the  sun  is  composed  of  waves  of  many  different 
wave-lengths  and  frequencies,  to  each  of  which  corre¬ 
sponds  a  particular  colour. 

In  this  respect  also  light  may  be  compared  with 
sound.  In  whatever  way  a  sound  is  produced,  it  is  in 
general  of  a  complicated  nature,  composed  of  many 
distinct  notes,  each  with  its  characteristic  wave-length 
and  frequency.  Naturally  the  air  particles  cannot 
oscillate  in  several  different  ways  simultaneously.  At 
a  given  time,  however,  we  can  think  of  the  condensa¬ 
tion  and  rarefactions  of  the  air  or  the  oscillations  of  the 
particles  corresponding  to  different  tones,  as  com¬ 
pounded  with  each  other  in  a  way  similar  to  that  in 
which  the  resultant  crests  and  troughs  are  produced 
on  a  body  of  water  with  several  coexistent  wave 
systems.  When  we  say  that  the  complicated  wave- 
movement  emitted  from  some  sound-producing  instru¬ 
ment  consists  of  different  tones,  this  does  not  only 
mean  that  we  may  imagine  it  purely  mathematically  as 
resolved  into  a  series  of  simpler  wave  systems.  The 
resolution  may  also  take  place  in  a  more  physical 
way.  Let  us  assume  that  we  have  a  collection  of  strings 
each  of  which  will  produce  a  note  of  particular  pitch. 
Now,  if  sound  waves  meet  this  collection  of  strings, 
each  string  is  set  in  oscillation  by  the  one  wave  in  the 
compound  sound  wave  which  corresponds  to  it.  Each 
string  is  then  said  to  act  as  a  resonator  for  the  note  in 
question.  The  notes  which  set  the  resonator  strings 
in  oscillation  sound  more  loudly  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  resonators  ;  but,  as  the  wave  train  continues  on 
its  journey  the  tones  taken  out  by  the  strings  will  become 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


45 


weak  in  contrast  to  those  notes  which  found  no  corre¬ 
sponding  strings.  The  resonator  is  said  to  absorb  the 
notes  with  which  it  is  in  pitch. 

Light  which  is  composed  of  different  colours,  i.e., 
of  wave  systems  with  different  wave-lengths,  can  also 
be  resolved  or  dispersed,  but  by  a  method  different 
from  that  in  the  case  of  sound. 

When  light  passes  from  one  medium  to  another, 
as  from  air  to  glass  or  vice  versa,  it  is  refracted,  i.e.,  the 
direction  of  the  light  rays  is  changed  ;  but  if  the  light 
is  composed  of  different  colours  the  refraction  is  accom¬ 
panied  by  a  spreading  ”  of  the  colours  which  is  called 
dispersion.  If  we  look  through  a  glass  prism  so  that 
the  light  from  the  object  examined  must  pass  in  and  out 
through  two  faces  of  the  prism  which  make  not  too 
great  an  angle  with  each  other,  the  light-producing 
object  is  not  only  displaced  by  the  refraction,  but  has 
coloured  edges.  Newton  was  the  first  to  explain  the 
relation  of  the  production  of  the  colours  to  refraction. 
He  made  an  experiment  with  sunlight,  which  he  sent 
through  a  narrow  opening  into  a  dark  room.  The  sun¬ 
light  was  then  by  a  glass  prism  transformed  or  dis¬ 
persed  into  a  band  of  colour,  a  spectrum,  consisting  of 
all  the  colours  of  the  rainbow,  red,  yellow,  green,  blue 
and  violet,  in  the  order  named,  and  with  continuous 
transition  stages  between  neighbouring  colours. 

In  Newton’s  original  experiment  the  different  wave¬ 
lengths  were  but  imperfectly  separated.  A  spectrum  with 
pure  wave-lengths  can  be  obtained  with  a  spectroscope 
(cf.  Fig.  9).  The  light  to  be  investigated  illuminates  an 
adjustable  vertical  slit  in  one  end  of  a  long  tube,  called  the 
collimator,  with  a  lens  in  the  other  end.  If  the  slit  is  in 
the  focal  plane  of  the  lens,  the  light  at  any  point  in  the 


46  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

slit  goes  in  parallel  rays  after  meeting  the  lens.  It  then 
meets  a  prism,  with  vertical  edges,  placed  on  a  little  re- 
•  volving  platform.  The  rays,  refracted  by  the  prism,  go 


FIG.  9. — Prism  spectroscope.  To  the  right  is  seen  the  collimator, 
to  the  left  the  telescope,  in  the  foreground  a  scheme  for 
illuminating  the  cross- wire. 

(From  an  old  print.) 

in  a  new  direction  into  a  telescope  whose  objective  lens 
gives  in  its  focal  plane,  for  every  colour,  a  clear  vertical 
image  of  the  slit.  These  images  can  be  examined 
through  the  ocular  of  the  telescope  ;  but  since  the  different 
colours  are  not  refracted  equally,  each  coloured  image 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


47 


of  the  slit  has  its  own  place.  The  totality  of  the  slit 
images  then  forms  a  horizontal  spectrum  of  the  same 
height  as  the  individual  images.  By  revolving  the 
collimator  different  parts  of  the  spectrum  can  be  put 
in  the  middle  of  the  field  of  view.  To  facilitate  measure¬ 
ments  in  the  spectrum  there  is  in  the  focal  plane  of 
the  collimator  a  sliding  cross- wire  with  an  adjusting 
screw  or  a  vertical  strand  of  spider  web. 


A,  grating;  C,  D,  E  .  .  .  H,  slits;  M  M,  incident 
rays.  When  D  D' ,  EE'...  are  a  whole  number 
of  wave-lengths,  the  light  waves  which  move  in 
the  direction  indicated  by  C  N  and  are  collected 
by  a  lens,  at  the  focal  point  will  all  be  in  the 
same  phase  and  therefore  will  reinforce  each 
other.  In  other  directions  the  light  action  from 
one  slit  is  compensated  by  that  from  another. 

Instead  of  using  the  refraction  of  light  in  a  prism  to 
separate  the  wave-lengths,  we  can  use  the  interference 
which  arises  when  a  bundle  of  parallel  light  waves 
passes  through  a  ruled  grating ,  consisting  of  a  great 
many  very  fine  parallel  lines,  equidistant  from  each 
other  ;  such  a  grating  can  be  made  by  ruling  lines  with 
a  diamond  point  on  the  metal  coating  of  a  silvered 
plate  of  glass.  From  each  line  there  are  sent  out  light 


48  THEJATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

waves  in  all  directions ;  but  if  we  are  considering  light 
of  one  definite  colour  (a  given  wave-length,  mono¬ 
chromatic  light),  the  interference  among  the  waves  from 
all  the  slits  practically  destroys  all  waves  except  in  the 
direction  of  the  original  rays  and  in  the  directions 
making  certain  angles  with  the  former,  dependent  upon 
the  wave-length  and  the  distance  between  two  successive 
lines  (the  grating  space).  Monochromatic  light  can  be 
obtained  by  using  as  the  source  of  light  a  spirit  flame, 
coloured  yellow  with  common  salt  (sodium  chloride). 
If  the  slit  in  a  spectroscope  is  lighted  with  a  yellow  light 
from  such  a  flame,  and  if  a  grating  normal  to  the  direction 
of  the  rays  is  substituted  for  the  prism,  then  in  the 
telescope  there  is  seen  a  yellow  image  of  the  slit,  and  on 
each  side  of  it  one,  two,  three  or  more  yellow  images. 
If  sunlight  is  used  the  central  image  is  white,  since 
all  the  colours  are  here  assembled.  The  other  images 
become  spectra  because  the  different  colours  are  un¬ 
equally  refracted.  In  these  grating  spectra,  which 
according  to  their  distance  from  the  central  fine  are 
called  spectra  of  the  first,  second  or  third  order,  the 
violet  part  lies  nearest  to  the  central  line,  the  red  part 
farthest  away.  Since  the  deflection  is  the  greater  the 
greater  the  wave-length,  then  violet  light  must  have 
the  shortest  wave-length  and  red  the  greatest.  From 
the  amount  of  the  refraction  and  the  size  of  the  grating 
space  the  wave-length  of  the  light  under  investigation 
can  be  calculated. 

For  the  yellow  light  from  our  spirit  flame  the  wave¬ 
length  is  about  0*000589  mm.  or  0*589  gu  or  589  fjbfjj.  In 
centimetres  the  wave-length  is  0*0000589  cm.  ;  from 
the  formula  v=c/X,  t'=526xio12.  The  frequency  is 
thus  almost  inconceivably  large.  For  the  most  distant 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


49 


red  and  violet  in  the  spectrum  the  wave-lengths  are 
respectively  about  800  (&(/*  and  400  {&(/,,  and  the  frequencies 
375  X  io12  and  750  X  io12  oscillations  per  second. 

In  scientific  experiments  a  grating  of  specular  metal 
with  parallel  rulings  is  substituted  for  the  transparent 
grating.  The  spectrum  is  then  given  by  the  reflected 
light  from  the  parts  between  the  rulings.  Specular 
gratings  can  be  made  by  ruling  on  a  concave  mirror, 
which  focuses  the  rays  so  that  a  glass  lens  is  unnecessary. 
Gratings  with  several  hundred  lines  or  rulings  to  the 
millimetre  give  excellent  spectra,  with  strength  of  light 
and  marked  dispersion.  The  preparation  of  the  first 
really  good  gratings  is  due  to  the  experimental  skill  of 
the  American,  Rowland,  who  in  1870  built  a  dividing 
engine  from  which  the  greater  part  of  the  good  gratings 
now  in  use  originate.  The  contribution  which  Rowland 
thereby  made  to  physical  science  can  hardly  be  over¬ 
estimated. 

Spectral  Lines. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  nineteenth  century  Wollas¬ 
ton,  in  England,  and  later  Fraunhofer  in  Germany,  dis¬ 
covered  dark  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum,  a  discovery 
which  meant  that  certain  colours  were  missing.  The 
most  noticeable  of  these  so-called  “  Fraunhofer  Lines  ” 
were  named  with  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  G,  H, 
from  red  to  violet.  It  was  later  discovered  that  some 
of  the  lines  were  double,  that  the  D-line,  for  instance, 
can  be  resolved  into  Dj  and  D2 ;  other  letters,  such  as 
b  and  h,  were  introduced  to  denote  new  lines.  With 
improvements  in  the  methods  of  experiment  and  research 
the  number  of  lines  has  increased  to  hundreds  and 
even  thousands.  The  light  from  a  glowing  solid  or 
4 


50  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


liquid  element  forms,  on  the  other  hand,  a  continuous 
spectrum,  i.e.  a  spectrum  which  has  no  dark  lines. 
An  illustration  of  the  solar  spectrum  with  the  strongest 
Fraunhofer  lines  is  given  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

In  contrast  to  the  solar  spectrum  with  dark  lines  on 
a  bright  background  are  the  so-called  line  spectra ,  which 
consist  of  bright  lines  on  a  dark  background.  The  first 
known  line  spectrum  was  the  one  given  by  light  from  the 
spirit  flame  coloured  with  common  salt,  mentioned  in 
connection  with  monochromatic  light.  As  has  been 
said,  this  spectrum  had  just  one  yellow  line  which  was 
later  found  to  consist  of  two  lines  close  to  each  other. 
It  is  sodium  chloride  which  colours  the  flame  yellow. 
The  colour  is  due,  not  to  the  chlorine,  but  to  the  sodium, 
for  the  same  double  yellow  line  can  be  produced  by 
using  other  sodium  salts  not  compounded  with  chlorine. 
The  yellow  light  is  therefore  called  sodium  light.  No.  7 
in  the  table  of  spectra  at  the  end  of  the  book  shows  the 
spectrum  produced  by  sodium  vapour  in  a  flame.  (On 
account  of  the  small  scale  in  the  figure  it  is  not  shown 
that  the  yellow  line  is  double.) 

Another  interesting  discovery  was  soon  made, 
namely,  that  the  sodium  fine  has  exactly  the  same  wave¬ 
length  as  the  light  lacking  in  the  solar  spectrum,  where 
the  double  D-line  is  located.  About  i860  Kirchhoff 
and  Bunsen  explained  this  remarkable  coincidence  as 
well  as  others  of  the  same  nature.  They  showed  by 
direct  experiment  that  if  sodium  vapour  is  at  a  high 
temperature  it  can  not  only  send  out  the  yellow  light,  but 
also  absorb  fight  of  the  same  wave-length  when  rays  from 
a  still  warmer  glowing  body  pass  through  the  vapour. 
This  phenomenon  is  something  like  that  in  the  case  of 
sound  waves  where  a  resonator  absorbs  the  pitch  which 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


51 


it  can  emit  itself.  The  existence  of  the  dark  D-line  in 
the  solar  spectrum  must  then  mean  that  in  the  outer 
layer  of  the  sun  there  is  sodium  vapour  present 
of  lower  temperature  than  the  white-hot  interior 
of  the  sun,  and  that  the  light  corresponding  to  the 
D-line  is  absorbed  by  the  vapour.  Several  ingenious 
experiments,  which  cannot  be  described  here,  have 
given  further  evidence  in  favour  of  this  explanation. 

In  the  other  line  spectra,  just  as  in  that  from  the 
common  salt  flame,  definite  lines  correspond  to  definite 
elements  and  not  to  chemical  compounds.  The 
emission  of  these  lines  is  then  not  a  molecular  char¬ 
acteristic,  but  an  atomic  one.  The  line  spectra  of  metals 
can  often  be  produced  by  vaporizing  a  metallic  salt  in 
a  spirit  flame  or  in  a  hot,  colourless  gas  flame  (from  a 
Bunsen  burner).  It  is  even  better  to  use  an  electric  arc 
or  strong  electric  sparks.  The  atoms  from  which 
gaseous  molecules  are  formed  can  also  be  made  to  emit 
light  which  by  means  of  the  spectroscope  is  shown  to 
consist  of  a  line  spectrum.  These  results  are  obtained 
by  means  of  electric  discharges  of  various  kinds,  arcs, 
and  spark  discharges  through  tubes  where  the  gas  is  in 
a  rarefied  state. 

The  other  Fraunhofer  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum 
correspond  to  bright  lines  in  the  fine  spectra  of  certain 
elements  which  exist  here  on  earth.  These  Fraunhofer 
lines  must  then  be  assumed  to  be  caused  by  the  absorp¬ 
tion  of  light  by  the  elements  in  question.  This  may  be 
explained  by  the  presence  of  these  elements  as  gases  in 
the  solar  atmosphere,  through  which  passes  the  light 
from  the  inner  layer.  This  inner  surface  would  in  itself 
emit  a  continuous  spectrum. 

The  work  of  Kirchhoff  and  Bunsen  put  at  the  disposal 


52 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


of  science  became  a  new  tool  of  incalculable  scope.  First 
and  foremost,  spectrum  examinations  were  taken  into  the 
service  of  chemistry  as  spectrum  analysis.  It  has  thus 
become  possible  to  analyse  quantities  of  matter  so  small 
that  the  general  methods  of  chemistry  would  be  quite 
powerless  to  detect  them.  It  is  also  possible  by  spectrum 
analysis  to  detect  minute  traces  of  an  element  ;  several 
elements  were  in  this  way  first  discovered  by  the  spectro¬ 
scope.  Moreover,  chemical  analysis  has  been  extended 
to  the  study  of  the  sun  and  stars.  The  spectral  lines 
have  given  us  answers  to  many  problems  of  physics — 
problems  which  formerly  seemed  insoluble.  Last  but 
not  least  spectrum  analysis  has  given  us  a  key  to  the 
deepest  secrets  of  the  atom,  a  key  which  Niels  Bohr 
has  taught  us  how  to  use. 

In  the  discussion  of  the  spectrum  we  have  hitherto 
restricted  ourselves  to  the  visible  spectrum  limited  on 
the  one  side  by  red  and  on  the  other  by  violet.  But 
these  boundaries  are  in  reality  fortuitous,  determined 
by  the  human  eye.  The  spectrum  can  be  studied  by 
other  methods  than  those  of  direct  observation.  The 
more  indirect  methods  include  the  effect  of  the  rays  on 
photographic  plates  and  their  heating  effect  on  fine 
conducting  wires  for  electricity,  held  in  various  parts  of 
the  spectrum.  It  has  thus  been  discovered  that  beyond 
the  visible  violet  end  of  the  spectrum  there  is  an  ultra¬ 
violet  region  with  strong  photographic  activity  and  an 
infra-red  region  producing  marked  heat  effects.  There 
are  both  dark  and  light  spectral  lines  in  these  new  parts 
of  the  spectrum.  The  fact  that  glass  is  not  transparent 
to  ultra-violet  or  infra-red  rays  has  been  an  obstacle  in 
the  experiments,  but  the  difficulty  can  be  overcome 
by  using  other  substances,  such  as  quartz  or  rock  salt, 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


53 


for  the  prisms  and  lenses,  or  by  substituting  concave 
gratings.  By  special  means  it  has  been  possible  to 
detect  rays  with  wave-lengths  as  great  as  300  (Jb  and  as 
small  as  about  0-02  fjb,  corresponding  to  frequencies 
between  io12,  and  15  X  io15  vibrations  per  second,  while 
the  wave-lengths  of  the  luminous  rays  lie  between  o-8 
and  0*4  (j> .  The  term  “  light  wave  ”  is  often  used  to 


Fig.  1 1 . — Photographic  effect  of  X-rays,  which  are  passed  through 
the  atom  grating  in  a  magnesia  crystal. 


refer  to  the  ultra-violet  and  infra-red  rays  which  can  be 
shown  in  the  spectra  produced  by  prisms  or  gratings. 

The  electrically  produced  electromagnetic  waves,  as 
already  mentioned,  have  wave-lengths  much  greater 
than  300  fjj.  In  wireless  telegraphy  there  are  generally 
used  wave-lengths  of  one  kilometre  or  more,  correspond¬ 
ing  to  frequencies  of  300,000  vibrations  per  second  or 
less.  By  direct  electrical  methods  it  has,  however,  not 
been  possible  to  obtain  wave-lengths  less  than  about  one- 


54 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


half  a  centimetre,  a  length  differing  considerably  from 
the  o*3  millimetre  wave  of  the  longest  infra-red  rays. 
Wave-lengths  much  less  than  0-02  or  20  fjbfjj  exist  in  the 
so-called  Rontgen  rays  or  X-rays  with  wave-lengths 
as  small  as  o-oi  pf*  corresponding  to  a  frequency  of 
30X1018.  These  rays  cannot  possibly  be  studied  even 
with  the  finest  artificially  made  gratings,  but  crystals, 
on  account  of  the  regular  arrangement  of  the  atoms, 
give  a  kind  of  natural  grating  of  extraordinary  fineness. 
With  the  use  of  crystal  gratings  success  has  been  at¬ 
tained  in  decomposing  the  Rongten  rays  into  a  kind  of 
spectrum,  in  measuring  the  wave-lengths  of  the  X-rays 
and  in  studying  the  interior  structure  of  the  crystals. 
The  German  Laue,  the  discoverer  of  the  peculiar  action 
of  crystals  on  X-rays  (1912),  let  the  X-rays  beams  pass 
through  the  crystal,  obtaining  thereby  photographs  of 
the  kind  illustrated  in  Fig.  11.  Later  on  essential 
progress  was  due  to  the  Englishmen,  W.  H.  and  W.  L. 
Bragg,  who  worked  out  a  method  of  investigation  by 
which  beams  of  X-rays  are  reflected  from  crystal  faces. 
The  greatest  wave-length  which  it  has  been  possible  to 
measure  for  X-rays  is  about  1*5  which  is  still  a  long 
way  from  the  20  {h[jj  of  the  furthermost  ultra-violet  rays. 

It  may  be  said  that  the  spectrum  since  Fraunhofer 
has  been  made  not  only  longer  but  also  finer,  for  the 
accuracy  of  measuring  wave-lengths  has  been  much 
increased.  It  is  now  possible  to  determine  the  wave¬ 
length  of  a  line  in  the  spectrum  to  about  o-ooi  ftp  or 
even  less,  and  to  measure  extraordinarily  small  changes 
in  wave-lengths,  caused  by  different  physical  influences. 

In  addition  to  the  continuous  spectra  emitted  by 
glowing  solids  or  liquids,  and  to  the  line  spectra  emitted 
by  gases,  and  to  the  absorption  spectra  with  dark  lines, 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


55 


there  are  spectra  of  still  another  kind.  These  are  the 
absorption  spectra  which  are  produced  by  the  passage 
of  white  light  through  coloured  glass  or  coloured  fluids. 
Here  instead  of  fine  dark  lines  there  are  broader  dark 
absorption  bands,  the  spectrum  being  limited  to  the 
individual  bright  parts.  There  are  also  the  band  spectra 
proper,  which,  like  the  line  spectra,  are  purely  emission 
spectra,  given  by  the  light  from  gases  under  particular 
conditions  ;  these  seem  to  consist  of  a  series  of  bright 


Fig.  12/ — Spectra  produced  by  discharges  of  different  character 
through  a  glass  tube  containing  nitrogen  at  a  pressure  of  1/20 
that  of  the  atmosphere.  Above,  a  band  spectrum ;  below, 
a  line  spectrum. 

bands  which  follow  each  other  with  a  certain  regularity 
(cf.  Fig.  12).  With  stronger  dispersion  the  bands  are 
*  shown  to  consist  of  groups  of  bright  lines. 

Since  the  line  spectra  are  most  important  in  the 
atomic  theory,  we  shall  examine  them  here  more  carefully. 

The  line  spectra  of  the  various  elements  differ  very 
much  from  each  other  with  respect  to  their  complexity. 
While  many  metals  give  a  great  number  of  lines  (iron, 
for  instance,  gives  more  than  five  thousand),  others  give 
only  a  few,  at  least  in  a  simple  spectroscope.  With  a 
more  powerful  spectroscope  the  simplicity  of  structure 


56 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


is  lost,  since  weaker  lines  appear  and  other  lines  which 
had  seemed  single  are  now  seen  to  be  double  or  triple. 
Moreover,  the  number  of  lines  is  increased  by  extending 
the  investigation  to  the  ultra-violet  and  infra-red  regions 
of  the  spectrum.  The  sodium  spectrum,  at  first,  seemed 
to  consist  of  one  single  yellow  line,  but  later  this  was 
shown  to  be  a  double  line,  and  still  later  several  pairs  of 
weaker  double  lines  were  discovered.  The  kind  and 
number  of  lines  obtained  depends  not  only  upon  the 
efficiency  of  the  spectroscope,  but  also  upon  the  physical 
conditions  under  which  the  spectrum  is  obtained. 

The  eager  attempts  of  the  physicists  to  find  laws 
governing  the  distribution  of  the  lines  have  been  suc¬ 
cessful  in  some  spectra.  For  instance,  the  line  spectra 
of  lithium,  sodium,  potassium  and  other  metals  can 
be  arranged  into  three  rows,  each  consisting  of  double 
lines.  The  difference  between  the  frequencies  of  the  two 
“  components  ”  of  the  double  lines  was  found  to  be  exactly 
the  same  for  most  of  the  lines  in  one  of  these  spectra,  and 
for  the  spectra  of  different  elements  there  was  discovered 
a  simple  relationship  between  this  difference  in  frequency 
and  the  atomic  weight  of  the  element  in  question.  But 
this  regularity  was  but  a  scrap,  so  to  speak ;  scientists  were 
still  very  far  from  a  law  which  could  exactly  account  for 
the  distribution  of  lines  in  a  single  series,  not  to  mention 
the  lines  in  an  entire  spectrum  or  in  all  the  spectra. 

The  first  important  step  in  this  direction  was  made 
about  1885  by  the  Swiss  physicist,  Balmer,  in  his  investi¬ 
gations  with  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  the  simplest  of  all 
the  spectra.  In  the  visible  part  there  are  just  three 
lines,  one  red,  one  green-blue  and  one  violet,  corre¬ 
sponding  to  the  Fraunhofer  lines  C,  F  and  h.  These 
hydrogen  lines  are  now  generally  known  by  the  letters 


LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


57 


Ha,  H/i  and  H7.  In  the  ultra-violet  region  there  are 
many  lines  also. 

Balmer  discovered  that  wave-lengths  of  the  red  and 
of  the  green  hydrogen  line  are  to  each  other  exactly  as 
two  integers,  namely,  as  27  to  20,  and  that  the  wave¬ 
lengths  of  the  green  and  violet  lines  are  to  each  other  as 
28  to  25.  Continued  reflection  on  this  correspondence 
led  him  to  enunciate  a  rule  which  can  be  expressed  by 
a  simple  formula.  When  frequency  is  substituted  for 
wave-length  Balmer’s  formula  is  written  as 


where  v  is  the  frequency  of  a  hydrogen  line,  K  a  constant 
equal  to  3-29  xio15  and  n  an  integer.  If  n  takes  on 
different  values,  v  becomes  the  frequency  for  the  different 
hydrogen  lines.  If  n  —  1  v  is  negative,  for  n=  2  v  is 
zero.  These  values  of  n  therefore  have  no  meaning  with 
regard  to  v.  But  if  n—  3,  then  v  gives  the  frequency  for 
the  red  hydrogen  line  Ha  ;  n=  4  gives  the  frequency  of 
the  green  line  H^s  and  n=  5  that  of  the  violet  line  H7. 
Gradually  more  than  thirty  hydrogen  lines  have  been 
found,  agreeing  accurately  with  the  formula  for  different 
values  of  n.  Some  of  these  lines  were  not  found  in 
experiment,  but  were  discovered  in  the  spectrum  of 
certain  stars;  the  exact  agreement  of  these  lines  with 
Balmer’s  formula  was  strong  evidence  for  the  belief 
that  they  are  due  to  hydrogen.  The  formula  thus 
proved  itself  valuable  in  revealing  the  secrets  of  the 
heavens. 

As  n  increases  1/w2  approaches  zero,  and  can  be  made 
as  close  to  zero  as  desired  by  letting  n  increase  indefinitely. 
In  mathematical  terminology,  as  n—  00,  i/w2=o  and  v  — 


58 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


K/4  =  823  X  io12,  corresponding  to  a  wave-length  of  365  fjbfju. 
Physically  this  means  that  the  line  spectrum  of  hydrogen 
in  the  ultra-violet  is  limited  by  a  line  corresponding  to 
that  frequency.  Near  this  limit  the  hydrogen  lines 
corresponding  to  Balmer’s  formula  are  tightly  packed 
together.  For  n  =20  v  differs  but  little  from  K/4,  and  the 
distance  between  two  successive  lines  corresponding  to 

7000  6000  6000  4000 


1  1_ 1_ 1 )  J  l! 1_ 1  J  I  I  1_ 1_ 1_ 1  I  1  i 

1  1  t  t  V  t  1  V 

1  1 

C  F 

h 

I  1  1 

He*  % 

Fig.  13. — Lines  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum  corresponding 

to  the  Balmer  series. 


an  increase  of  I  in  n  becomes  more  and  more  insignificant. 
Fig.  13,  where  the  numbers  indicate  the  wave-lengths 
in  the  Angstrom  unit  (o’l  shows  the  crowding  of 
the  hydrogen  lines  towards  a  definite  boundary.  The 
following  table,  where  K  has  the  accurate  value  of 
3*290364  x  io15,  shows  how  exactly  the  values  calculated 
from  the  formula  agree  with  experiment. 


Table  of  some  of  the  Lines  of  the  Balmer  Series 


I_i  )~o  (calculated). 
V4  n V 

v  (found). 

X  (found). 

n=  3 

11  =  4 
n=  5 
n  —  6 
n=  7 

K (l~  £  )  =  456,995  bills. 

KU-  iV)  =  616,943  ,, 

K( J—  ^  ) =690,976  „ 
tfr)  =  73i,*92  i> 
K(l—  tV)  =  755>44°  „ 

456,996  bills. 
616,943  „ 
690,976  „ 
73L193  ,, 
755,441  ,, 

656*460  fx/A  Ha 
486  268  „ 
434*168  „  Hy 
410*288  „  HS 
397*119  „  He 

n  =  20 

K(l-4k)  =  8l4,365  » 

814,361  „ 

368,307  „ 

LIGHT  WAVES  AND  THE  SPECTRUM 


59 


From  arguments  in  connection  with  the  work  of  the 
Swedish  scientist,  Rydberg,  in  the  spectra  of  other  ele¬ 
ments,  Ritz,  a  fellow  countryman  of  Balmer’s,  has  made 
it  seem  probable  that  the  hydrogen  spectrum  contains 
other  lines  besides  those  corresponding  to  Balmer’s 
formula.  He  assumed  that  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  like 
other  spectra,  contains  several  series  of  lines  and  that 
Balmer’s  formula  corresponds  to  only  one  series.  Ritz 
then  enunciated  a  more  comprehensive  formula,  the 
Balmer-Ritz  formula  : 


where  K  has  the  same  value  as  before,  and  both  n’  and 
n"  are  integers  which  can  pass  through  a  series  of  different 
values.  For  n" = 2,  the  Balmer  series  is  given;  to 
n"  =  1,  and  n' =  2,  3  .  .  .  00  there  corresponds  a  second 
series  which  lies  entirely  in  the  ultra-violet  region,  and 
to  n"  =3,  n' =  4,  5  .  .  .  00  a  series  lying  entirely  in  the 
infra-red.  Lines  have  actually  been  found  belonging  to 
these  series. 

Formulae,  similar  to  the  Ritz  one,  have  been  set  up 
for  the  line  spectra  of  other  elements,  and  represent 
pretty  accurately  the  distribution  of  the  lines.  The 
frequencies  are  each  represented  by  the  difference 
between  two  terms,  each  of  which  contains  an  integer, 
which  can  pass  through  a  series  of  values.  But  while 
the  hydrogen  formula,  except  for  the  n’ s,  depends  only 
upon  one  constant  quantity  K  and  its  terms  have  the 
simple  form  K In2,  the  formula  is  more  complicated  with 
the  other  elements.  The  term  can  often  be  written, 
with  a  high  degree  of  exactness,  as  K/(n  +  a)2,  where  K 
is,  with  considerable  accuracy,  the  same  constant  as  in 


60  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

the  hydrogen  formula.  For  a  given  element  a  can  assume 
several  different  values  ;  therefore  the  number  of  series 
is  greater  and  the  spectrum  is  even  more  complicated 
than  that  of  hydrogen. 

All  these  formulae  are,  however,  purely  empirical, 
derived  from  the  values  of  wave-lengths  and  frequencies 
found  in  spectrum  measurements.  They  represent 
certain  more  or  less  simple  bookkeeping  rules,  by  which 
we  can  register  both  old  and  new  lines,  enter  them  in 
rows,  arrange  them  according  to  a  definite  system. 
But  from  the  beginning  there  could  be  no  doubt  that 
these  rules  had  a  deeper  physical  meaning  which  it  was 
not  yet  possible  to  know.  There  was  no  visible  corre¬ 
spondence  between  the  spectral  line  formulae  and  the 
other  physical  characteristics  of  the  elements  which 
emitted  the  spectra;  not  even  in  their  form  did  the 
formulae  show  any  resemblance  to  formulae  obtained  in 
other  physical  branches. 


CHAPTER  III 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 

✓ 

4 

Early  Theories  and  Laws  of  Electricity. 

The  fundamental  phenomena  of  electricity,  which 
were  first  made  the  subject  of  careful  study  about  two 
centuries  ago,  are  that  certain  substances  can  be 
electrified  by  friction  so  that  somehow  they  can  attract 
light  bodies,  and  that  the  charges  of  electricity  may 
be  either  “  positive  ”  or  “  negative.”  Bodies  with  like 
charges  repel  each  other,  while  those  with  unlike  charges 
attract  each  other,  and  either  partially  or  entirely 
neutralize  each  other  when  they  are  brought  close 
together.  Moreover,  it  had  long  ago  been  discovered 
that  in  some  substances  electricity  can  move  freely 
from  place  to  place,  while  in  others  there  is  resistance 
to  the  movement.  The  former  bodies  are  now  called 
conductors  and  include  metals,  while  the  latter  are 
called  insulators,  glass,  porcelain  and  air  being  members 
of  this  class. 

In  order  to  explain  the  phenomena  some  imagined 
that  there  were  two  kinds  of  “  electric  substances  ”  or 
“  fluids  ”  ;  and  since  no  change  in  weight  could  be 
discovered  in  a  body  when  it  was  electrified,  it  was,  in 
general,  assumed  that  the  electric  fluids  were  weight¬ 
less.  In  the  normal,  neutral  body  it  was  believed  that 

61 


\ 


62  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

these  fluids  were  mixed  in  equal  quantities,  thereby 
neutralizing  each  other;  on  this  account  they  were 
supposed  to  be  of  opposite  characteristics,  so  one  was 
called  positive  and  the  other  negative.  According  to  a 
second  theory,  there  was  assumed  to  be  just  one  kind 
of  electricity,  which  was  present  in  a  normal  amount 
in  neutral  bodies  ;  positive  electricity  was  caused  by  a 
superfluity  of  the  fluid ;  negative,  by  a  deficit.  In  both 
theories  it  was  possible  to  talk  of  the  amount  of  positive 
or  negative  electricity  which  a  body  contained  or  with 
which  it  was  “  charged,”  because  the  supporters  of  the 
one-fluid  idea  understood  by  the  terms  positive  and 
negative  a  superfluity  and  a  deficit,  respectively,  of  the 
one  fluid.  In  both  theories  it  was  possible  to  talk  about 
the  direction  of  the  electric  current  in  a  conductor, 
since  the  supporters  of  the  two-fluid  theory  understood 
by  “  direction  ”  that  in  which  the  electric  forces  sent 
the  positive  electricity,  or  the  opposite  to  that  in  which 
the  negative  would  be  sent.  It  could  not  be  decided 
whether  positive  electricity  went  in  the  one  direction 
or  the  negative  in  the  other,  or  whether  each  simultane¬ 
ously  moved  in  its  own  direction.  Both  theories  were 
quite  arbitrary  in  designating  the  electric  charge  in 
glass,  which  was  rubbed  with  woollen  cloth,  as  positive. 
On  the  whole,  neither  theory  seemed  to  have  any 
essential  advantage  over  the  other ;  the  difference 
between  them  seemed  to  lie  more  in  phraseology  than 
in  actual  fact. 

That  the  positive  and  negative  states  of  electricity 
could  not  be  taken  as  “  symmetric  ”  seemed,  however, 
to  follow  from  the  so-called  discharge  phenomena,  in 
which  electricity,  with  the  emission  of  light,  streams 
out  into  the  air  from  strongly  charged  (positive  or 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


63 


negative)  bodies,  or  passes  through  the  air  between 
positive  and  negative  bodies  in  sparks,  electric  arcs  or  in 
some  other  way.  In  a  discharge  in  air  between  a  metal  1 
point  and  a  metal  plate,  for  instance,  a  bush-shaped  glow 
is  seen  to  extend  from  the  point  when  the  charge  there 
is  positive,  while  only  a  little  star  appears  when  the 
charge  is  negative. 

Naturally,  we  cannot  discuss  here  the  many  electric 
phenomena  and  laws,  and  must  be  satisfied  with  a  brief 
description  of  those  which  are  of  importance  in  the 
atomic  theory.  ' 

In  this  latter  category  belongs  Coulomb's  Law , 
formulated  about  1785.  According  to  this  law,  the 
repulsions  or  attractions  between  two  electrically 
charged  bodies  are  directly  as  the  product  of  the  charges 
and  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance  between 
them  (as  in  the  case  of  the  gravitational  attraction 
between  two  neutral  bodies,  according  to  Newton’s 
Law).  The  unit  in  measuring  electric  charges  can  be 
taken  as  that  amount  which  will  repel  an  equal  amount 
of  electricity  of  the  same  kind  at  unit  distance  with 
unit  force.  If  we  use  the  scientific  or  “  absolute  ” 
system,  in  which  the  unit  of  length  is  one  centimetre, 
that  of  time  one  second  and  that  of  mass  one  gram, 
then  the  unit  of  force  is  one  dyne,  which  is  a  little  greater 
than  the  earth’s  attraction  on  a  milligram  weight.  Let 
us  suppose  that  two  small  bodies  with  equal  charges 
of  positive  (or  negative)  electricity  are  at  a  distance  of 
one  centimetre  from  each  other.  If  they  repel  each 
other  with  a  charge  of  one  dyne,  then  the  amount  of 
electricity  with  which  each  is  charged  is  called  the 
absolute  electrostatic  unit  of  electricity.  If  one  body  has 
a  charge  three  times  as  great  and  the  other  has  a  charge 


64  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


four  times  as  great,  the  repulsion  is  3x4  =  12  times 
greater.  If  the  distance  between  the  bodies  is  increased 
from  one  to  five,  the  repulsion  is  twenty-five  times  as 
small,  since  52=25.  If  the  charge  of  one  body  is  sub¬ 
stituted  by  a  negative  one  of  same  magnitude  the  re¬ 
pulsion  becomes  an  attraction  of  the  same  magnitude. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  nineteenth  century  methods 
were  found  for  producing  a  steady  electric  current  in 
metal  wires.  In  1820,  the  Danish  physicist,  H.  C. 
0rsted,  discovered  that  an  electric  current  influences 
a  magnet  in  a  characteristic  way,  and  that,  conversely, 
the  current  is  affected  by  the  forces  emanating  from 
the  magnet,  by  a  magnetic  field  in  other  words.  The 
French  scientist,  Ampere,  soon  afterwards  formulated 
exact  laws  for  the  electromagnetic  forces  between  magnets 
and  currents.  In  1831,  the  English  physicist,  Faraday, 
discovered  that  an  electric  current  is  induced  in  a  wire 
when  currents  or  magnets  in  its  neighbourhood  are 
moved  or  change  strength.  Faraday’s  views  on  electric 
and  magnetic  fields  of  force  around  currents  and  magnets 
were  further  of  fundamental  importance  to  the  electro¬ 
magnetic-wave  theory  as  developed  by  Maxwell.  The 
branch  of  physics  dealing  with  all  these  phenomena  is 
now  generally  known  as  electrodynamics. 

Electrolysis. 

Faraday  also  studied  the  chemical  effects  which  an 
electric  current  produces  upon  being  conducted  between 
two  metal  plates,  called  electrodes,  which  are  immersed 
in  a  solution  of  salts  or  acids.  The  current  separates 
the  salt  or  acid  into  two  parts  which  are  carried  by  the 
electric  forces  in  two  opposite  directions.  This  separa¬ 
tion  is  called  electrolysis.  If  the  liquid  is  dilute  hydro- 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


65 


chloric  acid  (HC1),  the  hydrogen  goes  with  the  current 
to  the  negative  electrode,  the  cathode ,  and  takes  the 
positive  electricity  with  it,  while  the  chlorine  goes 
against  the  current  and  takes  the  negative  electricity 
to  the  positive  electrode,  the  anode.  We  must  then 
assume  with  the  Swedish  scientist,  Arrhenius,  that, 
under  the  influence  of  the  water,  the  molecules  of  hydro¬ 
gen  chloride  always  are  separated  into  positive  hydrogen 
atoms  and  negative  chlorine  atoms,  and  that  the  electric 


Fig.  14. — -Picture  of  electrolysis  of  hydrogen  chloride. 

A ,  anode  ;  K,  cathode  ;  H ,  hydrogen  atoms  ;  Cl,  chlorine  atoms. 

forces  from  the  anode  and  the  cathode  carry  these 
atoms  respectively  with  and  against  the  current.  The 
electrically  charged  wandering  atoms  are  called  ions, 
i.e.  wanderers.  The  positive  electricity  taken  by  the 
hydrogen  atoms  to  the  cathode  goes  into  the  metal 
conductor,  while  the  anode  must  receive  from  the  metal 
conductor  an  equal  amount  of  positive  electricity  to 
be  given  to  the  chlorine  atoms  to  neutralize  them. 
The  negative  charge  of  a  chlorine  atom  must  then  be 
as  large  as  the  positive  charge  of  a  hydrogen  atom. 

5 


66  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


These  assumptions  imply  that  equal  numbers  of  the  two 
kinds  of  atoms  are  present  in  the  whole  quantity  of 
atoms  transferred  in  any  period  of  time. 

Faraday  found  that  the  quantity  of  hydrogen  which 
in  the  above  experiment  is  transferred  to  the  cathode  in 
a  given  time  is  proportional  to  the  quantity  of  electricity 
transferred  in  the  same  time.  A  gram  of  hydrogen 
always  takes  the  same  amount  of  electricity  with  it.  By 
experiment  this  amount  of  electricity  can  be  deter¬ 
mined,  and,  since  the  weight  in  grams  of  the  hydrogen 
atom  is  known,  it  is  possible  to  calculate  the  amount 
of  one  atom.  In  electrostatic  units  it  is  477  xio-10, 
i.e.y  477  billionth1  parts.  A  chlorine  atom  then  carries 
with  it  477 xio-10  electrostatic  units  of  negative 
electricity.  Since  its  atomic  weight  is  35*5,  then  35-5 
grams  of  chlorine  will  take  as  much  electricity  as  1  gram 
of  hydrogen.  The  ratio  e/m  between  the  charge  e  and 
the  mass  m  is  then  35*5  times  as  great  for  hydrogen  as 
for  chlorine. 

We  have  temporarily  restricted  ourselves  to  the 
electrolysis  of  hydrogen  chloride.  Let  us  now  assume 
that  we  have  chloride  of  zinc  (ZnCl2),  which,  by  elec¬ 
trolysis,  is  separated  into  chlorine  and  zinc.  Each 
atom  of  chlorine  will,  as  before,  carry  477  X  io~10  units 
of  negative  electricity  to  the  anode  ;  but  since  zinc  is 
divalent  (cf.  p.  17)  and  one  atom  of  zinc  is  joined  to  two 
of  chlorine,  therefore  one  atom  of  zinc  must  carry  a 
charge  of  2  X  477  X  io~10  units  of  positive  electricity  to 
the  cathode.  An  atom  or  a  group  of  atoms,  with  valence 
of  three,  in  electrolysis  carries  3x477 Xio-10  units,  etc. 

We  see  then,  that  the  quantity  of  electricity  which 

1  Billion  used  here  to  mean  one  million  million,  and  trillion  to  mean 
one  million  billion. 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


67 


accompanies  the  atoms  in  electrolysis  is  always 
477Xio~10  electrostatic  units  or  an  integral  multiple 
thereof.  This  suggests  the  thought  that  electricity  is 
atomic  and  that  the  quantity  477  Xio-10  units  is  the 
smallest  amount  of  electricity  which  can  exist  in¬ 
dependently,  i.e.,  the  elementary  quantum  of  electricity  or 
the  “  atom  of  electricity.”  The  atom  of  a  monovalent 
element,  when  charged  or  ionized,  should  have  one  atom 
of  electricity;  a  divalent,  two,  etc.  On  the  two-fluid 
theory  it  was  most  reasonable  to  assume  that  there  were 


Fig.  15. — Provisional  representation  (according  to  the 
two-fluid  theory)  of 

A,  a  hydrogen  ion  ;  B,  a  chlorine  ion  ;  and  C,  a  molecule  of 

hydrogen  chloride. 

two  kinds  of  atoms  of  electricity  representing,  respec¬ 
tively,  positive  and  negative  electricity.  In  Fig.  15  there 
is  given,  in  accordance  with  the  two-fluid  theory,  a  rough 
picture  of  a  chlorine  ion  and  a  hydrogen  ion  and  their 
union  into  a  molecule. 

The  atoms  of  electricity  seemed  to  differ  essentially 
from  the  usual  atoms  of  the  elements  in  their  apparent 
inability  to  live  independently ;  they  seemed  to  exist 
only  in  connection  with  the  atoms  of  the  elements. 
They  would  seem  much  more  real  if  they  could  exist 
independently.  That  such  existence  really  is  possible, 


<,,0?  <■/,  /i>_/0^  3*?  X/t>'5  i.  . 

7  ‘  68  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

has  been  discovered  by  the  study  of  the  motion  of 
electricity  in  gases. 

Vacuum  Tube  Phenomena. 

It  has  previously  been  said  that  air  is  an  insulator 
for  electricity,  a  statement  which  is,  in  general,  true  ; 
however,  as  has  also  been  said,  electric  sparks  and  arcs 
can  pass  through  air.  Moreover,  it  has  been  discovered 


that  exhausted  air  is  a  very  good  conductor,  so  that  a 
strong  current  can  pass  between  two  metal  electrodes 
in  a  glass  tube  where  the  air  is  exhausted,  if  the  electrodes 
are  connected  to  an  outer  conductor  by  metal  wires 
fused  into  the  glass.  In  these  vacuum  tubes  there  are 
produced  remarkable  light  effects,  at  first  inexplicable. 
When  the  air  is  very  much  exhausted,  to  a  hundred 
thousandth  of  the  atmospheric  pressure  or  less,  strong 
electric  forces  (large  difference  of  potential  between  the 
electrodes)  are  needed  to  produce  an  electric  discharge. 


Yig.  1 6. _ Vacuum  tube  with  cathode  rays  and  a  shadow- 

producing  cross. 

P  and  N,  conducting  wires  for  the  electric  current ;  a,  cathode ; 
b,  anode  and  shadow-producer  ;  c,  d,  the  shadow. 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


69 


Such  a  discharge  assumes  an  entirely  new  character ;  in 
the  interior  of  the  glass  tube  there  is  hardly  any  light 
to  be  seen,  but  the  glass  wall  opposite  the  negative 
electrode  (the  cathode)  glows  with  a  greenish  tint 
(fluorescence).  If  a  small  metal  plate  is  put  in  the  tube 
between  the  cathode  and  the  glass  wall,  a  shadow  is  cast 
on  the  wall,  just  as  if  light  were  produced  by  rays, 
emitted  from  the  cathode  at  right  angles  to  its  surface 
(cf.  Fig.  16).  The  English  physicist,  Crookes,  was  one 
of  the  first  to  study  these  cathode  rays.  He  assumed 
that  they  are  not  ether  waves  like  the  light  rays,  but 


Fig.  17. — Vacuum  tube,  where  a  bundle  of  cathode  rays  are 
deviated  by  electric  forces. 

A,  anode  ;  K,  cathode. 

that  they  consist  of  particles  which  are  hurled  from  the 
cathode  with  great  velocity  in  straight  lines  ;  they  light 
the  wall  by  their  collisions  with  it.  There  was  soon  no 
doubt  as  to  the  correctness  of  Crookes’  theory.  The 
cathode  rays  are  evidently  particles  of  negative  elec¬ 
tricity,  which  by  repulsions  are  driven  from  the  cathode 
(the  negative  electrode).  A  metal  plate  bombarded 
by  the  rays  becomes  charged  negatively.  Let  us 
suppose  that  we  have  a  small  bundle  of  cathode  rays, 
obtained  by  passing  the  rays  from  the  cathode  K 
(cf.  Fig.  17)  through  two  narrow  openings  Sx  and  5. 
It  can  then  be  shown  that  the  bundle  of  rays  is  deviated 


70  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


not  only  by  electric  forces,  but  also  by  magnetic  action 
from  a  magnet  which  is  held  near  the  glass.  In  the 
figure  there  is  shown  a  deviation  of  the  kind  mentioned, 
caused  by  making  the  plates  at  B  and  C  respectively 
positive  and  negative  ;  since  B  attracts  the  negative 
particles  and  C  repels  them,  the  light  spot  produced  by 
the  bundle  of  rays  is  moved  from  M  to  Mv  The  magnetic 
deviation  is  in  agreement  with  0rsted’s  rules  for  the 
reciprocal  actions  between  currents  and  magnets,  if  we 
consider  the  bundle  of  rays  produced  by  moving  electric 
particles  as  an  electric  current.  (Since  the  electric 
particles  travelling  in  the  direction  of  the  rays  are 
negative,  and  since  it  is  customary  by  the  expression 
“  direction  of  current  ”  to  understand  the  direction 
opposite  to  that  in  which  the  negative  electricity  moves, 
then,  in  the  case  of  the  cathode  rays  just  mentioned,  the 
direction  of  the  current  must  be  opposite  to  that  of  the 
rays.) 

From  measurements  of  the  magnetic  and  electric 
deviations  it  is  possible  to  find  not  only  the  velocity  of 
the  particles,  but  also  the  ratio  e/m  between  the  charge  e 
of  the  particle  and  its  mass  m.  The  velocity  varies  with 
the  potential  at  the  cathode,  and  may  be  very  great, 
50,000  km.  per  second,  for  instance  (about  one-sixth  the 
speed  of  light),  or  more.  It  has  been  found  that  ejm 
always  has  the  same  value,  regardless  of  the  metal  of 
the  cathode  and  of  the  gas  in  the  tube  ;  this  means  that 
the  particles  are  not  atoms  of  the  elements,  but  some¬ 
thing  quite  new.  It  has  also  been  found  that  e/ m  is  about 
two  thousand  times  as  large  as  the  ratio  between  the 
charge  and  the  mass  of  the  hydrogen  atom  in  electro¬ 
lysis.  If  we  now  assume  that  e  is  just  the  elementary 
quantum  of  electricity  477X10*-10,  which  in  magnitude 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


71 


amounts  to  the  charge  of  the  hydrogen  atom  in  elec¬ 
trolysis  (but  is  negative),  then  m  must  have  about 
1/2000  the  mass  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  This  assump¬ 
tion  as  to  the  size  of  e  has  been  justified  by  experiments 
of  more  direct  nature.  The  experiments  with  charge 
and  mass  of  electrons  which  have  in  particular  been 
carried  out  by  the  English  physicist,  J.  J.  Thomson, 
give  reason  then  to  suppose  these  quite  new  and  unknown 
particles  to  be  free  atoms  of  negative  electricity  ;  they 
have  been  given  the  name  of  electrons.  Gradually  more 
information  about  them  has  been  acquired.  Thus  it 
has  been  possible  in  various  ways  to  determine  directly 
the  charge  on  the  electron,  independently  of  its  mass. 
Special  mention  must  be  made  of  the  brilliant  investiga¬ 
tions  of  the  American,  Millikan,  on  the  motion  of  very 
small  electrified  oil-drops  through  air  under  the  influence 
of  an  electric  force.  To  Millikan  is  due  the  above- 
mentioned  value  of  e,  which  is  accurate  to  one  part  in 
five  hundred.  Further,  the  mass  of  the  electron  has  been 
more  exactly  calculated  as  about  1/1835  that  the 
hydrogen  atom.  Their  magnitude  has  also  been  learned  ; 
the  radius  of  the  electron  is  estimated  as  1-5  xio-13 
cm.  or  1-5x10 an  order  of  magnitude  one  ten- 
thousandth  that  of  the  molecule  or  atom. 

After  the  atom  of  negative  electricity  had  been 
isolated,  in  the  form  of  cathode  rays,  the  next  suggestion 
was  that  corresponding  positive  electric  particles  might 
be  discharged  from  the  anode  in  a  vacuum  tube.  By 
special  methods  success  has  been  attained  in  showing 
and  studying  rays  of  positive  particles.  In  order  to 
separate  them  from  the  negative  cathode  ray  particles 
the  German  scientist,  Goldstein,  let  the  positive  particles 
pass  through  canals  in  the  cathode  ;  they  are  therefore 


72  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

called  canal  rays.  The  velocity  of  the  particles  is  much 
less  than  that  of  the  cathode  rays,  and  the  ratio  e/m 
between  charge  and  mass  is  much  smaller  and  varies 
according  to  the  gas  in  the  tube.  In  experiments  where 
the  tube  contains  hydrogen,  rays  are  always  found  for 
which  e/m,  as  in  electrolysis,  is  about  1/2000  of  the  ratio 
in  the  cathode  rays.  Therefore  there  can  be  scarcely 
any  doubt  that  these  canal  rays  are  made  up  of  charged 
hydrogen  atoms  or  hydrogen  ions.  The  values  found 
with  other  gases  indicate  that  the  particles  are  atoms 
(or  molecules  sometimes)  of  the  elements  in  question, 
with  charges  one  or  more  times  the  elementary  quantum 
of  electricity  (477  X  nr10  electrostatic  units).  Research 
in  this  field  has  also  been  due  in  particular  to  J.  J.  Thom¬ 
son.  From  his  results,  as  well  as  from  those  obtained 
by  other  methods,  it  follows  that  positive  electricity, 
unlike  negative,  cannot  appear  of  its  own  accord,  but  is 
inextricably  connected  to  the  atoms  of  the  elements. 

The  Nature  of  Electricity. 

The  earlier  conceptions  of  a  one  or  two-fluid  explana¬ 
tion  of  the  phenomena  of  electricity  appear  now  in  a 
new  light.  We  are  led  to  think  of  a  neutral  atom  as 
consisting  of  one  mass  charged  with  positive  electricity 
together  with  as  many  electrons  negatively  charged  as 
are  sufficient  to  neutralize  the  positive.  If  the  atom 
loses  one,  two  or  three  electrons,  it  becomes  positive  with 
a  charge  of  one,  two  or  three  elementary  quanta  of 
electricity,  or  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  and  brevity  we 
say  that  the  atom  has  one,  two  or  three  “  charges.”  If, 
on  the  other  hand,  it  takes  up  one,  two  or  three  extra 
electrons  it  has  one,  two  or  three  negative  charges. 
Fig.  18  can  give  help  in  understanding  these  ideas,  but 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


73 


it  must  not  be  thought  that  the  electrons  are  arranged 
in  the  way  indicated.  The  substances,  which  appear  as 
electropositive  in  electrolysis — i.e.  hydrogen  and  metals 
—should  then  be  such  that  their  atoms  easily  lose  one 
or  more  electrons,  while  the  electronegative  elements 
should,  on  the  other  hand,  easily  take  up  extra  electrons. 
Elements  should  be  monovalent  or  divalent  according 
as  their  atoms  are  apt  to  lose  or  to  take  up  one  or  two 


0 


FIG.  1 8. — Provisional  representation  (according  to  the  electron 

theory)  of 

A,  a  neutral  atom  ;  B,  the  same  atom  with  two  positive  charges 
(a  divalent  positive  ion)  and  C,  the  same  atom  with  two  negative 
charges  (a  divalent  negative  ion). 


electrons.  From  investigations  with  the  vacuum  tube 
it  appears,  however,  that  the  atoms  of  the  same  element 
can  in  this  respect  behave  in  more  ways  than  would  be 
expected  from  electrolysis  or  chemical  valence. 

When  an  electric  current  passes  through  a  metal  wire, 
it  must  be  assumed  that  the  atoms  of  the  metal  remain 
in  place,  while  the  electrical  forces  carry  the  electrons 
in  a  direction  opposite  to  that  which  usually  is  con¬ 
sidered  as  the  direction  of  the  current  (cf.  p.  70).  The 
motion  of  the  electrons  must  not  be  supposed  to  proceed 
without  hindrance,  but  rather  as  the  result  of  a  com- 


74 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


plicated  interplay,  by  no  means  completely  understood, 
whereby  the  electrons  are  freed  from  and  caught  by  the 
atoms  and  travel  backwards  and  forwards,  in  such  a 
way  that  through  every  section  of  the  metal  wire  a 
surplus  of  electrons  is  steadily  passing  in  the  direction 
opposite  to  the  so-called  direction  of  the  current.  The 
number  of  surplus  electrons  which  in  every  second  passes 
through  a  section  of  the  thin  metal  wire  in  an  ordinary 
twenty-five  candle  incandescent  light,  at  220  volts, 
amounts  to  about  one  trillion  (io18),  or  1000  million 
(io9)  in  0*000,000,001  of  a  second.  If  the  metal  con¬ 
ducting  wire  ends  in  the  cathode  of  a  vacuum  tube,  the 
electrons  carried  through  the  wire  pass  freely  into  the 
tube  as  cathode  rays  from  the  cathode.  * 

This  motion  of  electricity  agrees  best  with  the  one- 
fluid  theory,  since  the  electrons,  which  here  alone  accom¬ 
plish  the  passage  of  the  electricity,  may  be  considered 
as  the  fundamental  parts  of  electricity.  In  this  respect 
the  choice  of  the  terms  positive  and  negative  is  very 
unfortunate,  since  a  body  with  a  negative  charge  actually 
has  a  surplus  of  electrons.  Moreover,  the  electrons 
really  have  mass  ;  but  since  th§  mass  of  a  single  electron 
is  only  1/1835  that  of  the  atom  of  the  lightest  element, 
hydrogen,  and  since  in  an  electrified  body  which  can  be 
weighed  by  scale  there  is  always  but  an  infinitesimal 
number  of  charged  atoms,  it  is  easy  to  understand  that, 
formerly,  electricity  seemed  to  be  without  weight. 

In  electrolysis,  where  the  motion  of  electricity  is 
accomplished  by  positive  and  negative  ions,  we  have  a 
closer  connection  with  the  two-fluid  theory.  In  motions 
of  electricity  through  air  the  situation  suggests  both  the 
one-fluid  and  the  two-fluid  theories,  since  the  passage  of 
electricity  is  sometimes  carried  on  exclusively  by  the 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


75 


electrons,  and  sometimes  partly  by  them  and  partly 
by  larger  positive  and  negative  ions,  i.e.,  atoms  or  mole¬ 
cules  with  positive  and  negative  charges. 

The  Electron  Theory. 

Proceeding  on  the  assumption  that  the  electric  and 
optical  properties  of  the  elements  are  determined  by  the 
activity  of  the  electric  particles,  the  Dutch  physicist 
Lorentz  and  the  English  physicist  Larmour  succeeded  in 
formulating  an  extraordinarily  comprehensive  “  electron 
theory,”  by  which  the  electrodynamic  laws  for  the 
variations  in  state  of  the  ether  were  adapted  to  the 
doctrine  of  ions  and  electrons.  This  Lorentz  theory  must 
be  recognized  as  one  of  the  finest  and  most  significant 
results  of  nineteenth  century  physical  research. 

It  was  one  of  the  most  suggestive  problems  of  this 
theory  to  account  for  the  emission  of  light  waves  from 
the  atom.  From  the  previously  described  electro¬ 
magnetic  theory  of  fight  (cf.  p.  42)  it  follows  that  an 
electron  oscillating  in  an  atom  will  emit  fight  waves 
in  the  ether,  and  that  the  frequency  v  of  these  waves  will 
naturally  be  equal  to  the  number  of  oscillations  of  the 
electron  in  a  second.  If  this  last  quantity  is  designated 
as  a,  then 

V—QO 

It  may  then  be  supposed  that  the  electrons  in  the  un¬ 
disturbed  atom  are  in  a  state  of  rest,  comparable  with 
that  of  a  ball  in  the  bottom  of  a  bowl.  When  the  atom 
in  some  way  is  “  shaken,”  one  or  more  of  the  electrons 
in  the  atom  begins  to  oscillate  with  a  definite  frequency, 
just  as  the  ball  might  roll  back  and  forth  in  the  bowl  if 
the  bowl  was  shaken.  This  means  that  the  atom  is 
emitting  fight  waves,  which,  for  each  individual  electron 


76  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

have  a  definite  wave-length  corresponding  to  the  fre¬ 
quency  of  the  oscillations,  and  that,  in  the  spectrum  of 
the  emitted  light,  the  observed  spectral  lines  correspond 
to  these  wave-lengths. 

Strong  support  for  this  view  was  afforded  by  Zeeman’s 
discovery  of  the  influence  of  a  magnetic  field  upon  spectral 
lines.  Zeeman,  a  Dutch  physicist,  discovered,  about 
twenty-five  years  ago,  that  when  a  glowing  vacuum 
tube  is  placed  between  the  poles  of  a  strong  electro¬ 
magnet,  the  spectral  lines  in  the  emitted  light  are  split 
so  that  each  line  is  divided  into  three  components  with 
very  little  distance  between  them.  It  was  one  of  the 
great  triumphs  of  the  electron  theory  that  Lorentz  was 
able  to  show  that  such  an  effect  was  to  be  expected  if 
it  was  assumed  that  the  oscillations  of  fight  were  pro¬ 
duced  by  small  oscillating  electric  particles  within  the 
atom.  From  the  experiments  and  from  the  known  laws 
concerning  the  reciprocal  actions  of  a  magnet  and  an 
electric  current  (here  the  moving  particle),  the  theory 
enabled  Lorentz  to  find  not  only  the  ratio  e/m  between 
the  electric  charge  of  each  of  these  particles  and  its  mass, 
but  also  the  nature  of  the  charge.  He  could  conclude 
from  Zeeman’s  experiment  that  the  charge  is  negative 
and  that  the  ratio  e/m  is  the  same  as  that  found  for  the 
cathode  rays.  After  this  there  could  not  well  be  doubt 
that  the  electrons  in  the  atoms  were  the  origin  of  the 
fight  which  gives  the  fines  of  the  spectrum.  It  seemed, 
however,  quite  unfeasible  for  the  theory  to  explain  the 
details  in  a  spectrum — to  derive,  for  instance,  Balmer’s 
formula,  or  to  show  why  hydrogen  has  these  fines, 
copper  those,  etc.  These  difficulties,  combined  with 
the  great  number  of  fines  in  the  different  spectra, 
seemed  to  mean  that  there  were  many  electrons  in 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


77 


an  atom  and  that  the  structure  of  an  atom  was  ex¬ 
ceedingly  complicated. 

Ionization  by  X-rays  and  Rays  from  Radium.  Radio¬ 
activity. 

As  has  been  said,  the  electrons  in  a  vacuum  tube 
cause  its  wall  to  emit  a  greenish  light  when  they  strike 
it.  Upon  meeting  the  glass  wall  or  a  piece  of  metal 
(the  anticathode)  placed  in  the  tube  the  electrons  cause 
also  the  emission  of  the  peculiar,  penetrating  rays 
called  Rontgen  rays  in  honour  of  their  discoverer,  or 
more  commonly  X-rays.  They  may  be  described  as 
ultra-violet  rays  with  exceedingly  small  wave-lengths 
(cf.  p.  54).  When,  further,  the  electrons  meet  gas 
molecules  in  the  tube  they  break  them  to  pieces,  separat¬ 
ing  them  into  positive  and  negative  ions  {ionization). 
The  positive  ions  are  the  ones  which  appear  in  the  canal 
rays.  The  ions  set  in  motion  by  electrical  forces  can 
break  other  gas  molecules  to  pieces,  thus  assisting  in 
the  ionization  process.  At  the  same  time  the  gas 
molecules  and  atoms  are  made  to  produce  disturbances 
in  the  ether,  and  thus  to  cause  the  light  phenomena  • 
which  arise  in  a  tube  which  is  not  too  strongly  exhausted. 

The  free  air  can  be  ionized  in  various  ways  ;  this 
ionization  can  be  detected  because  the  air  becomes 
more  or  less  conducting.  In  fact,  electric  forces  will 
drive  the  positive  and  negative  ions  through  the  air 
in  opposite  directions,  thus  giving  rise  to  an  electric 
current.  If  the  ionization  process  is  not  steadily 
continued,  the  air  gradually  loses  its  conductivity,  since 
the  positive  and  negative  ions  recombine  into  neutral 
atoms  or  molecules.  Ionization  can  be  produced  by 
flames,  since  the  air  rising  from  a  flame  contains  ions. 


78  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


A  strong  ionization  can  also  be  brought  about  by  X-rays 
and  by  ultra-violet  rays.  In  the  higher  strata  of  the 
atmosphere  the  ultra-violet  rays  of  the  sun  exercise 
an  ionizing  influence.  Most  of  all,  however,  the  air  is 
ionized  by  rays  from  the  so-called  radioactive  substances 
which  in  very  small  quantities  are  distributed  about 
the  world. 

The  characteristic  radiation  from  these  substances 
was  discovered  in  the  last  decade  of  the  nineteenth 
century  by  the  French  physicist,  Becquerel,  and  after¬ 
wards  studied  by  M.  and  Mme.  Curie.  From  the  radio¬ 
active  uranium  mineral,  pitchblende,  the  latter  separated 
the  many  times  more  strongly  radioactive  element 
radium.  The  proper  nature  of  the  rays  was  later 
explained,  particularly  through  the  investigations  of  the 
English  physicists,  Rutherford,  Soddy  and  Ramsay. 
These  rays,  which  can  produce  heat  effects,  photographic 
effects  and  ionization,  are  of  three  quite  different 
classes,  and  accordingly  are  known  as  a-rays,  |3-rays, 
and  y-rays.  The  last  named,  like  the  X-rays,  are 
ultra-violet  rays,  but  they  have  often  even  shorter  wave¬ 
lengths  and  a  much  greater  power  of  penetration  than 
the  usual  X-rays.  The  |3-rays  are  electrons  which  are 
ejected  with  much  greater  velocity  than  the  cathode 
rays  ;  in  some  cases  their  velocity  goes  up  to  99-8 
per  cent,  that  of  light.  The  a-rays  are  positive  atomic 
ions,  which  move  with  a  velocity  varying  according  to 
the  emitting  radioactive  element  from  1/20  to  almost 
1/10  that  of  light.  It  has  further  been  proved  that  the 
a-particles  are  atoms  of  the  element  helium,  which 
has  the  atomic  weight  4,  and  that  they  possess  two 
positive  charges,  i.e.,  they  must  take  up  two  electrons 
to  produce  a  neutral  helium  atom. 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


79 


There  is  no  doubt  that  the  process  which  takes  place 
in  the  emission  of  radiation  from  the  radioactive 
elements  is  a  transformation  of  the  element,  an  explosion 
of  the  atoms  accompanied  by  the  emission  either  of 
double-charged  helium  atoms  or  of  electrons,  and  the 
forming  of  the  atoms  of  a  new  element.  The  energy  of 
the  rays  is  an  internal  atomic  energy,  freed  by  these 
transformations.  The  element  uranium,  with  the 
greatest  of  all  known  atomic  weights  (238),  passes,  by 
several  intermediate  steps,  into  radium  with  atomic 
weight  226  ;  from  radium  there  comes,  after  a  series  of 
steps,  lead,  or,  in  any  case,  an  element  which,  in  all  its 
chemical  properties,  behaves  like  lead.  We  shall  go  no 
further  into  this  subject,  merely  remarking  that  the 
transformations  are  quite  independent  of  the  chemical 
combinations  into  which  the  radioactive  elements 
have  entered,  and  of  all  external  influences. 

When  a-particles  from  radium  are  sent  against  a 
screen  with  a  coating  of  especially  prepared  zinc  sulphide, 
on  this  screen,  in  the  dark,  there  can  be  seen  a  character¬ 
istic  light  phenomenon,  the  so-called  scintillation,  which 
consists  of  many  flashes  of  light.  Each  individual 
flash  means  that  an  a-particle,  a  helium  atom,  has  hit 
the  screen.  In  this  bombardment  by  atoms  the  in¬ 
dividual  atom-projectiles  are  made  visible  in  a  manner 
similar  to  that  in  which  the  individual  raindrops  which 
fall  on  the  surface  of  a  body  of  water  are  made  visible 
by  the  wave  rings  which  spread  from  the  places  where 
the  drops  meet  the  water.  This  flash  of  light  was  the 
first  effect  of  the  individual  atom  to  be  available  for 
investigation  and  observation.  The  incredibility  of 
anything  so  small  as  an  atom  producing  a  visible  effect 
is  lessened  when,  instead  of  paying  attention  merely 


80 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


to  the  small  size  or  mass  of  the  atom,  its  kinetic  energy 
is  considered  ;  this  energy  is  proportional  to  the  square 
of  the  velocity,  which  is  here  of  overwhelming  magnitude. 
For  the  most  rapid  a-particles  the  velocity  is  2*26  xio9 
cm.  per  second ;  their  kinetic  energy  is  then  about 


Fig.  19. — Photograph  of  paths  described  by 
a-particles  (positive  helium  ions)  emitted 
from  a  radioactive  substance. 

1/30  of  the  kinetic  energy  of  a  weight  of  one  milligram 
of  a  substance  at  a  velocity  of  one  centimetre  per  second. 
This  energy  may  seem  very  small,  but,  at  least,  it  is 
not  a  magnitude  of  “  inconceivable  minuteness,”  and 
it  is  sufficient  under  the  conditions  given  above  to  produce 
a  visible  light  effect.  We  must  here  also  consider  the 
extreme  sensitiveness  of  the  eye. 


IONS  AND  ELECTRONS 


81 


More  practical  methods  of  revealing  the  effects  of 
the  individual  a-particles  and  of  counting  them  are 
founded  on  their  very  strong  ionization  power.  By 
strengthening  the  ionization  power  of  a-particles, 
Rutherford  and  Geiger  were  able  to  make  the  air  in  a 


Fig.  20. — Photograph  of  the  path  of  a  /3-particle 

(an  electron) . 

(Both  19  and  20  are  photographs  by  C.  T.  R.  Wilson.) 

so-called  ionization  chamber  so  good  a  conductor  that 
an  individual  a-particle  caused  a  deflection  in  an 
electrical  apparatus,  an  electrometre. 

With  a  more  direct  method  the  English  scientist 
C.  T.  R.  Wilson  has  shown  the  paths  of  the  a-particles 
by  making  use  of  the  characteristic  property  of  ions, 
that  in  damp  air  they  attract  the  neutral  water  mole- 
6 


82 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


cules  which  then  form  drops  of  water  with  the  ions  as 
nuclei.  In  air  which  is  completely  free  of  dust  and 
ions  the  water  vapour  is  not  condensed,  even  if  the 
temperature  is  decreased  so  as  to  give  rise  to  super¬ 
saturation,  but  as  soon  as  the  air  is  ionized  the  vapour 
condenses  into  a  fog.  When  Wilson  sent  a-particles 
through  air,  supersaturated  with  water  vapour,  the 
vapour  condensed  into  small  drops  on  the  ions  produced 
by  the  particles ;  the  streaks  of  fog  thus  obtained 
could  be  photographed.  Fig.  19  shows  such  a  photo¬ 
graph  of  the  paths  of  a  number  of  atoms.  When  a 
streak  of  fog  ends  abruptly  it  does  not  mean  that  the 
a-particles  have  suddenly  halted,  but  that  their  velocity 
has  decreased  so  that  they  can  no  longer  break  the 
molecules  of  air  to  pieces,  producing  ions.  The  paths 
of  the  /3-particles  have  been  photographed  in  the  same 
way,  although  an  electron  of  the  ,8-particles  has  a  mass 
about  7000  times  smaller  than  that  of  a  helium  atom  ; 
the  electron  has,  however,  a  far  greater  velocity  than 
the  helium  atom.  This  velocity  causes  the  ions  to  be 
farther  apart,  so  that  each  drop  of  water  formed  around 
the  individual  ions  can  appear  in  the  photograph  by 
itself  (cf.  Fig.  20). 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 

Introduction. 

We  are  now  brought  face  to  face  with  the  funda¬ 
mental  question,  hardly  touched  upon  at  all  in  the 
previous  part  of  this  work,  namely,  that  of  the  con¬ 
struction  and  mode  of  operation  of  the  atomic  mechanism 
itself.  In  the  first  place  we  must  ask  :  What  is  the 
“  architecture  ”  of  the  atom,  that  is,  what  positions 
do  the  positive  and  negative  particles  take  up  with 
respect  to  each  other,  and  how  many  are  there  of  each 
kind  ?  In  the  second  place,  of  what  sort  are  the  pro¬ 
cesses  which  take  place  in  an  atom,  and  how  can  we 
make  them  interpret  the  physical  and  chemical  pro¬ 
perties  of  the  elements  ?  In  this  chapter  we  shall  keep 
essentially  to  the  first  question,  and  consider  especially 
the  great  contribution  which  Rutherford  made  in  1911 
to  its  answer  in  his  discovery  of  the  positive  atomic 
nucleus  and  in  the  development  of  what  is  known  as  the 
Rutherford  atomic  model  or  nuclear  atom. 

Rutherford’s  Atom  Model. 

Rutherford’s  discovery  was  the  result  of  an  in¬ 
vestigation  which,  in  its  main  outlines,  was  carried  out 
as  follows  :  a  dense  stream  of  a-particles  from  a  powerful 


84 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


radium  preparation  was  sent  into  a  highly  exhausted 
chamber  through  a  little  opening.  On  a  zinc  sulphide 
screen,  placed  a  little  distance  behind  the  opening,  there 
was  then  produced  by  this  bombardment  of  atomic 
projectiles,  a  small,  sharply  defined  spot  of  light.  The 
opening  was  next  covered  by  a  thin  metal  plate,  which 
can  be  considered  as  a  piece  of  chain  mail  formed  of 
densely-packed  atoms.  The  a-particles,  working  their 
way  through  the  atoms,  easily  traversed  this  “  piece 
of  mail  ”  because  of  their  great  velocity.  But  now  it 
was  seen  that  the  spot  of  light  broadened  out  a  little 
and  was  no  longer  sharply  limited.  From  this  fact  one 
could  conclude  that  the  a-particles  in  passing  among  the 
many  atoms  in  the  metal  plate  suffered  countless,  very 
small  deflections,  thus  producing  a  slight  spreading  of 
the  rays.  It  could  also  be  seen  that  some,  though 
comparatively  few,  of  the  a-particles  broke  utterly 
away  from  the  stream,  and  travelled  farther  in  new 
directions,  some,  indeed,  glancing  back  from  the  metal 
plate  in  the  direction  in  which  they  had  come  (cf.  Fig.  21). 
The  situation  was  approximately  as  if  one  had  dis¬ 
charged  a  quantity  of  small  shot  through  a  wall  of 
butter,  and  nearly  all  the  pellets  had  gone  through  the 
wall  in  an  almost  unchanged  direction,  but  that  one  or 
two  individual  ones  had  in  some  apparently  uncalled- 
for  fashion  come  travelling  back  from  the  interior  of  the 
butter.  One  might  naturally  conclude  from  this  cir¬ 
cumstance  that  here  and  there  in  the  butter  were  located 
some  small,  hard,  heavy  objects,  for  example,  some 
small  pellets  with  which  some  of  the  projectiles  by  chance 
had  collided.  Accordingly,  it  seemed  as  if  there  were 
located  in  the  metal  sheet  some  small  hard  objects. 
These  could  hardly  be  the  electrons  of  the  metal  atoms, 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


85 


because  a-particles,  as  has  been  stated  before,  are  helium 
atoms  with  a  mass  over  seven  thousand  times  that  of  a 
single  electron ;  and  if  such  an  atom  collided  with  an 
electron,  it  would  easily  push  the  electron  aside  without 
itself  being  deviated  materially  in  its  path.  Hardly  any 
other  possibility  remained  than  to  assume  that  what 


Fig.  21. — Tracks  of  a-particles  in  the  interior  of  matter.  While 

1  and  3  undergo  small  deflections  by  collisions  with  electrons, 

2  is  sharply  deflected  by  a  positive  nucleus. 


the  a-particles  had  collided  with  was  the  positive  part 
of  the  atom,  whose  mass  is  of  the  same  order  of  magni¬ 
tude  as  the  mass  of  the  helium  atom  (cf.  Fig.  21). 
A  mathematical  investigation  showed  that  the  large 
deflections  were  produced  because  the  a-particles  in 
question  had  passed,  on  their  way,  through  a  tre¬ 
mendously  strong  electric  field  of  the  kind  which  will 
exist  about  an  electric  charge  concentrated  into  a  very 
small  space  and  acting  on  other  charges  according  to 
Coulomb’s  Law.  When,  in  the  foregoing,  the  word 


86 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


"  collision  ”  is  used,  it  must  not  be  taken  to  mean  simply 
a  collision  of  elastic  spheres;  rather  the  two  particles 
(the  a-particle  and  the  positive  particle  of  the  metal 
atom)  come  so  near  to  each  other  in  the  flight  of  the 
former  that  the  very  great  electrical  forces  brought  into 
play  cause  a  significant  deflection  of  the  a-particles  from 
their  original  course. 

Rutherford  was  thus  led  to  the  hypothesis  that 
nearly  all  of  the  mass  of  the  atom  is  concentrated  into 
a  positively  charged  nucleus,  which,  like  the  electrons,  is 
very  small  in  comparison  with  the  size  of  the  whole 
atom  ;  while  the  rest  of  the  mass  is  apportioned  among 
a  number  of  negative  electrons  which  must  be  assumed 
to  rotate  about  the  nucleus  under  the  attraction  of  the 
latter,  just  as  the  planets  rotate  about  the  sun.  Under 
this  hypothesis  the  outer  limits  of  the  atom  must  be 
regarded  as  given  by  the  outermost  electron  orbits. 
The  assumption  of  an  atom  of  this  structure  makes  it  at 
once  intelligible  why,  in  general,  the  a-particles  can 
travel  through  the  atom  without  being  deflected  materi¬ 
ally  by  the  nuclear  repulsion,  and  why  the  very  great 
deflections  occur  as  seldom  as  is  indicated  by  experiment. 
This  latter  circumstance  has,  on  the  other  hand,  no 
explanation  in  the  atomic  model  previously  suggested 
by  Lord  Kelvin  and  amplified  by  J.  J.  Thomson,  in  which 
the  positive  electricity  was  assumed  to  be  distributed 
over  the  whole  volume  of  the  atom,  while  the  electrons 
were  supposed  to  move  in  rings  at  varying  distances 
from  the  centre  of  the  atom. 

The  same  characteristic  phenomenon  made  evident 
in  the  passage  of  a-particles  through  substances  by  the 
investigations  of  Rutherford  appears  in  a  more  direct 
way  in  Wilson’s  researches  discussed  on  p.  81.  His 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


87 


photographs  of  the  paths  of  a-particles  through  air  super¬ 
saturated  with  water  vapour  (see  Fig.  22)  show  pro¬ 
nounced  kinks  in  the  paths  of  individual  particles. 
Thus  in  the  figure  referred  to,  there  are  shown  the  paths 
of  two  a-particles.  One  of  these  is  almost  a  straight 
line  (with  a  very  slight  curvature),  while  the  other' 
shows  a  very  perceptible  deflection  as  it  approaches 
the  immediate  neighbourhood  of  the  nucleus  of  an  atom, 
and  finally  a  very  abrupt  kink  ;  at  the  latter  place  it  is 
clear  that  the  a-particle  has  penetrated  very  close  to  the 
nucleus.  If  one  examines  the  picture  more  closely  ^ 


Fig.  22. — Photograph  of  the  paths  of  two  a-particles  (positive 
helium  ions).  One  collides  with  an  atomic  nucleus. 


there  will  be  seen  a  very  small  fork  at  the  place  where 
the  kink  is  located.  Here  the  path  seems  to  have 
divided  into  two  branches,  a  shorter  and  a  longer.  This 
leads  one  at  once  to  suspect  that  a  collision  between  two 
bodies  has  taken  place,  and  that  after  the  collision  each 
body  has  travelled  its  own  path,  just  as  if,  to  return  to 
the  analogy  of  the  bombardment  of  the  butter  wall,  one 
had  been  able  to  drive  two  pellets  out  of  the  butter  by 
shooting  in  only  one.  Or,  to  take  perhaps  a  more  familiar 
example,  when  a  moving  billiard  ball  collides  at  random 
with  a  stationary  one,  after  the  collision  they  both 
move  off  in  different  directions.  So,  when  the  a-particle 


88  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

hits  at  random  the  atomic  nucleus,  both  particle  and 
nucleus  move  off  in  different  directions  ;  though  in  this 
case,  since  the  nucleus  has  the  much  greater  mass  of  the 
two,  it  moves  more  slowly,  after  the  collision,  than  the 
a-particle,  and  has,  therefore,  a  much  shorter  range 
in  the  air  than  the  lighter,  swifter  a-particle.  Had 
the  gas  in  which  the  collisions  took  place  been 
hydrogen,  for  example,  the  recoil  paths  of  the  hydro¬ 
gen  nuclei  would  have  been  longer  than  those  of  the 
a-particles,  because  the  mass  of  the  hydrogen  nucleus 
is  but  one  quarter  the  mass  of  the  a-particle  (helium 
atom). 

The  collision  experiments  on  which  Rutherford’s 
theory  is  founded  are  of  so  direct  and  decisive  a  character 
that  one  can  hardly  call  it  a  theory,  but  rather  a  fact, 
founded  on  observation,  showing  conclusively  that  the 
atom  is  built  after  the  fashion  indicated.  Continued 
researches  have  amassed  a  quantity  of  important  facts 
about  atoms.  Thus,  Rutherford  was  able  to  show  that 
the  radius  of  the  nucleus  is  of  the  order  of  magnitude 
io-12  to  io-13  cm.  This  means  really  that  it  is  only  when 
an  a-particle  approaches  so  near  the  centre  of  an  atom 
that  forces  come  into  play  which  no  longer  follow 
Coulomb’s  Law  for  the  repulsion  between  two  point 
charges  of  the  same  sign  (in  contrast  to  the  case  in  the 
ordinary  deflections  of  a-particles) .  It  should  be  re¬ 
marked,  however,  that  in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen 
nucleus  theoretical  considerations  give  foundation  for 
the  assumption  that  its  radius  is  really  many  times 
smaller  than  the  radius  of  the  electron,  which  is  some 
2000  times  lighter  ;  experiments  by  which  this  assump¬ 
tion  can  be  tested  are  not  at  hand  at  present. 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


89 


The  Nuclear  Charge  ;  Atomic  Number  ;  Atomic  Weight. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  have  recourse  to  a  new  research 
to  determine  the  masses  of  the  nuclei  of  various  atoms, 
because  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  is  for  all  practical  pur¬ 
poses  the  mass  of  the  atom.  Accordingly,  if  the  mass  of 
the  hydrogen  nucleus  is  taken  as  unity,  the  atomic  mass 
is  equal  to  the  atomic  weight  as  previously  defined. 
The  individual  electrons  which  accompany  the  nucleus 
are  so  light  that  their  mass  has  relatively  little  influence 
(within  the  limits  of  experimental  accuracy)  on  the  total 
mass  of  the  atom. 

On  the  other  hand,  a  problem  of  the  greatest  import¬ 
ance  which  immediately  suggests  itself  is  to  determine 
the  magnitude  of  the  positive  charge  of  the  nucleus. 
This  naturally  must  be  an  integral  multiple  of  the 
fundamental  quantum  of  negative  electricity,  namely, 
477  X  io~10  electrostatic  units,  or  if  we  prefer  to  call  this 
simply  the  “  unit  ”  charge,  then  the  nuclear  charge  must 
be  an  integer.  Otherwise  a  neutral  atom  could  not  be 
formed  of  a  nucleus  and  electrons,  for  in  a  neutral  atom 
the  number  of  negative  electrons  which  move  about 
the  nucleus  must  be  equal  to  the  number  of  positive 
charges  in  the  nucleus.  The  determination  of  this  num¬ 
ber  is,  accordingly,  equivalent  to  the  settling  of  the 
important  question,  how  many  electrons  surround  the 
nucleus  in  the  normal  neutral  state  of  the  atom  of  the 
element  in  question. 

The  answer  to  the  question  is  easiest  in  the  case  of  the 
helium  atom.  For  when  this  is  expelled  as  an  a-particle, 
it  carries,  as  Rutherford  was  able  to  show,  a  positive 
charge  of  two  units — in  other  words,  two  electrons  are 
necessary  to  change  the  positive  ion  into  a  neutral  atom. 


90 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


At  the  same  time  there  is  every  reason  to  suppose  that 
the  a-particle  is  simply  a  helium  nucleus  deprived  of  its 
electrons  ;  it  follows,  therefore,  that  the  electron  system 
of  the  neutral  helium  atom  consists  of  two  electrons. 
Since  the  atomic  weight  of  helium  is  four,  the  number  of 
electrons  is  consequently  one-half  the  atomic  weight. 
Rutherford’s  investigation  of  the  deflections  of  a-particles 
in  passing  through  various  media  had  already  led  him 
to  believe  that  for  many  other  elements,  to  a  consider¬ 
able  approximation,  the  nuclear  charge  and  hence  the 


ABC 

Fig.  23. — Schematic  representation  of  the  nuclear  atom. 

A,  a  neutral  hydrogen  atom  ;  B,  a  positive,  and  C,  a  negative  hydrogen 

ion ;  K,  atomic  nuclei ;  E,  electrons. 

'  \ 

\ 

number  of  electrons  was  equal  to  half  the  atomic  weight. 
Hydrogen,  of  course,  must  form  an  exception,  since  its 
atomic  weight  is  unity.  The  positive  charge  on  the  hydro¬ 
gen  nucleus  is  one  elementary  quantum,  and  in  the  neutral 
state  of  the  atom,  only  one  electron  rotates  about  it.  Fig.  23 
gives  a  representation  of  the  structure  of  the  hydrogen 
atom,  and  the  structures  of  the  two  types  of  hydrogen 
ions  formed  respectively  by  the  loss  and  gain  of  an  elec¬ 
tron.  In  the  picture,  the  position  of  the  electron  is,  of 
course,  arbitrary,  and  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  its  path 
is  supposed  to  be  circular. 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


91 


As  has  just  been  indicated,  Rutherford’s  rule  for  the 
number  of  electrons  is  only  an  approximation.  A  Dutch 
physicist,  van  den  Broek,  conceived  in  the  meantime 
the  idea  that  the  number  of  electrons  in  the  atom  of  an 
element  is  equal  to  its  order  number  in  the  periodic 
table  (its  "  atomic  number,”  as  it  is  now  called). 
Especially  through  a  systematic  investigation  of  the 
X-ray  spectra  characteristic  of  the  different  elements 
this  has  proved  to  be  the  correct  rule.  In  fact,  using 
Bragg’s  reflection  method  of  X-rays  from  crystal  sur¬ 
faces  (cf.  p.  54),  the  Englishman,  Moseley,  made  in  1914 
the  far-reaching  discovery  that  these  spectra  possess  an 
exceptionally  simple  structure,  which  made  it  possible 
in  a  simple  way  to  attach  an  order  number  to  each 
element  (given  on  p.  23).  On  the  basis  of  Bohr’s 
theory,  established  a  year  before,  it  could  be  directly 
proved  that  this  order  number  must  be  identical 
with  the  number  of  positive  elementary  charges  on 
the  nucleus. 

/ 

The  number  which  formerly  indicated  simply  the 
position  of  an  element  in  the  periodic  system  has  thus 
obtained  a  profound  physical  significance,  and  in  com¬ 
parison  the  atomic  weight  has  come  to  have  but  a  secon¬ 
dary  meaning.  The  inversion  of  argon  and  potassium 
in  the  periodic  system  (mentioned  on  p.  21),  which  seemed 
to  be  an  exception  to  the  regularity  displayed  by  the 
system  as  a  whole,  obtains  an  easy  explanation  on  the 
van  den  Broek  rule  ;  for  to  explain  the  inversion  we  need 
only  assume  that  potassium  has  one  electron  more  than 
argon,  though  its  atomic  weight  is  less  than  that  of  argon. 
We  see  at  once  that  the  atomic  weight  and  number  of 
electrons  (or  what  is  the  same  thing — the  nuclear 
charge)  are  not  directly  correlated  to  each  other. 


92  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

And  since  the  periodic  system  based  on  the  atomic 
number  represents  the  correct  arrangement  of  the 
elements  according  to  their  respective  properties  (es¬ 
pecially  their  chemical  properties),  we  are  led  natur¬ 
ally  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  the  atomic  number 
and  not  the  atomic  weight  that  determines  chemical 
characteristics. 

The  conception  of  the  relatively  great  importance  of 
the  atomic  number  as  compared  with  the  atomic  weight 
has  in  recent  years  received  overwhelming  support  from 
the  researches  of  Soddy,  Fajans,  Russell,  Hevesy  and 
others  who  have  discovered  the  existence  of  so-called 
isotope  elements  (from  the  Greek  isos=  same,  and  topos  = 
place),  substances  with  different  nuclear  masses  (atomic 
weights)  and  different  radioactive  properties  (if  there 
are  any),  but  with  the  same  nuclear  charge,  the  same 
number  of  electrons  and,  consequently,  occupying  the 
same  place  in  the  periodic  system.  Two  such  isotopes 
are  practically  equivalent  in  all  their  chemical  properties 
as  well  as  in  most  of  their  physical  characteristics.  One 
of  the  oldest  examples  of  isotopes  is  provided  by  ordinary 
lead  with  the  atomic  weight  207*2  and  the  substance 
found  in  pitchblende  with  the  atomic  weight  206,  but 
identical,  chemically,  with  ordinary  lead.  This  latter 
form  of  lead  has  already  been  referred  to  on  p.  79  as  the 
end  product  of  radioactive  disintegrations,  and  hence  it 
is  sometimes  called  radium  lead. 

By  his  investigations  of  canal  rays  the  English 
physicist  Aston  has  just  recently  shown  that  many 
substances  which  have  always  been  assumed  to  be  simple 
elements,  are  in  reality  mixtures  of  isotopes.  The 
atomic  weight  of  chlorine  determined  in  the  usual  way 
is  35*5,  but  in  the  discharge  tube  two  kinds  of  chlorine 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


93 


atoms  appear,  having  atomic  weights  35  and  37  respec¬ 
tively  ;  and  it  must  be  assumed  that  these  two  kinds  of 
chlorine  are  present  in  all  the  compounds  of  chlorine 
known  on  the  earth  in  the  ratio  of,  roughly,  three  to  one. 
To  separate  such  mixtures  into  their  constituent  parts  is 
extremely  difficult,  precisely  because  the  constituents 
have  identical  properties  apart  from  a  small  difference 
in  density,  which  stands  in  direct  connection  with  the 
atomic  weight.  Such  a  separation  was  first  carried  out 
successfully  by  the  Danish  chemist,  Br0nsted,  in  collabo¬ 
ration  with  the  Hungarian  chemist,  Hevesy  (1921). 
These  two  scientists  were  able  to  separate  a  large  quantity 
of  mercury  of  density  13*5955  into  two  portions  of  slightly 
different  densities.  All  the  different  isotopes  of  which 
mercury  is  a  mixture  were,  indeed,  not  wholly  separated  ; 
they  were  represented  in  the  two  portions  in  different 
proportions.  Thus,  in  one  of  the  first  attempts,  the 
density  of  the  one  part  was  13-5986  and  of  the  other 
13-5920  (at  o°  C). 

It  is  a  perfectly  reasonable  supposition  that  it  is 
the  electron  system  which  determines  the  external 
properties  of  the  atom,  that  is,  those  properties  which 
depend  on  the  interplay  of  two  or  more  atoms.  For 
the  electron,  rotating  about  the  nucleus  at  a  considerable 
distance,  separates,  so  to  speak,  the  nucleus  from  the 
surrounding  space,  and  must  therefore  be  assumed  to 
be  the  organ  which  connects  the  atom  with  the  rest  of 
the  universe.  One  might  also  expect  the  structure  of 
the  electron  system  to  depend  wholly  on  the  nuclear 
charge,  i.e.  on  the  atomic  number  and  not  on  the  mass  of 
the  nucleus,  since  it  is  the  nuclear  electrical  attraction 
which  holds  the  electrons  in  their  orbits  and  not  the 
relatively  insignificant  gravitational  attraction. 


94  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


It  thus  becomes  intelligible  that  the  properties  of 
the  elements  can  be  divided  into  two  sharply  defined 
classes,  namely :  (i)  properties  of  the  nucleus,  and 

(2)  properties  of  the  electron  system  in  the  atom. 
The  credit  for  first  recognizing  the  sharp  distinction 
between  these  two  classes,  a  distinction  fundamental 
for  a  detailed  study  of  the  atom,  is  due  to  Niels 
Bohr. 

The  properties  of  the  nucleus  determine— (a)  the 
radioactive  processes,  or  explosions  of  the  nucleus,  and 
related  processes ;  ( b )  collisions,  where  two  nuclei 

approach  extremely  near  to  each  other  ;  and  (c)  weight 
which,  as  mentioned  above,  stands  in  direct  connection 
with  atomic  weight.  The  properties  of  the  electron 
system  are,  on  the  other  hand,  the  determining  factors 
in  all  other  physical  and  chemical  activities,  and,  as 
has  been  stated,  are  functions,  we  may  say,  of  the 
atomic  number  of  the  given  element.  The  Bohr  theory 
may  be  said  to  concern  itself  with  the  chemical  and 
physical  properties  of  the  atom  with  the  exception  of 
those  which  have  to  do  with  the  nucleus.  We  shall 
consequently  devote  our  attention  in  the  next  chapters 
to  the  electron  system.  But  before  turning  to  this 
we  shall  dwell  a  little  further  upon  the  atomic 
nucleus. 


The  Structure  of  the  Nucleus. 

That  the  nucleus  is  not  an  elementary  indivisible 
particle  but  a  system  of  particles,  is  clearly  shown  by 
the  radioactive  processes  in  which  a-particles  and  f3- 
particles  (electrons)  are  shot  out  of  the  nuclei  of  radio¬ 
active  elements.  Bohr  was  the  first  to  see  clearly  that 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


95 


not  only  the  a-particles  emitted  in  such  cases  come 
from  the  nucleus,  but  that  the  |3-particles  also  have 
their  source  there.  There  is  now  no  doubt  that,  in 
addition  to  the  outer  electrons  of  the  atom,  which  are 
the  determining  factor  in  the  atomic  number,  there 
must  also  be,  in  the  radioactive  substances  at  any  rate, 
special  nuclear  electrons  which  lead  a  more  hidden 
existence  in  the  interior  of  the  nucleus.  One  can  easily 
understand  that  isotopes  may  result  as  products  of 
radioactive  disintegration.  For  example,  let  us  suppose 
that  a  nucleus  emits  first  an  os-particle  (i.e.  a  helium 
nucleus  with  two  positive  charges),  and  thereafter  sends 
out  two  electrons,  each  with  its  negative  charge,  in 
two  new  disintegrations.  The  nuclear  charge  in  the 
resultant  atom  will  then  obviously  be  the  same  as 
before,  because  the  loss  of  the  two  electrons  exactly 
neutralizes  that  of  the  a-particle.  -  But  the  atomic 
weight  will  be  diminished  by  four  units  (i.e.  the  weight 
of  the  helium  nucleus,  remembering  also  that  the 
electrons  have  but  very  negligible  masses).  Among 
the  radioactive  substances  are  recognized  many 
examples  of  isotope  elements,  with  atomic  weights 
differing  precisely  by  four.  The  radioactive  element 
uranium  is  the  element  with  the  greatest  atomic  weight 
(238),  and  atomic  number  (92),  and  consequently  with 
the  greatest  nuclear  charge.  Almost  all  the  other  radio¬ 
active  substances  are  those  with  high  atomic  numbers 
in  the  periodic  system.  The  cause  of  radioactivity 
must  be  sought  in  the  hypothesis  that  the  nuclei  of  the 
radioactive  elements  are  very  complicated  systems  with 
small  stability,  and  therefore  break  down  rather  easily 
into  less  complicated  and  more  stable  systems  with 
the  emission  of  some  of  their  constituent  particles  ; 


96  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

the  corpuscular  rays  thus  produced  possess  a  consider¬ 
able  amount  of  kinetic  energy. 

Accordingly,  by  analogy,  the  nuclei  of  the  non¬ 
radioactive  elements  may  be  assumed  to  be  composed 
of  nuclear  electrons  and  positive  particles  ;  hydrogen 
alone  excepted.  The  simplest  assumption  is  that  the 
hydrogen  nucleus  is  the  real  quantum  or  atom  of  positive 
electricity,  just  as  the  electron  is  the  atom  of  negative 
electricity.  On  this  theory  all  substances  are  built  up 
of  two  kinds  only  of  fundamental  particles,  namely, 
hydrogen  nuclei  and  electrons.  That  these  particles 
may  themselves  consist  of  constituent  parts  is,  of 
course,  an  open  possibility,  but  such  speculation  is 
beyond  our  experience  up  to  the  present.  In  every 
nucleus  there  are  more  positive  hydrogen  nuclei  than 
there  are  negative  electrons,  so  that  the  nucleus  has  a 
residual  positive  charge  of  a  magnitude  equal  to  the 
difference  between  the  number  of  hydrogen  nuclei  and 
nuclear  electrons. 

If  we  now  pass  from  hydrogen  which  has  the  atomic 
weight,  atomic  number  and  nuclear  charge  of  unity,  we 
next  encounter  helium  with  the  atomic  weight  4,  atomic 
number  and  nuclear  charge  2.  The  helium  nucleus 
should  therefore  consist  of  4  hydrogen  nuclei,  which 
would  together  account  for  the  atomic  weight  of  4. 
But  since  these  represent  4  positive  charges,  there  must 
also  be  present  in  the  nucleus  2  negative  electrons  to 
make  the  resultant  nuclear  charge  equal  to  2.  We 
could  indeed  hardly  conceive  of  a  system  composed  of 
4  positive  hydrogen  nuclei  alone  ;  for  the  forces  of 
repulsion  would  soon  drive  the  separate  parts  asunder. 
The  two  electrons  can,  so  to  speak,  serve  to  hold  the 
system  together.  Fig.  24  gives  a  rough  representation 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


97 


of  the  helium  atom.  It  must  be  carefully  noted  that 
the  picture  is  purely  schematic  and  the  distances 
arbitrary.  The  helium  nucleus,  composed  of  4  hydrogen 
nuclei  and  2  electrons,  seems  to  possess  extreme  stability, 
and  it  is  not  improbable  that  helium  nuclei  occur  as 
higher  units  in  the  structure  of  the  nuclei  of  not  only 
the  radioactive  substances  but  also  the  other  elements. 
We  shall  perhaps  be  very  near  the  truth  in  saying  that 
all  nuclei  are  built  up  of  combinations  of  hydrogen 
nuclei,  helium  nuclei  and  electrons. 

In  nitrogen,  with  the  atomic  weight  14  and  atomic 


Fig.  24. — Schematic  representation  of  a  helium  atom.  K,  nuclear 
system  with  four  hydrogen  nuclei  and  two  nuclear  electrons  ; 
E,  electrons  in  the  outer  electron  system. 

number  7,  the  nucleus  should  consist  of  14  hydrogen 
nuclei  (with  12  of  them  compounded,  perhaps,  into  3 
helium  nuclei)  and  7  nuclear  electrons,  reducing  the 
resultant  positive  nuclear  charge  from  14  to  7.  Uranium,  • 
with  atomic  number  92  and  atomic  weight  238,  should 
have  a  nucleus  composed  of  238  hydrogen  nuclei  and 
146  electrons,  and  so  on  for  the  others.  We  see  at  once 
that  the  conception  of  the  nucleus  here  propounded 
leads  us  back  to  the  old  hypothesis  of  Prout  (see  p.  15) 
that  all  atomic  weights  should  be  integral  multiples  of 
that  of  hydrogen.  This  hypothesis  apparently  dis- 
7 


98 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


agreed  with  atomic  weight  measurements,  but  the  isotope 
researches  have  vanquished  this  difficulty  ;  thus  it  has 
been  mentioned  before  that  chlorine  with  an  atomic 
weight  of  35*5  appears  to  be  a  mixture  of  isotopes 
with  atomic  weights  35  and  37,  and  other  cases  have  a 
similar  explanation.  Yet  the  rule  cannot  be  wholly 
and  completely  exact.  For,  in  the  first  place,  the  mass 
of  the  electrons  must  contribute  something,  though  this 
contribution  is  far  too  small  to  be  measured.  But 
there  is  also  a  second  matter  which  plays  a  part  here. 
This  is  the  law  enunciated  by  Einstein  in  his  relativity 
theory,  that  every  increase  or  decrease  in  the  energy  of  a 
body  is  correlated  with  an  increase  or  decrease  in  the 
mass  of  the  body,  proportional  to  the  energy  change. 
We  must,  therefore,  expect  that  the  masses  of  the 
various  atomic  nuclei  will  depend  not  only  on  the 
number  of  hydrogen  nuclei  (and  electrons),  but  also  on 
the  energy  represented  in  the  attractions  and  repulsions 
between  the  particles  of  the  system,  and  in  their  mutual 
motions,  or  the  energy  which  comes  into  play  in  the 
formation  and  disintegration  of  nuclear  systems.  This 
is  presumably  closely  connected,  although  in  a  way 
which  is  not  clearly  understood,  with  the  fact,  that  if 
the  atomic  weights  of  the  elements  are  to  come  out 
integers,  that  of  hydrogen  must  not  be  taken  as  1  but 
as  1*008 ;  that  is,  the  atomic  weight  unit  must  be 
chosen  a  little  smaller  than  the  atomic  weight  of  hydrogen 
(cf.  table,  p.  23). 

Transformation  of  Elements  and  Liberation  of  Atomic 
Energy. 

We  shall  now  treat  very  briefly  two  questions  which 
have  profoundly  interested  many  people,  because  they 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


99 


are  concerned  with  possible  practical  applications  of  our 
new  knowledge  of  atoms. 

The  first  question  is  this  :  Can  one  not,  from  this 
knowledge,  bring  about  the  transformation  of  one 
element  into  another  ?  In  answering  this,  it  can,  of 
course,  be  said  immediately  that  among  the  radio¬ 
active  substances  such  transformations  are  constantly 
taking  place  without  human  interference,  and  we  cer¬ 
tainly  have  no  right  to  state  offhand  that  it  will  be 
impossible  for  man  ever  to  bring  about  such  a  transfor¬ 
mation  artificially.  For  example,  if  we  could  succeed  in 
getting  one  hydrogen  nucleus  loose  from  the  nucleus  of 
mercury,  the  latter  would  thereby  be  changed  into  a 
gold  nucleus.  Such  a  thing  is  not  only  conceivable,  but 
in  the  last  few  years  it  has  become  a  reality,  though, 
to  be  sure,  not  with  the  substances  here  mentioned. 
In  1919  Rutherford,  by  bombarding  nitrogen  (N  =  i4) 
with  ct-particles,  was  able  to  knock  loose  some  hydro¬ 
gen  nuclei  from  the  nitrogen  nucleus ;  perhaps  he 
succeeded  thereby  in  changing  the  nitrogen  nuclei 
into  carbon  nuclei  (C  =  i2)  by  the  breaking  off  of  two 
hydrogen  nuclei  from  each  nitrogen  nucleus.  But  to 
disintegrate  very  few  nitrogen  nuclei,  Rutherford  had 
to  employ  a  formidable  bombardment  with  hundreds 
of  thousands  of  projectiles  (a-particles) ;  and  even  if  he 
had  ended  with  gold  instead  of  carbon,  this  would  have 
been,  from  the  economic  point  of  view,  a  very  foolish  way 
of  making  gold  ;  and  at  the  present  time  we  know  of  no 
other  artificial  method  for  the  transformation  of  elements. 
That  Rutherford’s  investigation  has,  in  any  case,  extra¬ 
ordinarily  great  interest  and  scientific  value  is  another 
matter. 

The  second  question  is  whether  one  cannot  liberate 


100  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

and  utilize  the  energy  latent  in  the  interior  of  the  atom. 
This  question,  which  was  suggested  in  the  first  instance 
by  the  discovery  of  radium,  has  recently  attracted  con¬ 
siderable  attention  because  of  reports  that,  according 
to  Einstein’s  relativity  theory,  one  gram  of  any  substance 
by  virtue  of  its  mass  alone  must  contain  a  quantity  of 
energy  equal  to  that  produced  by  the  burning  of  3000 
tons  of  coal.  The  meaning  of  this  statement  is  this  : 
it  has  already  been  mentioned  that  according  to  the 
relativity  theory  a  decrease  in  the  energy  of  a  body 
brings  about  a  decrease  in  its  mass  ]  it  is  immaterial  in 
what  form  the  energy  is  given  up,  whether  as  heat,  elastic 
oscillations,  or  the  like  ;  all  that  is  said  is,  that  to  a 
certain  decrease  in  mass,  will  correspond  a  perfectly 
definite  emission  of  energy  in  some  form.  If  we  now 
could  imagine  the  whole  mass  of  one  gram  of  a  substance 
to  be  “  destroyed  ”  (i.e.  caused  to  disappear  utterly  as  a 
physical  substance),  and  to  reappear  as  heat  energy,  for 
example,  then  we  could  compute  from  the  known  rela¬ 
tion  between  mass  and  energy,  that  the  heat  energy 
thus  brought  about  would  be  equivalent  to  that  ob¬ 
tained  by  the  burning  of  3000  tons  of  coal.  But  in 
order  that  all  this  energy  should  be  developed,  even 
the  hydrogen  nuclei  and  the  electrons  would  have  to  be 
“  destroyed,”  and  no  phenomenon  is  known,  support¬ 
ing  the  supposition  that  such  a  “  destruction  ”  of  the 
fundamental  particles  of  a  substance  is  possible,  or 
that  it  is  possible  to  transform  these  particles  into 
other  types  of  energy.  A  thought  like  this  must  rather 
be  stamped  as  fantasy,  the  origin  of  which  is  to  be 
found  in  a  misunderstanding  of  a  purely  scientific  mode 
of  expression. 

The  case  is  essentially  different  with  those  quantities 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


101 


of  energy  which  must  be  assumed  to  be  freed  or  absorbed 
in  the  transformation  of  one  nuclear  system  into  another, 
that  is,  in  elemental  transformations.  Though  these 
are  far  smaller  in  amount,  the  radioactive  processes 
indicate  that  they  are  not  wholly  to  be  despised.  For 
one  gram  of  radium  will  upon  complete  disintegration  to 
non-radioactive  material  give  off  as  much  energy  as  is 
equivalent  to  460  kg.  of  coal.  But  even  here  we  must 
confess  that  it  will  take  about  1700  years  for  only  half  of 
the  radium  to  be  transformed.  It  is  not  at  all  impossible 
that  other  elemental  transformations  might  lead  to 
just  as  great  energy  developments  as  appear  in  the 
disintegration  of  radioactive  substances.  Let  us  imagine 
that  four  hydrogen  nuclei,  which  together  have  a  mass  of 
4  =  1*008=4*032,  and  two  electrons  could  join  together 
to  form  a  helium  nucleus  with  atomic  weight  very 
close  to  4.  This  process  would  thus  result  in  a  loss  of 
mass  which  must  be  assumed  to  appear  in  another  form 
of  energy.  The  amount  of  energy  obtainable  in  this  way 
from  one  gram  of  hydrogen  would  be  considerably  more 
than  that  given  off  by  the  disintegration  of  one  gram  of 
radium. 

There  can  hardly  exist  any  doubt  that  in  nature  there 
occur  not  only  disintegrations,  but  also  (perhaps  in  the 
interior  of  the  stars)  building-up  processes  in  which 
compound  nuclei  result  from  simple  ones.  It  is  therefore 
natural  to  suppose  that  by  exerting  on  hydrogen  excep¬ 
tional  conditions  of  temperature,  pressure,  electrical 
changes,  etc.,  we  could  succeed  by  experiments  here  on 
earth  in  forming  helium  from  it  with  the  development 
of  considerable  energy.  But  at  the  same  time  it  is  very 
likely  that  even  under  favourable  circumstances  such  a 
process  would  take  place  with  very  great  slowness, 


102  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


because  the  formation  of  a  helium  nucleus  might  well 
be  a  very  infrequent  occurrence  ;  it  would  probably  be 
the  result  of  a  certain  succession  of  collisions  between 
hydrogen  nuclei  and  electrons,  a  combination  whose  prob¬ 
ability  of  occurrence  in  a  certain  number  of  collisions  is 
infinitely  less  than  the  probability  of  winning  the  largest 
prize  in  a  lottery  with  the  same  number  of  chances. 
Nature  has  time  enough  to  wait  for  “  wins,”  while  man¬ 
kind  unfortunately  has  not.  We  know  concerning  the 
disintegration  of  the  radioactive  substances  that  it  is  of 
the  character  here  indicated  ;  of  the  great  number  of 
atoms  to  be  found  in  a  very  small  mass  of  a  radioactive 
substance,  now  one  explodes  and  now  another.  But 
why  fortune  should  pick  out  one  particular  atom  is  as 
difficult  to  understand  as  why  in  a  lottery  one  particular 
number  should  prove  to  be  the  lucky  one  rather  than 
any  other.  Our  only  understanding  of  the  whole  matter 
rests  on  the  law  of  averages,  or  probability  as  we  may  call 
it.  We  know  that  of  a  billion  radium  atoms  (io12)  on 
the  average  thirteen  explode  every  second  ;  and  even  if 
in  any  single  collection  of  a  billion  a  few  more  or  a  few 
less  may  explode,  the  average  of  thirteen  per  second  per 
billion  will  always  be  maintained  in  dealing  with  larger 
and  larger  numbers  of  atoms,  as,  for  example,  with  a 
thousand  billion  or  a  million  billion.  For  other  radio¬ 
active  substances  we  get  wholly  different  averages  for 
the  number  of  atoms  disintegrating  per  second  ;  but  in 
no  case  are  we  able  to  penetrate  into  the  inner  character 
of  the  process  of  disintegration  itself.  And  what  holds 
true  of  the  radioactive  substances  will  also  hold  true 
probably  for  elemental  changes  of  all  kinds  ;  Rutherford 
with  his  hundreds  of  thousands  of  a-particle  projectiles 
was  able  to  make  sure  of  but  a  few  lucky  "  shots.”  The 


THE  NUCLEAR  ATOM 


103 


whole  matter  must  at  this  stage  be  looked  upon  as 

governed  wholly  by  chance. 

One  interested  in  speculating  on  what  would  happen 
if  it  were  possible  to  bring  about  artificially  a  trans¬ 
formation  of  elements  propagating  itself  from  atom 
to  atom  with  the  liberation  of  energy,  would  find 
food  for  serious  thought  in  the  fact  that  the  quantities 
of  energy  which  would  be  liberated  in  this  way  would 
be  many,  many  times  greater  than  those  which  we 
now  know  of  in  connection  with  chemical  processes. 
There  is  then  offered  the  possibility  of  explosions  more 
extensive  and  more  violent  than  any  which  the  mind 
can  now  conceive.  The  idea  has  been  suggested  that 
the  world  catastrophes  represented  in  the  heavens  by 
the  sudden  appearance  of  very  bright  stars  may  be  the 
result  of  such  a  release  of  sub-atomic  energy,  brought 
about  perhaps  by  the  “  super- wisdom  of  the  unlucky 
inhabitants  themselves.  But  this  is,  of  course,  mere 
fanciful  conjecture. 

It  seems  clear,  however,  that  we  need  have  no  fear 
that  in  investigating  the  problem  of  atomic  energy 
we  are  releasing  forces  which  we  cannot  control,  because 
we  can  at  present  see  no  way  to  liberate  the  energy  of 
atomic  nuclei  beyond  that  which  Nature  herself  provides, 
to  say  nothing  of  a  practical  solution  of  the  energy 
problem.  The  time  has  certainly  not  yet  come  for  the 
technician  to  follow  in  the  theoretical  investigator’s 
footsteps  in  this  branch  of  science.  One  hesitates, 
however,  to  predict  what  the  future  may  bring 
forth. 

Interesting  and  significant  as  is  the  insight  which 
Rutherford  and  others  have  opened  up  into  the  inner 
workings  of  the  nucleus,  the  study  of  the  electron 


104  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


system  of  the  atom  bears  more  intimately  upon  the 
various  branches  of  physical  and  chemical  science, 
and  hence  presents  greater  possibilities  of  attaining, 
in  a  less  remote  future,  to  discoveries  of  practical 
significance. 


CHAPTER  V 


THE  BOHR  THEORY  OF  THE  HYDROGEN 

SPECTRUM 

The  Nuclear  Atom  and  Electrodynamics. 

Even  if  Rutherford  had  not  yet  succeeded  in  giving 
a  complete  answer  to  the  first  of  the  questions  pro¬ 
pounded  in  the  previous  chapter,  namely,  that  concerning 
the  positions  of  the  positive  and  negative  particles  of  the 
atom,  one  might  at  any  rate  hope  that  his  general 
explanation  of  the  structure  of  the  atom — that  is,  the 
division  into  the  nucleus  and  surrounding  electrons, 
and  the  determination  of  the  number  of  electrons  in 
the  atoms  of  the  various  elements — would  furnish  a 
good  foundation  for  the  answer  to  the  second  question 
about  the  connection  between  the  atomic  processes 
and  the  physical  and  chemical  properties  of  matter. 
But  in  the  beginning  this  seemed  so  far  from  being  true 
that  it  appeared  almost  hopeless  to  find  a  solution  of 
the  problem  of  the  atom  in  this  way. 

We  shall  best  understand  the  meaning  of  this  if  we 
consider  the  simplest  of  the  elemental  atoms,  namely, 
the  atom  of  hydrogen  with  its  positive  nucleus  and  its 
one  electron  revolving  about  the  nucleus.  How  could 
it  be  possible  to  explain  from  such  a  simple  structure 
the  many  sharp  spectral  lines  given  by  the  Balmer- 

105 


106  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

Ritz  formula  (p.  57)  ?  As  has  previously  been  men¬ 
tioned,  the  classical  electron  theory  seemed  to  demand 
a  very  complicated  atomic  structure  for  the  explanation 
of  these  lines.  According  to  the  electron  theory,  the 
atoms  may  be  likened  to  stringed  instruments  which 
are  capable  of  emitting  a  great  number  of  tones,  and 
in  these  atoms  the  electrons  are  naturally  supposed  to 
correspond  to  the  “  strings.”  But  the  hydrogen  atom 
has  only  one  electron,  and  it  hardly  seems  credible 
that  in  a  mass  of  hydrogen  the  individual  atoms  would 
be  tuned  for  different  “  tones,”  with  definite  frequencies 
of  vibration. 

Now,  it  certainly  cannot  be  concluded  from  the 
analogy  with  the  stringed  instrument  that  a  single 
electron  can  emit  light  of  only  a  single  frequency  at 
one  time,  corresponding  to  a  single  spectral  line.  For  a 
plucked  string  will,  as  we  know,  give  rise  to  a  simple 
tone  only  if  it  vibrates  in  a  very  definite  and  particu¬ 
larly  simple  way  ;  in  general  it  will  emit  a  compound 
sound  which  may  be  conceived  as  made  up  of  a  “  funda¬ 
mental  ”  and  its  so-called  “  overtones,”  or  "  harmonies  ” 
whose  frequencies  are  2,  3,  .  .  .  times  that  of  the  funda¬ 
mental  ( i.e .  integral  multiples  of  the  latter).  These 
overtones  may  arise  even  separately  because  the  string, 
instead  of  vibrating  as  a  whole,  may  be  divided  into 
2,  3,  .  .  .  equally  long  vibrating  parts,  giving  respec¬ 
tively  2,  3,  .  .  .  times  as  great  frequencies  of  vibration. 
We  call  such  vibrations  “  harmonic  oscillations.”  The 
simultaneous  existence  of  these  different  modes  of 
oscillation  of  the  string  may  be  thought  of  in  the  same 
way  as  the  simultaneous  existence  of  wave  systems  of 
different  wave-lengths  on  the  surface  of  water.  Corre¬ 
sponding  to  the  possibility  of  resolving  the  motion 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  107 

of  the  string  into  its  “  harmonic  components,”  the 
compound  sound  waves  produced  by  the  string  can 
be  resolved  by  resonators  (cf.  p.  44)  into  tones  possessing 
the  frequencies  of  these  components. 

According  to  the  laws  of  electrodynamics  the  situa¬ 
tion  with  the  electron  revolving  about  the  hydrogen 
nucleus  might  -be  expected  to  be  somewhat  similar  to 
that  described  above  in  connection  with  the  vibrating 
string.  If  the  orbit  of  the  electron  were  a  circle,  it 
should  emit  into  the  ether  electro-magnetic  waves  of  a 
single  definite  wave-length  and  corresponding  frequency, 
v,  equal  to  co,  the  frequency  of  rotation  of  the  electron 
in  its  orbit  ;  that  is,  the  number  of  revolutions  per 
second.  But  just  as  a  planet  under  the  attraction  of 
the  sun,  varying  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance, 
moves  in  an  ellipse  with  the  sun  at  one  focus,  so  the 
electron,  under  the  attraction  of  the  positive  nucleus, 
which  also  follows  the  inverse  square  law,  will  in  general 
be  able  to  move  in  an  ellipse  with  the  nucleus  at  one 
focus.  The  electromagnetic  waves  which  are  emitted 
from  such  a  moving  electron  may  on  the  electron  theory 
be  considered  as  composed  of  light  waves  corresponding 
to  a  series  of  harmonic  oscillations  with  the  frequencies  : 

vx=co,  v2=2co,  v3=3sy  .  .  .  and  so  on, 

where  co,  as  before,  is  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the 
electron.  According  as  the  actual  orbit  deviates  more 
or  less  from  a  circle,  the  frequencies  v2,  ^3  •  •  • 
appear  stronger  or  weaker  in  the  compound  light  waves 
emitted.  But  the  actual  distribution  of  spectral  lines 
in  the  real  hydrogen  spectrum  presents  no  likeness 
whatever  to  this  distribution  of  frequencies. 

From  this  it  is  evident  that  no  agreement  can  be 


108  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


reached  between  the  classical  electron  theory  on  the  one 
hand  and  the  Rutherford  atom  model  on  the  other. 
Indeed,  the  disagreement  between  the  two  is  really  far 
more  fundamental  than  has  just  been  indicated.  Ac¬ 
cording  to  Lorentz’s  explanation  of  the  emission  of  light 
waves,  the  electrons  in  a  substance  (see  again  p.  75) 
should  have  certain  equilibrium  positions,  and  should 
oscillate  about  these  when  pushed  out  of  them  by  some 
external  impulse.  The  energy  which  is  given  to  the 
electron  by  such  an  impulse  is  expended  in  the  emission 
of  the  light  waves  and  is  thus  transformed  into  radiation 
energy  in  the  emitted  light,  while  the  electrons  fall  to 
rest  again  unless  they  receive  in  the  meantime  a  new 
impulse.  We  can  get  an  understanding  of  what  these 
impulses  in  various  cases  may  be  by  thinking  of  them, 
in  the  case  of  a  glowing  solid,  for  example,  as  due  to  the 
collisions  of  the  molecules  ;  or  in  the  case  of  the  glowing 
gas  in  a  discharge  tube,  from  the  collisions  of  electrons 
and  ions.  The  oscillating  system  represented  by  the 
electron  (the  “  oscillator  ”)  will  possess  under  these 
circumstances  great  analogy  with  a  string  which  after 
being  set  into  vibration  by  a  stroke  gradually  comes  back 
to  rest,  while  the  energy  expended  in  the  stroke  is  emitted 
in  the  form  of  sound  waves.  Although  the  vibrations 
of  the  string  become  weaker  after  a  while,  the  period  of 
the  vibrations  will  remain  unchanged ;  the  string 
vibrations  like  pendulum  oscillations  have  an  invariable 
period,  and  the  same  will  be  the  case  with  the  frequency 
of  the  electron  if  the  force  which  pulls  it  back  into  its 
equilibrium  position  is  directly  proportional  to  the  dis¬ 
placement  from  this  position  (the  “  harmonic  motion  ” 
force). 

Rutherford’s  atomic  model  is,  however,  a  system  of  a 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  109 

kind  wholly  different  from  the  “oscillator”  of  the 
electron  theory.  The  one  revolving  hydrogen  electron 
will  find  a  position  of  “  rest  ”  or  equilibrium  only  in  the 
nucleus  itself,  and  if  it  once  becomes  united  with  the 
latter  it  will  not  easily  escape  ;  it  will  then  probably 
become  a  nuclear  electron,  and  such  a  process  would  be 
nothing  less  than  a  transformation  of  elements  (see  p.  79). 
On  the  other  hand,  it  follows  necessarily  from  the  funda¬ 
mental  laws  of  electrodynamics  that  the  revolving 
electron  must  emit  radiation  energy,  and,  because  of 
the  resultant  loss  of  energy,  must  gradually  shrink  its 
path  and  approach  nearer  the  nucleus.  But  since  the 
nuclear  attraction  on  the  electron  is  inversely  propor¬ 
tional  to  the  square  of  the  distance,  the  period  of  revolu¬ 
tion  will  be  gradually  decreased  and  hence  the  frequency 
of  revolution  a,  and  the  frequency  of  the  emitted  fight 
will  gradually  increase.  The  spectral  fines  emitted  from 
a  great  number  of  atoms  should,  accordingly,  be  distri¬ 
buted  evenly  from  the  red  end  of  the  spectrum  to  the 
violet,  or  in  other  words  there  should  be  no  fine  spectrum 
at  all.  It  is  thus  clear  that  Rutherford’s  model  was  not 
only  unable  to  account  for  the  number  and  distribution 
of  the  spectral  fines  ;  but  that  with  the  application  of  the 
ordinary  electrodynamic  laws  it  was  quite  impossible 
to  account  for  the  existence  even  of  spectral  fines. 
Indeed,  it  had  to  be  admitted  that  an  electrodynamic 
system  of  the  kind  indicated  was  mechanically  unstable 
and  therefore  an  impossible  system  ;  and  this  would 
aPPly  n°t  merely  to  the  hydrogen  atom,  but  to  all 
nuclear  atoms  with  positive  nuclei  and  systems  of 
revolving  electrons. 

However  one  looks  at  the  matter,  there  thus  appears 
to  be  an  irremediable  disagreement  between  the  Ruther- 


110  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

ford  theory  of  atomic  structure  and  the  fundamental 
electrodynamic  assumptions  of  Lorentz’s  theory  of 
electrons.  As  has  been  emphasized,  however,  Ruther¬ 
ford  founded  his  atomic  model  on  such  a  direct  and  clear- 
cut  investigation  that  any  other  interpretation  of  his 
experiments  is  hardly  possible.  If  the  result  to  which 
he  attained  could  not  be  reconciled  with  the  theory  of 
electrodynamics,  then,  as  has  been  said,  this  was  so 
much  the  worse  for  the  theory. 

It  could,  however,  hardly  be  expected  that  physicists 
in  general  would  be  very  willing  to  give  up  the  conceptions 
of  electrodynamics,  even  if  its  basis  was  being  seriously 
damaged  by  Rutherford’s  atomic  projectiles.  Sur¬ 
mounted  by  its  crowning  glory — the  Lorentz  electron 
theory — the  classical  electrodynamics  stood  at  the 
beginning  of  the  present  century  a  structure  both  solid 
and  spacious,  uniting  in  its  construction  nearly  all  the 
physical  knowledge  accumulated  during  the  centuries, 
optics  as  well  as  electricity,  thermodynamics  as  well  as 
mechanics.  With  the  collapse  of  such  a  structure  one 
might  well  feel  that  physics  had  suddenly  become  home¬ 
less. 

The  Quantum  Theory. 

In  a  field  completely  different  from  the  above  the  ^ 
conclusion  had  also  been  reached  that  there  was  some-  * 
thing  wrong  with  the  classical  electrodynamics. 
Through  his  very  extended  speculations  on  thermo¬ 
dynamic  equilibrium  in  the  radiation  process,  Planck 
(1900)  had  reached  the  point  of  view  expressed  in  his 
quantum  theory,  which  was  just  as  irreconcilable  with  the 
fundamental  electro  dynamic  laws  as  the  Rutherford 
atom. 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  111 


A  complete  representation  of  this  theory  would  lead 
us  too  far ;  we  shall  merely  give  a  short  account  of  the 
foundations  on  which  it  rests. 

By  a  black  body  is  generally  understood  a  body  which 
absorbs  all  the  light  falling  upon  it,  and,  accordingly,  can 
reflect  none.  Physicists,  however,  denote  by  the  term 
“  perfect  black  body  ”  in  an  extended  sense,  a  body  which 
at  all  temperatures  absorbs  all  the  radiation  falling  upon 
it,  whether  this  be  in  the  form  of  visible  light,  or  ultra¬ 
violet,  or  infra-red  radiation.  From  considerations  which 
were  developed  some  sixty  years  ago  by  Kirchhoff,  it 
can  be  stated  that  the  radiation  which  is  emitted  by  such 
a  body  when  heated  does  not  depend  on  the  nature  of 
the  body  but  merely  on  its  temperature,  and  that  it  is 
greater  than  that  emitted  by  any  other  body  whatever 
at  the  same  temperature.  Such  radiation  is  called  tem¬ 
perature  radiation  or  sometimes  “  black  ”  radiation, 
though  the  latter  term  is  apt  to  be  misleading,  since  a 
"  perfect  black  body  ”  emitting  black  radiation  may 
glow  at  white  heat.  It  may  be  of  interest  to  note  here 
the  fundamental  law  deduced  by  Kirchhoff,  which  may 
best  be  illustrated  by  saying  that  good  absorbers  of 
radiation  are  also  good  radiators.  An  instructive  experi¬ 
ment  illustrating  this  is  performed  by  painting  a  figure  in 
lampblack  on  a  piece  of  white  porcelain.  The  lampblack 
surface  is  clearly  a  better  absorber  of  radiant  energy 
than  the  white  porcelain.  When  the  whole  is  heated  in 
a  blast  flame,  the  lampblack  figure  glows  much  more 
brightly  than  the  surrounding  porcelain,  thus  showing 
that  at  the  same  temperature  it  is  also  the  better  radiator. 
Following  the  same  law  we  conclude  that  highly  reflecting 
bodies  are  not  good  radiators,  a  fact  that  has  practical 
significance  in  house  heating.  The  perfect  black  body, 


112  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


then,  being  the  best  absorber  of  radiation,  is  also  the 
best  radiator. 

In  actual  practice  no  body  is  absolutely  black.  Even 
a  body  coated  with  lampblack  reflects  about  io  per  cent, 
of  the  light  waves  incident  on  it.  The  Danish  physicist 
Christiansen  remarked  long  ago  that  a  real  black  body 
could  be  produced  only  if  an  arrangement  could  be  made 
whereby  the  incident  waves  could  be  reflected  several 
times  in  succession  before  finally  being  emitted.  To  take 
the  case  of  lampblack,  three  such  reflections  would  reduce 
the  re-emission  from  the  lampblacked  body  to  only  i  / 1000 
of  the  radiation  initially  falling  on  it.  This  type  of 
black  body  was  finally  realized  by  making  a  cavity  in  an 
oven  having  as  its  only  opening  a  very  small  peep-hole, 
and  keeping  the  temperature  of  the  wall  of  the  oven 
uniform.  If  a  ray  is  sent  into  the  cavity  through  the 
peep-hole,  it  will  become,  so  to  speak,  captured,  because, 
when  once  inside  it  will  suffer  countless  reflections  from 
the  walls  of  the  cavity,  having  more  and  more  of  its 
energy  absorbed  at  each  reflection.  Very  little  of  the 
radiation  thus  entering  will  ever  get  out  again,  and  con¬ 
sequently  such  a  body  will  act  very  much  like  a  “  perfect 
black  body  ”  according  to  the  theoretical  definition  above. 
Accordingly,  the  radiation  which  is  emitted  from  such  a 
glowing  cavity  through  the  peep-hole  will  be  black  or 
practically  black  radiation. 

The  cavity  itself  will  be  criss-crossed  in  all  directions 
by  radiation  emitted  from  one  part  of  the  inner  surface 
of  the  cavity  and  absorbed  by  (and  partially  reflected 
from)  other  parts  of  the  surface.  When  the  walls  of 
the  cavity  are  kept  at  a  fixed  and  uniform  tempera¬ 
ture  there  will  automatically  be  produced  a  state 
of  equilibrium  in  which  every  cubic  centimetre  of  the 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  113 


cavity  will  contain  a  definite  quantity  of  radiation 
energy,  dependent  only  on  the  temperature  of  the  walls. 
Further,  in  the  equilibrium  state  the  radiation  energy  will 
be  distributed  in  a  perfectly  definite  way  (dependent  as 
before  on  the  temperature  only)  among  the  various  types 
of  radiation  corresponding  to  different  wave-lengths  and 
frequencies.  If  there  is  too  much  radiation  of  one  kind 
and  too  little  of  another,  the  walls  of  the  cavity  will 
absorb  more  of  the  first  kind  than  they  emit,  and  emit 
more  of  the  second  kind  than  they  absorb,  and  so  the 
state  will  vary  until  the  right  proportion  for  equilibrium 
is  attained. 

This  distribution  of  the  radiation  over  widely  differing 
wave-lengths  can  be  investigated  by  examining  spectro¬ 
scopically  the  light  emitted  from  the  peep-hole  in  the 
cavity.  Then,  by  means  of  a  bolometer  or  some  other 
instrument,  the  heat  development  in  the  different  portions 
of  the  spectrum  can  be  measured.  At  a  temperature  of 
1500°  C.,  for  example,  one  will  find  that  the  maximum 
energy  is  represented  for  rays  of  wave-length  in  the  close 
vicinity  of  i-8  fjb,  i.e.  in  the  extreme  infra-red.  If  the 
temperature  is  raised,  the  energy  maximum  travels  off 
in  the  direction  of  the  violet  end  of  the  spectrum  ;  if  the 
temperature  is  lowered,  it  will  move  farther  down  into  the 
infra-red. 

It  is  also  possible  to  make  a  theoretical  calculation 
of  the  distribution  of  energy  in  the  spectrum  of  the  black- 
body  radiation  at  a  given  temperature.  But  the  results 
obtained  do  not  agree  with  experiment.  The  English 
physicists,  Rayleigh  and  Jeans,  developed  on  the  basis 
of  the  classical  electro-dynamic  laws  and  by  apparently 
convincing  arguments  a  distribution  law  according  to 
which  actual  radiation  equilibrium  becomes  impossible, 
8 


114  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


since  if  it  were  true  the  energy  in  the  radiation  would 
tend  more  and  more  to  go  over  to  the  region  of  short 
wave-lengths  and  high  frequencies,  and  this  shifting 
would  apparently  go  on  indefinitely.  The  theory  thus 
leads  to  results  which  are  not  only  in  disagreement  with 
experiment,  but  which  must  be  looked  upon  as  extremely 
unreasonable  in  themselves. 

Planck,  however,  had  vanquished  these  difficulties 
and  had  obtained  a  radiation  law  in  agreement  with 
experiment  by  introducing  an  extremely  curious  hypo¬ 
thesis.  Like  Lorentz,  he  thought  of  radiation  as  pro¬ 
duced  through  the  medium  of  small  vibrating  systems  or 
oscillators,  which  could  emit  or  absorb  rays  of  a  definite 
frequency  v.  But  while,  according  to  the  Lorentz  theory 
and  the  classical  electrodynamics,  radiation  can  be 
emitted  in  infinitely  small  quantities  ( i.e .  small  without 
limit),  Planck  assumed  that  an  oscillator  can  emit  and 
absorb  energy  only  in  certain  definite  quantities  called 
quanta ,  where  the  fundamental  quantum  of  radiation  is 
dependent  on  the  frequency  of  the  oscillator,  varying 
directly  with  the  latter.  If  thus  we  denote  the  smallest 
quantity  of  energy  which  an  oscillator  of  frequency 
v  can  emit  or  absorb  by  E,  then  we  can  write 

~E=hv, 

where  h  is  a  definite  constant  fixed  for  all  frequencies. 
Accordingly  the  cavity  can  receive  radiation  energy  of 
frequency  v  from  the  radiating  oscillators  in  its  wall,  or 
transfer  energy  to  these  in  no  smaller  quantity  than  hv. 
The  total  energy  of  that  kind  emitted  or  absorbed  at 
any  given  time  will  always  be  an  integral  multiple  of  hv. 
Oscillators  with  a  frequency  ij  times  as  great  will  emit 
energy  in  quanta  which  are  times  larger,  and  so  on. 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  115 


The  quantity  h  is  independent,  not  only  of  the  wave¬ 
length,  but  also  of  the  temperature  and  nature  of  the 
emitting  body.  This  constant,  the  so-called  Planck 
constant ,  is  thus  a  universal  constant.  If  one  uses  the 
“  absolute  ”  units  of  length,  mass  and  time  (see  table, 
p.  210),  its  value  comes  out  as  6*54  xio-27.  For  the 
frequency  750  X  io12  vibrations  per  second,  corresponding 
to  the  extreme  violet  in  the  visible  spectrum,  the  Planck 
energy  quantum  thus  becomes  about  5  X  io-12  erg,  or 
3-69 Xio-19  foot-pounds  (note  that  the  “  erg  ”  is  the 
“  absolute  ”  unit  of  work,  or  the  amount  of  work  done 
when  a  body  is  moved  through  a  distance  of  1  cm.  by  a 
force  of  one  dyne  acting  in  the  direction  of  the  motion, 
while  the  “  foot-pound  ”  is  the  work  done  when  a  force 
of  1  pound  moves  a  body  1  foot  in  the  direction  of  the 
force).  For  light  belonging  to  the  red  end  of  the 
spectrum,  the  energy  is  about  half  as  great.  If  we  pass, 
however,  to  the  highest  frequencies  and  the  shortest 
wave-lengths  which  are  known,  namely  those  corre¬ 
sponding  to  the  “  hardest  ”  (i.e.  most  penetrating) 
y-rays  (see  p.  78),  we  meet  with  energy  quanta  which 
are  a  million  times  larger,  i.e.  2  Xio~6  erg,  although  they 
are  still  very  small  compared  to  any  amount  of  energy 
measurable  mechanically. 

This  remarkable  theory  of  quanta,  which  in  the 
hands  of  Planck  still  possessed  a  rather  abstract  character, 
proved  under  Einstein’s  ingenious  treatment  to  have  the 
greatest  significance  in  many  problems  which,  like  heat 
radiation,  had  provided  physicists  with  many  difficulties. 
For  by  assuming  that  energy  in  general  could  only  be 
given  up  and  taken  in  in  quanta,  certain  facts  about  the 
specific  heats  of  bodies  could  be  accounted  for — facts 
which  the  older  physics  had  proved  powerless  to  explain. 


116  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


The  Planck  energy  quanta,  as  Einstein  showed,  could  also 
explain  in  a  very  direct  and  satisfactory  way  the  photo¬ 
electric  effect ,  as  it  is  called.  This  effect  consists  in  the 
freeing  of  electrons  from  a  metal  plate  which  ultra¬ 
violet  rays  are  allowed  to  strike.  The  maximum  velocity 
with  which  these  electrons  are  propelled  from  the  plate 
is  found  to  be  independent  of  the  intensity  of  the  incident 
light,  but  dependent  simply  on  the  frequency  of  the  radia¬ 
tion.  Careful  measurements  have  indeed  shown,  as 
Einstein  predicted,  that  the  incident  light  really  does 
utilize  an  energy  quantum  hv  to  free  each  electron  and 
give  it  velocity  (cf.  p.  172).  Of  the  different  methods 
which  nowadays  are  at  hand,  the  photoelectric  effect 
constitutes  one  of  the  best  means  of  determining  the  value 
of  h.  It  has  been  applied  for  that  purpose  by  Millikan, 
to  whose  ingenious  experiments  the  most  accurate  direct 
determination  of  h  is  actually  due. 

All  this  lay  completely  outside  the  laws  of  electro¬ 
dynamics,  and  pointed  to  the  existence  of  unknown 
and  more  fundamental  laws.  But,  for  the  time  being, 
physicists  had  to  be  satisfied  merely  with  a  recognition 
of  the  fact  that  these  mysterious  energy  quanta  play  a 
very  significant  part  in  many  phenomena. 

A  decade  ago  physics,  as  regards  radiation  problems, 
was  in  a  very  unsettled  state ;  with  four  separate 
branches  of  knowledge,  each  of  which  seemed  firm  and 
well-founded  enough  in  itself,  but  which  had  no  common 
connecting  fink,  indeed,  were  even  to  some  extent 
inconsistent  with  each  other.  The  first  of  these  was 
the  classical  electrodynamics  surmounted  by  the 
felicitous  electron  theory  of  Lorentz  and  Larmor.  The 
second  was  the  empirical  knowledge  of  the  spectra 
resting  on  the  work  of  Balmer,  Ritz  and  Rydberg. 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  117 


The  third  was  Rutherford’s  nuclear  atom  model.  And 
the  fourth  was  Planck’s  quantum  theory  of  heat  radia¬ 
tion.  It  was  quite  evident  that  progress  in  the  theory 
of  radiation  and  the  structure  of  the  atom  was  hope¬ 
less  as  long  as  these  four  points  of  view  remained  un- 
correlated. 

Main  Outlines  of  the  Bohr  Theory. 

Such  was  the  situation  when,  in  1913,  Bohr  published 
his  atomic  theory,  in  which  he  was  able  with  great 
ingenuity  to  unite  the  nuclear  atom,  the  Balmer-Ritz 
formula  and  the  quantum  theory.  As  far  as  electro¬ 
dynamics  is  concerned,  the  impossibility  of  retaining 
that  in  its  classical  form  was  presented  in  a  much  clearer 
way  than  ever  before.  But,  as  will  presently  be  evident, 
the  Bohr  theory  has  a  very  definite  connection  with 
the  classical  theory,  and  Bohr’s  attempts  to  preserve 
and  develop  this  connection  have  proved  to  be  of  the 
greatest  significance  for  his  theory.  In  spite  of  the 
fundamental  rupture  with  the  old  ideas,  the  Bohr 
theory  strives  to  absorb  all  that  is  useful  in  the  classical 
point  of  view. 

At  the  head  of  the  theory  appear  the  two  funda¬ 
mental  hypotheses  or  postulates  on  the  properties  of 
the  atom. 

The  first  postulate  states  that  for  each  atom  or  atomic 
system  there  exists  a  number  of  definite  states  of  motion , 
called  “  stationary  states,”  in  which  the  atom  {or  atomic 
system)  can  exist  without  radiating  energy.  A  finite 
change  in  the  energy  content  of  the  atom  can  take  place 
only  in  a  process  in  which  the  atom  passes  completely 
from  one  stationary  state  to  another. 

The  second  postulate  states  that  if  such  a  transition 


118  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


takes  place  with  the  emission  or  absorption  of  electro¬ 
magnetic  light  waves,  these  waves  will  have  a  definite 
frequency,  the  magnitude  of  which  is  determined  by  the 
change  in  the  energy  content  of  the  atom.  If  we  denote 
the  change  in  energy  by  E  and  the  frequency  by  v  we  may 
write 

E  =hv,  or  y=5 
h 

where  h  is  the  Planck  constant.  In  consequence  of  the 
second  postulate  the  emission  as  well  as  the  absorption  of 
energy  by  the  atom  always  takes  place  in  quanta. 

The  two  postulates  say  nothing  concerning  the  nature 
of  the  motion  in  the  stationary  states.  In  the  applica¬ 
tions,  however,  a  connection  with  the  Rutherford 
atomic  model  is  established.  Confining  our  attention 
first  to  the  hydrogen  atom,  the  system  with  which  we 
are  concerned  consists,  accordingly,  of  a  positive  nucleus 
and  one  electron  revolving  about  it.  The  various  states 
of  motion  which  the  electron  can  assume  in  virtue  of 
the  first  postulate  are  a  series  of  orbits  at  different 
distances  from  the  nucleus.  In  each  of  these  “  stationary 
orbits  ”  the  electron  follows  the  general  mechanical  laws 
of  motion  ;  i.e.  under  the  nuclear  attraction  which  is 
inversely  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  distance, 
the  electron  describes  an  ellipse  with  the  nucleus  at 
one  focus,  as  has  previously  been  stated  ;  but  in  contradic¬ 
tion  with  the  classical  electrodynamics  it  will  emit  no 
radiation  while  moving  in  this  orbit.  Fig.  25  shows  a 
series  of  these  orbits,  to  which  the  numbers  1,  2,  3,  4 
have  been  attached,  and  which  for  simplicity  are  repre¬ 
sented  as  circular. 

If  the  electron  passes  from  an  outer  orbit  to  an  inner 
one  ;  for  example,  if  it  goes  from  number  4  to  number  2, 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  119 


or  from  number  2  to  number  I,  the  electric  force  which 
attracts  it  to  the  nucleus  will  do  work  just  as  the  force 
of  gravity  does  work  when  a  stone  falls  to  the  ground. 

A  part  of  this  work  is  used  to  increase  the  kinetic  energy 
of  the  electron,  making  its  velocity  in  the  inner  orbit 
greater  than  in  the  outer,  but  the  rest  of  the  work 
is  transformed  into  radiation  energy  which  is  emitted 
from  the  atom  in  the  form  of  monochromatic  light.  1 


Fig.  25. — The  Bohr  model  of  the  hydrogen 
atom  in  the  simplified  form  (with 
circles  instead  of  ellipses) . 


In  consequence  of  the  second  postulate  the  frequency 
of  the  emitted  radiation  is  proportional  to  the  energy 
loss.  When  the  electron  has  reached  the  innermost 
orbit  (the  one  denoted  by  1  in  the  figure),  it  cannot  get 
any  nearer  the  nucleus  and  hence  cannot  emit  any  more 
radiation  unless  it  first  is  impelled  to  pass  from  its  inner 
orbit  to  an  outer  orbit  again  by  the  absorption  of  external 
energy  sufficient  to  bring  about  this  change.  Once  in 
the  outer  orbit  again,  it  is  in  a  state  to  produce  radiation 
by  falling  in  a  second  time.  The  innermost  orbit 


120  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


represents  thus  the  electron's  equilibrium  state,  and 
corresponds  to  the  normal  state  of  the  atom. 

If  we  try  to  illustrate  the  matter  with  an  analogy 
from  the  theory  of  sound,  we  can  do  so  by  comparing 
the  atom  not  with  a  stringed  instrument,  but  with  a 
hypothetical  musical  instrument  of  a  wholly  different 
kind.  Let  us  imagine  that  we  have  placed  one  over 
another  and  concentrically  a  series  of  circular  discs  of 
progressively  smaller  radii,  and  let  us  suppose 'that  a 
small  sphere  can  move  around  any  one  of  these  without 
friction  and  without  emitting  sound.  In  such  a  motion 
the  system  may  be  said  to  be  in  a  “  stationary  state." 
Sooner  or  later  the  sphere  may  fall  from  the  first  disc 
on  to  one  lower  down  and  continue  to  roll  around  on 
the  second,  having  emitted  a  sound,  let  us  assume,  by 
its  fall.  By  passing  thus  from  one  stationary  state  to 
another  it  loses  a  quantity  of  energy  equal  to  the  work 
which  would  be  necessary  to  raise  it  again  to  the  disc 
previously  occupied,  and  to  bring  it  back  to  the  original 
state  of  motion.  We  can  assume  that  the  energy  which 
is  lost  in  the  fall  reappears  in  a  sound  wave  emitted  by 
the  instrument,  and  that  the  pitch  of  the  sound  emitted 
is  proportional  to  the  energy  sent  out.  If,  moreover, 
we  imagine  that  the  lowermost  disc  is  grooved  in 
such  a  way  that  the  sphere  cannot  fall  farther, 
then  this  fanciful  instrument  can  provide  a  very 
rough  analogy  with  the  Bohr  atom.  We  must  beware, 
however,  of  stretching  the  analogy  farther  than  is 
here  indicated. 

It  must  be  specially  emphasized  here  that  the  fre¬ 
quency  of  the  sound  emitted  in  the  above  example  has 
no  connection  with  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the 
sphere.  In  the  Bohr  atom,  likewise,  the  frequency  of 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  121 


revolution  oo  of  the  electron  in  its  stationary  orbit  has 
no  direct  connection  with  the  frequency  of  the  radiation 
emitted  when  the  electron  passes  from  this  orbit  to 
another.  This  is  a  very  surprising  break  with  all 
previous  views  on  radiation,  a  break  whose  revolutionary 
character  should  not  be  under-estimated.  But,  however 
unreasonable  it  might  seem  to  give  up  the  direct  con¬ 
nection  between  the  revolutional  frequency  and  the 
radiation  frequency,  it  was  absolutely  necessary  if  the 
Rutherford  atomic  model  was  to  be  preserved.  And 
as  we  shall  now  see,  the  new  point  of  view  of  the  Bohr 
theory  leads  naturally  to  an  interpretation  of  the  Balmer- 
Ritz  formula,  which  had  previously  not  been  connected 
with  any  other  physical  theory. 

The  quantity  of  energy  E,  which  the  atom  gives  up 
when  the  electron  passes  from  an  outer  to  an  inner 
orbit,  or  which,  conversely,  is  taken  in  when  the  electron 
passes  from  an  inner  to  an  outer  orbit,  may,  as  has  been 
indicated,  be  regarded  as  the  difference  between  the 
energy  contents  of  the  atom  in  the  two  stationary 
states.  This  difference  may  be  expressed  in  the  follow¬ 
ing  way.  Let  us  imagine  that  we  eject  the  electron 
from  a  given  orbit  (e.g.  No.  2  in  the  diagram)  so  that  it 
is  sent  to  “  infinity,”  or,  in  other  words,  is  sent  so  far 
away  from  the  nucleus  that  the  attraction  of  the  latter 
becomes  negligible.  To  bring  about  this  removal  of 
the  electron  from  the  atom  demands  a  certain  amount 
of  energy,  which  we  can  call  the  ionizing  work  corre¬ 
sponding  to  the  stationary  orbit  in  question.  We 
may  here  designate  it  as  A2.  To  eject  the  electron 
from  the  orbit  No.  4  will  demand  a  smaller  amount  of 
ionizing  work,  A4.  The  difference  A2-A4  is  accordingly 
the  work  which  must  be  done  to  transfer  the  electron 


122  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


from  the  orbit  No.  2  to  the  orbit  No.  4.  This  is,  how¬ 
ever,  exactly  equal  to  the  quantity  E  of  energy  which 
will  be  emitted  as  light  when  the  electron  passes  from 
orbit  No.  4  to  orbit  No.  2.  If  we  call  the  frequency  of 
this  light  v,  then  from  the  relations  E  —hv  and  E  = 
A2— A4,  we  have 

hv  =  A2 — A4 

If,  now,  in  place  of  this  specific  example  using  the 
stationary  orbits  2  and  4  we  take  any  two  orbits  desig¬ 
nated  by  the  numbers  n"  (for  the  inner)  and  n'  (for  the 
outer),  we  can  write  for  the  frequency  of  the  radiation 
emitted  for  a  transition  between  these  arbitrary  states 

hv= An — An>  or 

h  h 

We  have  now  reached  the  point  where  we  ought  to  bring 
in  the  Balmer-Ritz  formula  for  the  distribution  of  the 
lines  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum.  This  formula  may  be 
written  (see  p.  59) 

_  K  K 
'  w"2  «'2 

We  can  now  see  very  clearly  the  similarity  between  the 
formula  derived  from  the  spectrum  investigations  and 
that  derived  from  the  two  Bohr  postulates.  In  both 
formulae  the  frequency  appears  as  the  difference  between 
two  terms  which  are  characterized  in  both  cases  by  two 
integral  numbers,  in  the  first  formula,  numbers  denoting 
two  stationary  orbits  in  the  Bohr  model  for  hydrogen, 
and  in  the  second  the  two  numbers  which  in  the  Balmer- 
Ritz  formula  for  the  hydrogen  spectrum  characterize, 
respectively,  a  series  and  one  of  the  lines  of  the  series. 
To  obtain  complete  agreement  we  have  merely  to  equate 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  123 


the  corresponding  terms  in  the  two  formulae.  Thus 
we  have  for  any  arbitrary  integer  n 


4?=Iror  A»= 

h  n 2 


hK 


For  the  innermost  stationary  orbit,  for  which  n  —  I, 
the  ionizing  work  A1  will  accordingly  be  equal  to  the 
product  of  the  constants  h  and  K  of  Planck  and  Balmer 
respectively;  and  for  the  orbits  No.  2,  No.  3,  No.  4,  etc., 
the  values  will  be  respectively  1/4,  1/9,  1/16,  etc.,  of 
this  product.  From  the  charges  on  the  nucleus  and 
the  electron,  which  are  both  equal  to  the  elementary 
quantum  e  of  electricity  (see  p.  90),  and  from  the  ionizing 
energy  for  a  given  orbit  we  can  now  find  by  the  use  of 
simple  mechanical  considerations  the  radius  of  the  orbit. 
If  we  denote  the  radii  of  the  orbits  1,  2,  3  ...  by  av  a2, 
a3  .  .  .,  we  then  obtain  for  the  diameters  2 av  2 a2,  2 a3  .  .  . 
the  values  2%  =  1*056  xio-8  cm.  (or  approximately 
2<21  =  io~8  cm.),  2a2  =4 xio-8  cm.,  2#3=9Xio~8  cm.,  etc. 
It  is  seen  that  the  radii  of  the  orbits  are  in  the  proportion 
1,  4,  9  .  .  .,  or  in  other  words  the  squares  of  the  integers 
which  determine  the  orbit  numbers.  It  is  in  this  propor¬ 
tion  that  the  circles  in  Fig.  25  are  drawn.  We  must 
remember,  however,  that  we  have  here  for  the  moment 
been  thinking  of  the  orbits  as  circles,  while  in  reality 
they  must  in  general  be  assumed  to  be  ellipses.  The 
foregoing  considerations  will,  however,  still  hold  with 
the  single  change  that  2 an  will  now  mean,  instead 
of  the  diameter  of  a  circle,  the  major  axis  of  an 
ellipse. 

Let  us  return  to  the  formulae 


v  =  -  — 


h  h 


and 


K  _K 
n"2  n'2 


124  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


Here  n"  denotes  in  the  first  formula  the  index  number  for 
the  inner  of  the  two  orbits  between  which  the  transition 
is  supposed  to  take  place,  while  in  the  second  formula  n" 
denotes  a  definite  series  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum. 
If  n"  is  2  while  n'  takes  on  the  values  3,  4,  5  ...  oo 
then  in  the  Bohr  model  of  the  hydrogen  atom  this 
corresponds  to  a  series  of  transitions  to  the  orbit  No.  2 
from  the  orbits  3,  4,  5  •  •  •>  while  in  the  hydrogen 
spectrum  this  corresponds  to  the  lines  in  the  Balmer 
series,  namely,  the  red  line  (Ha)  corresponding  to  the 
transition  3-2,  the  blue-green  line  (H/3)  to  4-2,  the  violet 
line  (Hy)  to  5-2  and  so  on.  If  we  now  put  n"  =  1  while 
n'  takes  the  values  2,  3,  4  .  .  .,  we  get  in  the  atom  transi¬ 
tions  to  the  orbit  No.  1  from  the  orbits  No.  2,  3,  4  .  .  ., 
corresponding  in  the  spectrum  to  what  is  called  the 
Lyman  series  in  the  ultra-violet  (named  after  the 
American  physicist  Lyman,  who  has  carried  on  extensive 
researches  in  the  ultra-violet  region  of  the  spectrum). 
Thus  every  line  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum  is  represented 
by  a  transition  between  two  definite  stationary  states 
in  the  hydrogen  atom,  since  this  transition  will  give 
the  frequency  corresponding  to  the  line  in  question. 

At  first  sight  this  would  seem  perhaps  to  be  such  an 
extraordinary  satisfactory  result  that  it  would  prove 
an  overwhelming  witness  in  favour  of  the  Bohr  theory. 
A  little  more  careful  thought,  on  the  other  hand,  would 
perhaps  cause  a  complete  reversion  from  enthusiasm 
and  lead  some  to  say  that  the  whole  thing  has  not  the 
slightest  value,  because  the  stationary  states  were  so 
chosen  that  agreement  might  be  made  with  the  Balmer- 
Ritz  formula.  This  last  consideration,  indeed,  states 
the  truth  in  so  far  that  the  agreement  between  the 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  125 


formula  and  the  theory,  at  least  as  developed  here  up 
to  this  point,  is  of  a  purely  formal  nature.  In  the 
Bohr  postulates  the  frequencies  of  the  emitted  radiation 
are  determined  by  a  difference  between  two  of  a  series 
of  energy  quantities,  characterizing  the  stationary  states, 
just  as  in  the  Balmer-Ritz  formula  they  appear  as  a 
difference  between  two  of  a  series  of  terms  (K,  K/4, 
K/9,  .  .  .)  each  characterized  by  its  integer.  Now  by 
characterizing  the  quantities  of  energy  in  the  stationary 
states  by  a  series  of  integers  (in  itself  a  wholly  arbitrary 
procedure)  complete  agreement  between  the  Bohr 
stationary  states  idea  and  the  spectral  formulae  can  be 
attained.  It  is  not  even  necessary  to  introduce  the 
Rutherford  atomic  model  to  attain  this  end.  By 
bringing  in  this  specific  model,  one  might  join  the  new 
theory  to  the  knowledge  already  gained  of  the  atomic 
structure,  and,  so  to  speak,  crystallize  the  hitherto 
undefined  or  only  vaguely  defined  stationary  states 
into  more  definite  form  as  revolution  in  certain  concrete 
orbits.  This  would  then  lead  to  a  more  comprehensive 
conception  of  atomic  structure.  But  the  theory  un¬ 
fortunately  would  still  be  rather  arbitrary,  since  there 
would  seem  to  be  no  justification  for  picking  out  certain 
fixed  orbits  with  definite  diameters  or  major  axes  to 
play  a  special  role.  One  cannot  wonder  then  that 
many  scientists  considered  the  Bohr  theory  unaccept¬ 
able,  or  at  any  rate  were  inclined  to  look  upon  it  simply 
as  an  arbitrary,  unreasonable  conception  which  really 
explained  nothing. 

Naturally,  Bohr  himself  clearly  recognized  the  formal 
nature  of  the  agreement  between  the  Balmer-Ritz 
formula  and  his  postulates.  But  Bohr  was  the  first  to 
see  that  the  quantum  theory  afforded  the  possibility  of 


126  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


bringing  about  such  an  agreement,  and  he  saw,  moreover, 
that  the  agreement  was  not  merely  fortuitous,  but  con¬ 
tained  within  it  something  really  fundamental,  on  which 
one  could  build  further.  That  atomic  processes  on  his 
theory  took  on  an  unreasonable  character  (compared  with 
the  classical  theory)  was  nothing  to  worry  about,  for 
Bohr  had  come  to  the  clear  recognition  that  it  was 
completely  impossible  to  understand  from  known  laws 
the  Planck-Einstein  “  quantum  radiation,”  or  to  deduce 
the  properties  of  the  spectrum  from  the  Rutherford  atom 
alone.  He  therefore  saw  that  his  theory  was  really 
not  introducing  new  improbabilities,  but  was  only  causing 
the  fundamental  nature  of  the  contradictions  which  had 
previously  hindered  development  in  this  field  to  appear 
in  a  clearer  light. 

But  in  addition  to  this  the  choice  of  the  dimensions 
of  the  stationary  states  was  by  no  means  so  arbitrary 
as  might  appear  in  the  foregoing.  In  his  first  presenta¬ 
tion  of  the  theory  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  Bohr  had 
derived  his  results  from  certain  considerations  connected 
with  the  quantum  theory — considerations  of  a  purely 
formal  nature,  indeed,  just  as  those  developed  in  the 
preceding,  but  leading  to  agreement  with  the  spectral 
formulae.  He,  moreover,  called  attention  to  the  fact 
that  the  values  obtained  for  the  orbital  dimensions  were 
of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  those  which  could  be 
expected  on  wholly  different  grounds.  The  diameter 
of  the  innermost  orbit,  i.e.}  that  which  defines  the  outer 
limit  of  the  atom  in  the  normal  state,  was  found  to  be, 
as  has  been  noted  above,  about  io-8  cm.,  i.e.,  of  the  same 
order  of  magnitude  as  the  values  obtained  for  the 
diameters  of  molecules  on  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases 
(see  p.  27).  The  stationary  states  corresponding  to 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  127 

very  high  quantum  numbers  one  could  expect  to  meet 
only  when  hydrogen  was  very  attenuated,  for  otherwise 
there  could  be  no  room  for  the  large  orbits.  We  note 
that  the  32nd  orbit  must  have  a  diameter  32s  (or  over 
1000  times)  as  great  as  the  innermost  orbit.  Since, 
now,  lines  with  high  number  in  a  hydrogen  series  corre¬ 
spond  on  the  Bohr  theory  to  transitions  from  orbits  of 
high  number  to  an  inner  orbit,  it  became  understand¬ 
able  why  only  comparatively  few  lines  of  the  Balmer 
series  are  ordinarily  observed  in  the  discharge  tube, 
while  many  more  lines  are  observed  in  the  spectra  of 
certain  stars.  For  in  such  stars  the  possibility  is  left 
open  for  hydrogen  to  exist  in  a  very  attenuated  state, 
and  yet  in  such  large  masses  that  the  lines  in  question 
can  become  strong  enough  for  observation.  In  fact, 
one  must  assume  that  in  a  great  mass  of  hydrogen  a  very 
large  number  of  atoms  send  out  simultaneously  light 
of  the  wave-length  corresponding  to  one  line.  For  the 
ionizing  work,  i.e.,  the  work  necessary  to  eject  the 
electron  completely  from  the  normal  state  and  thus  make 
the  atom  into  a  positive  ion,  the  Bohr  theory  gives  a 
value  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  the  so-called 
“  ionization  potentials  ”  which  have  been  found  by 
experiment  for  various  gases.  An  exact  correspondence 
between  theory  and  experiment  could  for  hydrogen  not 
be  attained  with  certainty,  because  the  hydrogen  atoms 
in  hydrogen  gas  under  ordinary  conditions  always 
appear  united  in  molecules. 

In  his  very  first  paper,  however,  Bohr  had  studied 
Balmer’s  formula  also  from  another  point  of  view, 
and  had  derived  in  this  way  an  expression  for  the 
Rydberg  constant  K  which  agreed  with  experiment. 
These  considerations  have  reference  to  the  above 


128  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


mentioned  connection  of  the  theory  with  the  classical 
theory  of  electrodynamics. 

Such  a  connection  had  previously  been  known  to 
exist  in  the  fact  that,  for  long  wave-lengths,  the  radiation 
formula  of  Planck  reduces  practically  to  the  Rayleigh 
Jeans  Law  which  can  be  derived  from  electrodynamics. 
This  is  related  to  the  fact  that  when  v  is  small  (long 
wave-lengths),  the  energy  quantum  hv  is  very  small,  and 
hence  the  character  of  the  radiation  emitted  will  approach 
more  and  more  nearly  to  a  continuous  “  un quantized  ” 
radiation.  One  might  then  expect  that  the  Bohr  theory 
also  should  lead  in  the  limit  of  long  wave-lengths  and 
small  frequencies  to  results  resembling  those  of  the 
ordinary  electrodynamic  theory  of  the  radiation  process. 
On  the  Bohr  theory  we  get  the  long  wave-lengths  for 
transitions  between  two  stationary  states  of  high  num¬ 
bers  (numbers  which  also  differ  little  from  each  other). 
Thus  suppose  n  is  a  very  large  number.  Then  the 
transition  from  the  orbit  n  to  the  orbit  n  —  I  will  give  rise 
to  radiation  of  great  wave-length.  For  in  this  case  An 
and  An_x  differ  very  little,  and  accordingly  hv  is  very 
small,  as  must  v  be  also.  According  to  the  electro¬ 
dynamic  theory  of  radiation,  the  revolving  electron  should 
emit  radiation  whose  frequency  is  equal  to  the  electron’s 
frequency  of  revolution.  According  to  the  Bohr  theory 
it  is  impossible  to  fulfil  this  condition  exactly,  since 
radiation  results  from  a  transition  between  two  stationary 
orbits  in  each  of  which  the  electron  has  a  distinct  re- 
volutional  frequency.  But  if  n  is  a  large  number,  the 
difference  between  the  frequencies  of  revolution  con  and 
a)n—  i  for  the  two  orbits  n  and  n  —  i,  respectively,  becomes 
very  small ;  for  example,  for  n  =  ioo,  it  is  only  3  per  cent. 
For  a  certain  high  value  of  n,  then,  the  frequency  of  the 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM 


129 


emitted  radiation  can  therefore  be  approximately  equal 
to  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  electron  in  both  the 
two  orbits,  between  which  the  transition  takes  place. 
But  even  if  this  proved  correct  for  values  of  n  about  ioo, 
one  could  not  be  sure  beforehand  whether  it  would  work 
out  right  for  still  larger  values  of  n,  for  example,  1000. 

In  order  to  investigate  this  latter  point  we  must  look 
into  the  formulae  for  the  revolutional  frequency  co  in  a 
stationary  orbit  and  for  the  radiation  frequency  v. 
Since,  according  to  the  Bohr  theory,  we  can  apply  the 
usual  laws  of  mechanics  to  revolution  in  a  stationary 
orbit,  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  find  an  expression  for  a. 
From  a  short  mathematical  calculation  we  can  deduce 
that  <y=R/w3,  where  R  is  the  frequency  of  revolution 
for  the  first  orbit  (n  —  i).  We  find  v,  on  the  other  hand, 
by  substituting  in  the  Balmer-Ritz  formula  the  numbers 
n  and  n  —  I,  and  a  simple  calculation  shows  that  for 
great  values  of  n,  the  expression  for  v  will  approach  in 
the  limit  the  simple  form  v=2K/n3.  For  large  orbit 
numbers,  v  accordingly  varies  as  u,  i.e.,  inversely  pro¬ 
portional  to  the  third  power  of  n ,  and  by  equating 
R  and  2K,  we  find  that  the  values  for  v  and  00  tend 
more  and  more  to  become  equal. 

In  this  way  the  value  of  K,  the  Balmer  constant,  may 
be  computed.  It  is  found  that 

K  =2  7r2e*mlh3 

where  e  is  the  charge  on  the  electron,  m  the  mass  of  the 
electron,  and  h  is  Planck’s  constant.  Upon  the  sub¬ 
stitution  of  the  experimental  values  for  these  quantities, 
a  value  of  K  is  determined  which  agrees  with  the  experi¬ 
mental  value  (from  the  spectral  lines  investigation)  of 
3*29  Xio15  within  the  accuracy  to  which  e,  m  and  h  are 
9 


130  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


obtainable.  This  agreement  has  from  the  very  first  been 
a  significant  support  for  the  Bohr  theory. 

One  might  now  object  that  we  have  here  considered 
radiation  due  to  a  transition  between  two  successive 
stationary  states,  e.g.,  No.  ioo  and  No.  99,  or  the  like 
(a  “  single  jump  ”  we  might  call  it).  On  the  other  hand, 
for  transitions  between  states  whose  numbers  differ  by 
2,  3,  4  or  more  (as  in  a  double  jump,  or  a  triple  jump) 
the  agreement  found  above  will  wholly  disappear,  and 
doubt  be  cast  on  its  value.  For  in  such  cases  of  high 
orbit  numbers  the  frequency  of  revolution  will  remain 
approximately  the  same  even  for  a  difference  of  2,  3,  4  or 
more  in  orbit  number ;  but  the  radiation  frequency  for 
a  double  jump  will  be  nearly  twice  that  for  a  single 
jump,  while  that  for  a  triple  jump  will  be  nearly  three 
times,  etc.  Accordingly,  for  approximately  the  same 
revolutional  frequency  co  we  shall  have  in  these  cases  for 
the  radiation  frequency  very  nearly  v1=a,  v2=2co,  = 

3 co,  etc.  We  must,  however,  remember  that  when  the 
orbit  in  the  stationary  states  is  not  a  circle,  but  an 
ellipse  (as  must  in  general  be  assumed  to  be  the  case), 
the  classical  electrodynamics  require  that  the  electron 
emits  besides  the  “  fundamental  ”  radiation  of  frequency 
iq =u)  the  overtones  of  frequencies  v2=2gj,  ^=3 00  .  .  . 
We  then  also  here  see  the  outward  similarity  between 
the  Bohr  theory  and  the  classical  electrodynamics.  We 
may  say  that  the  radiation  of  frequency  v,  produced  by 
a  single  jump,  corresponds  to  the  fundamental  harmonic 
component  in  the  motion  of  the  electron,  while  the 
radiation  of  frequency  v2,  emitted  by  a  double  jump, 
corresponds  to  the  first  overtone,  etc. 

The  similarity  is,  however,  only  of  a  formal  nature, 
since  the  processes  of  radiation,  according  to  the  Bohr 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  131 


theory,  are  of  quite  different  nature  than  would  be 
expected  from  the  laws  of  electrodynamics.  In  order  to 
show  how  fundamental  is  the  difference,  even  where  the 
similarity  seems  greatest,  let  us  assume  that  we  have  a 
mass  of  hydrogen  with  a  very  large  number  of  atoms 
in  orbits,  corresponding  to  very  high  numbers,  and 
that  the  revolutional  frequency  can  practically  be  set 
equal  to  the  same  quantity  co.  There  may  take 
place  transitions  between  orbits  with  the  difference 
i,  2,  3  ...  in  number,  and  as  the  result  of  these  different 
transitions  we  shall  find,  by  spectrum  analysis,  in  the 
emitted  radiation  frequencies  which  are  practically  a, 
2o),  3 a,  etc.  According  to  the  radiation  theory  of  electro¬ 
dynamics  we  should  also  get  these  frequencies  and  the 
spectral  lines  corresponding  to  them.  It  must,  however, 
be  assumed  that  they  are  produced  by  the  simultaneous 
emission  from  every  individual  radiating  atom  of  a 
fundamental  and  a  series  of  overtones.  According  to 
the  Bohr  theory,  on  the  other  hand,  each  individual 
radiating  atom  at  a  given  time  emits  only  one  definite 
line  corresponding  to  a  definite  frequency  (monochromatic 
radiation). 

We  can  now  realize  that  the  Bohr  theory  takes  us  into 
unknown  regions,  that  it  points  towards  fundamental 
laws  of  nature  about  which  we  previously  had  no  ideas. 
The  fundamental  postulates  of  electrodynamics,  which 
for  a  long  time  seemed  to  be  the  fundamental  laws  of  the 
physical  world  itself,  by  which  there  was  hope  of  explain¬ 
ing  the  laws  of  mechanics  and  of  light  and  of  everything 
else,  were  disclosed  by  the  Bohr  theory  as  merely  super¬ 
ficial  and  only  applicable  to  large-scale  phenomena. 
The  apparently  exact  account  of  the  activities  of  nature, 
obtained  by  the  formulae  of  electrodynamics,  often  veiled 


132  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


processes  of  a  nature  entirely  different  from  those  the 
formulae  were  supposed  to  describe. 

One  might  then  express  some  surprise  that  the  laws 
of  electrodynamics  could  have  been  obtained  at  all  and 
interpreted  as  the  most  fundamental  of  all  laws.  It 
must,  however,  be  remembered  that  the  Bohr  theory  for 
large  wave-lengths,  i.e.,  the  slow  oscillations,  leads  to 
a  formal  agreement  with  electrodynamics.  It  must, 
moreover,  be  remembered  that  the  laws  of  electro¬ 
dynamics  are  established  on  the  basis  of  large-scale 
electric  and  magnetic  processes  which  do  not  refer  to 
the  activities  of  separate  atoms,  but  in  which  very 
great  numbers  of  electrons  are  carried  in  a  certain 
direction  in  the  electric  conductors  or  vibrate  in  oscilla¬ 
tions  which  are  extremely  sIqw  compared  with  light 
oscillations.  Moreover,  the  observed  laws,  even  if  they 
can  account  for  many  phenomena  in  light,  early  showed 
their  inability  to  explain  the  nature  of  the  spectrum 
and  many  other  problems  connected  with  the  detailed 
structure  of  matter.  Indeed  the  more  this  structure  was 
studied,  the  greater  became  the  difficulties,  the  stronger 
the  evidence  that  the  solution  cannot  be  obtained  in  the 
classical  way. 

If  we  ask  whether  Bohr  has  succeeded  in  setting  up 
new  fundamental  laws,  which  can  be  quantitatively 
formulated,  to  replace  the  laws  of  electrodynamics  and 
to  be  used  in  the  derivation  of  everything  that  happens  in 
the  atom  and  so  in  all  nature,  this  question  must  receive 
a  negative  answer.  The  motion  of  the  electron  in  a  given 
stationary  state  may,  at  any  rate  to  a  considerable  extent, 
be  calculated  by  the  laws  of  mechanics.  We  do  not  know, 
however,  why  certain  orbits  are,  in  this  way,  preferred 
over  others,  nor  why  the  electrons  jump  from  outer  to 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  133 


inner  orbits,  nor  why  they  sometimes  go  from  one 
stationary  orbit  to  the  next  and  sometimes  jump  over 
one  or  more  orbits,  nor  why  they  cannot  come  any  closer 
to  the  nucleus  than  the  innermost  orbit,  nor  why,  in 
these  transitions,  they  emit  radiation  of  a  frequency 
determined  according  to  the  rules  mentioned. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  in  science  we  must 
always  be  patient  with  the  question  “  Why  ?  ”  We 
can  never  get  to  the  bottom  of  things.  On  account  of 
the  nature  of  the  problem,  answers  cannot  be  given  to 
the  questions  why  the  smallest  material  particles  (for 
the  time  being  hydrogen  nuclei  and  electrons)  —  the 
elementary  physical  individuals — exist,  or  why  the  funda¬ 
mental  laws  for  their  mutual  relationships — the  most 
elementary  relationships  existing  between  them — are 
of  this  or  that  nature ;  a  satisfactory  answer  would 
necessarily  refer  to  something  even  more  elementary. 
We  cannot  claim  more  than  a  complete  description  of 
the  relative  positions  and  motions  of  the  fundamental 
particles  and  of  the  laws  governing  their  mutual  action 
and  their  interplay  with  the  ether. 

If  we  examine  our  knowledge  of  the  atomic  processes 
in  the  light  of  this  ideal  we  are  tempted,  however,  to 
consider  it  as  boundless  ignorance.  We  are  incon¬ 
ceivably  far  from  being  able  to  give  a  description  of  the 
atomic  mechanism,  such  as  would  enable  us  to  follow, 
for  example,  an  electron  from  place  to  place  during  its 
entire  motion,  or  to  consider  the  stationary  states  as 
links  in  the  whole  instead  of  isolated  “  gifts  from  above.” 
During  the  transition  from  one  stationary  state  to  another 
we  have  no  knowledge  at  all  of  the  existence  of  the 
electron,  indeed  we  do  not  even  know  whether  it  exists 
at  that  time  or  whether  it  perhaps  is  dissolved  in  the 


134  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


ether  to  be  re-formed  in  a  new  stationary  state.  But 
even  if  we  turn  aside  from  such  a  paradoxical  considera¬ 
tion,  it  must  be  recognized  that  we  do  not  know  what 
path  the  electron  follows  between  two  stationary  orbits 
nor  how  long  a  time  the  transition  takes.  As  has  been 
done  in  this  book,  the  transition  is  often  denoted  as  a 
jump,  and  many  are  inclined  to  believe  that  the  electron 
in  its  entire  journey  from  a  distant  outer  orbit  to  the 
innermost  spends  the  greatest  part  of  the  time  in  the 
stationary  orbits,  while  each  transition  takes  but  an 
infinitesimally  short  time.  This,  however,  in  itself  does 
not  follow  from  the  theory,  nor  is  it  implied  in  the  expres¬ 
sion  “  the  stationary  states.”  These  states  may  in  a 
certain  sense  be  considered  as  way  stations  ;  but  when 
we  ask  whether  an  electron  stays  long  in  the  station, 
or  whether  the  stationary  state  is  simply  a  transfer  point 
where  the  electron  changes  its  method  of  travelling  so 
that  the  frequency  of  its  radiation  is  changed,  these  are 
other  matters,  and  we  cannot  here  go  into  the  considera¬ 
tions  connected  with  them. 

To  get  an  idea  of  some  of  the  difficulties  inherent 
in  the  attempt  to  make  concrete  pictures  of  the  nature 
of  the  processes,  let  us  again  consider  the  analogy 
between  the  Bohr  atom  of  hydrogen  and  a  special  kind 
of  musical  instrument  in  which  sounds  are  produced 
by  the  fall  of  a  small  sphere  between  discs  at  various 
heights  (see  p.  120).  It  will  be  most  natural  here  to 
think  of  the  sounds  as  developed  by  the  sphere  when 
it  hits  the  lower  disc,  and  to  think  of  the  tones  of  higher 
pitch  as  given  by  the  harder  blows,  corresponding  to 
the  larger  energy  (determinative  of  the  pitch)  released 
by  the  fall.  We  can,  however,  by  no  means  transfer 
such  a  picture  to  the  atomic  model.  For  in  the  latter 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  135 


we  cannot  think  of  the  stationary  state  as  a  material 
thing  which  the  electron  can  hit,  and  it  is  also  unreason¬ 
able  to  imagine  that  the  radiation  is  not  emitted  until 
the  moment  when  the  transition  is  over  and  the  electron 
has  arrived  in  its  new  stationary  state.  We  must,  on 
the  contrary,  assume  that  the  emission  of  radiation 
takes  place  during  the  whole  transition,  whether  the 
latter  consumes  a  shorter  or  longer  time.  If  it  were 
the  case  that  a  transition  always  took  place  between 
two  successive  stationary  states,  it  would  then  be 
possible  to  use  the  musical  instrument  to  illustrate  the 
matter.  Let  us  denote  the  discs  from  the  lowest  one 
up  with  the  numbers  i,  2,  3,  .  .  .  corresponding  to  the 
stationary  states  1,  2,  3,  .  .  .  and  for  the  moment  con¬ 
sider  a  fall  from  disc  6  to  disc  5.  We  can  now  imagine 
that  the  space  between  the  two  discs  is  in  some  way 
tuned  for  a  definite  note.  Thus  we  might  place  between 
the  discs  a  series  of  sheets  of  paper  having  such  intervals 
between  them  that  the  sphere  in  its  fall  strikes  their 
edges  at  equal  intervals  of  time,  e.g.,  1/100  second. 
The  disturbance  then  set  up  will  produce  a  sound  with 
the  frequency  100  vibrations  per  second.  If  the  distance 
between  the  discs  5  and  4  double  that  between  6 
and  5,  the  sphere  in  the  fall  from  5  to  4  will  lose  double 
the  energy  lost  in  the  descent  from  6  to  5,  and  will 
therefore  emit  a  note  of  double  frequency.  The  sheets 
of  paper  in  the  space  between  5  and  4  must  then  be 
packed  more  tightly  than  between  6  and  5.  And  so 
the  space  between  any  two  discs  may  thus  be  said  to 
have  its  own  particular  classification  or  “  tuning.”  In 
analogy  with  this  we  might  think  of  the  space  about  a 
hydrogen  nucleus  divided  by  the  stationary  states  into 
sections  each  with  its  own  “  tuning.”  But  apart  from 


136  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


the  intrinsic  peculiarity  of  such  an  arrangement  and 
the  particular  difficulties  it  will  meet  in  trying  to  explain 
the  more  complicated  phenomena  to  be  mentioned 
later,  the  one  fact  that  the  electron  in  a  transition  from 
one  stationary  state  to  another  can  jump  over  one  or 
more  intervening  stationary  orbits,  makes  such  a  repre¬ 
sentation  impossible.  If  the  sphere  in  the  given  example 
could  fall  from  disc  6  to  disc  4,  it  should  during  the 
whole  descent  emit  a  note  of  higher  pitch  than  in  the 
descent  from  6  to  5.  But  this  could  not  possibly  take 
place,  if  the  space  from  6  to  5,  which  must  be  traversed 
en  route  to  4,  is  tuned  for  a  lower  note.  The  same 
consideration  applies  to  the  hydrogen  atom.  Naturally 
it  is  not  impossible  to  continue  the  effort  to  illustrate 
the  matter  in  some  concrete  manner  (one  might,  for 
example,  imagine  separate  channels  each  with  its  own 
particular  tuning  between  the  same  two  discs).  But  in 
all  these  attempts  the  situation  must  become  more  and 
more  complicated  rather  than  more  simple. 

On  the  whole  it  is  very  difficult  to  understand  how 
a  hydrogen  atom,  where  the  electron  makes  a  transition 
from  orbit  6  to  orbit  4,  can  during  the  entire  transition 
emit  a  radiation  with  a  frequency  different  from  that 
when  the  electron  goes  from  orbit  6  to  orbit  5.  Although 
it  seems  as  if  the  two  electrons  in  making  the  transition 
are  at  first  under  identical  conditions,  still,  nevertheless, 
the  one  which  is  going  to  orbit  4  emits  from  the  first  a 
radiation  different  from  that  emitted  by  the  one  going 
to  orbit  5.  Even  from  the  very  beginning  the  electron 
seems  to  arrange  its  conduct  according  to  the  goal  of 
its  motion  and  also  according  to  future  events.  But 
such  a  gift  is  wont  to  be  the  privilege  of  thinking  beings 
that  can  anticipate  certain  future  occurrences.  The 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  137 

inanimate  objects  of  physics  should  observe  causal 
laws  in  a  more  direct  manner,  i.e.,  allow  their  conduct 
to  be  determined  by  their  previous  states  and  the  con¬ 
temporaneous  influences  on  them. 

There  is  a  difficulty  of  a  similar  nature  in  the  fact 
that  from  the  same  stationary  orbit  the  electron 
sometimes  starts  for  a  single  jump,  another  time  for 
a  double  jump,  and  so  on.  From  certain  considera¬ 
tions  it  is  often  possible  to  propound  laws  for  the 
probability  of  the  different  jumps,  so  that  for  a  great 
quantity  of  atoms  it  is  possible  to  calculate  the  strengths 
(intensities)  of  the  corresponding  spectral  lines.  But 
we  can  no  more  give  the  reason  why  one  given  electron 
at  a  given  time  determines  to  make  a  double  jump 
while  another  decides  to  make  a  single  jump  or  not 
to  jump  at  all,  than  we  can  say  why  a  certain  radium 
nucleus  among  many  explodes  at  a  given  moment 
(cf.  p.  102).  This  similarity  between  the  occurrence  of 
radiation  processes  on  the  Bohr  theory  and  of  the 

radioactive  processes  has  especially  been  emphasized 

» 

by  Einstein. 

It  must,  by  no  means,  be  said  that  the  causal  laws 
do  not  hold  for  the  atomic  processes,  but  the  hints 
given  here  indicate  how  difficult  it  will  be  to  reach 
an  understanding — in  the  usual  sense — of  these  processes 
and  consequently  of  the  processes  of  physics  in  general. 
There  is  much  that  might  indicate  that,  on  the  whole, 
it  is  impossible  to  obtain  a  consistent  picture  of  atomic 
processes  in  space  and  time  with  the  help  of  the  motions 
of  the  nuclei  and  the  electrons  and  the  variations  in 
the  state  of  the  ether,  and  with  the  application  of  such 
fundamental  conceptions  of  physics  as  mass,  electric 
charge  and  energy. 


138  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


Even  if  this  were  the  case,  it  does  not  follow  that  a 
comprehensive  description  in  time  and  space  of  the 
physical  processes  is  impossible  in  principle  ;  but  the 
hope  of  attaining  such  a  description  must  perhaps  be 
allied  to  the  representation  of  “  physical  individuals  ” 
or  material  particles  of  an  even  lower  order  of  magnitude 
than  the  smallest  particles  now  known — electrons  and 
hydrogen  nuclei — and  to  ideas  of  more  fundamental 
nature  than  those  now  known  ;  we  are  here  outside 
our  present  sphere  of  experience. 

From  all  the  above  remarks  it  would  be  very  easy 
to  get  the  impression  that  the  Bohr  theory,  while  it 
gives  us  a  glimpse  into  depths  previously  unsuspected, 
at  the  same  time  leads  us  into  a  fog,  where  it  is  impos¬ 
sible  to  find  the  way.  This  is  very  far  from  being  the 
case.  On  the  contrary,  it  has  thrown  new  light  on  a  host 
of  physical  phenomena  of  different  kinds  so  that  they  now 
appear  in  a  coherence  previously  unattainable.  That 
this  light  is  not  deceptive  follows  from  the  fact  that  the 
theory,  which  has  been  gradually  developed  by  Bohr  and 
many  other  investigators,  has  made  it  possible  to  predict 
and  to  account  for  many  phenomena  with  remarkable 
accuracy  and  in  complete  agreement  with  experimental 
observation.  The  fundamental  concepts  are,  on  the  one 
hand,  the  stationary  states,  where  the  usual  laws  of 
mechanics  can  be  applied  (although  only  within  certain 
limits),  and,  on  the  other,  the  “  quantum  rule  ”  for 
transitions  between  the  states.  But  at  the  very 
beginning  it,  has  been  necessary  in  many  respects  to 
grope  in  the  dark,  guided  in  part  by  the  experimental 
results  and  in  part  by  various  assumptions,  often  very 
arbitrary. 

For  Bohr  himself,  a  most  important  guide  has  been 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  139 


the  so-called  correspondence  principle,  which  expresses 
the  previously  mentioned  connection  with  the  classical 
electrodynamics.  It  is  difficult  to  explain  in  what  it 
consists,  because  it  cannot  be  expressed  in  exact  quanti¬ 
tative  laws,  and  it  is,  on  this  account,  also  difficult  to 
apply.  In  Bohr’s  hands  it  has  been  extraordinarily 
fruitful  in  the  most  varied  fields  ;  while  other  more 
definite  and  more  easily  applicable  rules  of  guidance  have 
indeed  given  important  results  in  individual  cases,  they 
have  shown  their  limitations  by  failing  in  other  cases. 
We  can  here  merely  indicate  what  the  correspondence 
principle  is. 

As  has  been  said  (cf.  p.  130),  it  has  been  found  that  in 
the  limiting  region  (sufficiently  low  frequencies)  where 
the  Bohr  theory  and  the  classical  electrodynamics  are 
merged  in  their  outward  features,  a  series  of  frequencies 
plt  v2,  for  monochromatic  radiation,  emitted  by 
different  atoms  in  the  single  jumps,  double  jumps,  etc., 
of  the  electrons,  are  equal  to  the  frequencies  m,  2m,  3m 
.  .  .  which,  according  to  the  laws  of  electrodynamics, 
are  contained  in  each  of  these  atoms  respectively  as 
fundamental  and  the  first,  second  .  .  .  overtones  in  the 
motion  of  the  electron.  Farther  away  from  this 
region  the  two  sets  of  frequencies  are  no  longer  equally 
large,  but  it  is  easy  to  understand,  from  the  foregoing,  the 
meaning  of  the  statement  that,  for  example,  the  radiation 
of  a  triple  jump  with  the  frequency  vz  “  corresponds  ” 
to  the  second  overtone  3 m  in  the  revolution  of  the  elec¬ 
tron.  It  is  this  correspondence  which  Bohr  traces  back 
to  the  regions  where  there  is  even  a  great  difference  in 
two  successive  orbits  and  where  the  frequency  produced 
by  a  transition  between  these  orbits  is  very  different 
from  the  frequencies  of  revolution  in  the  two  orbits  or 


140  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


their  overtones.  He  expresses  himself  as  follows  :  “  The 
probability  for  the  occurrence  of  single,  double,  triple 
jumps,  etc.,  is  conditioned  by  the  presence  in  the 
motion  of  the  atom  of  the  different  constituent 
harmonic  vibrations  having  the  frequency  of  the 
fundamental,  first  overtone,  second  overtone,  etc., 
respectively.’ ’ 

In  order  to  understand  how  this  “  correspondence,” 
apparently  so  indefinite,  can  be  used  to  derive  important 
results,  we  shall  give  an  illustration.  Let  us  assume 
that  the  mechanical  theory  for  the  revolution  of  an 
electron  in  the  hydrogen  atom  had  led  to  the  result  that 
the  orbits  of  the  electrons  always  had  to  be  circles. 
According  to  the  laws  of  Electrodynamics,  the  motion  of 
the  electron  would  in  this  case  never  give  any  overtones, 
and,  according  to  the  correspondence  principle,  there 
could  not  appear  among  the  frequencies  emitted  by 
hydrogen  any  which  would  correspond  to  the  overtones, 
i.e.}  there  would  not  be  any  double  jumps,  triple  jumps, 
etc.,  produced,  but  the  only  transitions  would  be  those 
between  successive  stationary  orbits.  The  investigation 
of  the  spectrum  shows,  however,  that  multiple  jumps 
occur  as  well  as  single  jumps,  and  this  fact  may  be  taken 
as  evidence  that  the  orbits  in  the  hydrogen  atom  are  not 
usually  circles.  Let  us  next  assume  that,  instead,  we 
had  obtained  the  result  that  the  orbits  of  the  electrons 
are  always  ellipses  of  a  certain  quite  definite  eccentricity, 
corresponding  to  certain  definite  ratios  in  intensity 
between  the  overtones  and  the  fundamentals  ;  that,  for 
instance,  the  intensity  of  the  classical  radiation  due  to 
the  first  overtone  is  in  all  states  of  motion  always  one- 
half  that  due  to  the  fundamental,  the  intensity  due  to  the 
second  overtone  always  one-third  that  due  to  the  funda- 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  141 


mental,  etc.  Then  the  radiation  actually  emitted  should, 
according  to  the  correspondence  principle,  be  such  that 
the  intensities  of  the  lines  corresponding  to  the  double 
and  triple  jumps,  which  start  from  a  given  stationary 
state,  are  respectively  one-half  and  one-third  of  the  in¬ 
tensity  corresponding  to  a  single  jump  from  the  same 
state. 

By  these  examples  we  can  obtain  an  idea  of  how  the 
correspondence  principle  may  in  certain  cases  account 
for  various  facts,  as  to  what  spectral  lines  cannot  be 
expected  to  appear  at  all,  although  they  would  be 
given  by  a  particular  transition,  and  concerning  the 
distribution  of  intensities  in  those  which  really  appear. 
The  illustration  given  above,  however,  has  really  nothing 
much  to  do  with  actual  problems,  and  objections  may  be 
raised  to  the  rough  way  in  which  the  illustration  has 
been  handled.  The  correspondence  principle  has  its 
particular  province  in  more  complicated  electron  motions 
than  those  which  appear  in  the  unperturbed  hydrogen 
atom — motions  which,  unlike  the  simple  elliptical  motion, 
are  not  composed  of  a  series  of  harmonic  oscillations 
( co,  2a,  3&  .  .  .  )  but  may  be  considered  as  compounded 
of  oscillations  whose  frequencies  have  other  ratios. 
The  correspondence  principle  has,  in  such  cases,  given 
rise  to  important  discoveries  and  predictions  which 
agree  completely  with  the  observations. 

We  have  dwelt  thus  long  upon  the  difficult  corre¬ 
spondence  principle,  because  it  is  one  of  Bohr’s  deepest 
thoughts  and  chief  guides.  It  has  made  possible  a 
more  consistent  presentation  of  the  whole  theory,  and  it 
bids  fair  to  remain  the  keystone  of  its  future  develop¬ 
ment.  But  from  these  general  considerations  we  shall 
now  proceed  to  more  special  phases  of  the  problem  and 


142  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


examine  one  of  the  first  great  triumphs  in  which  the 
theory  showed  its  ability  to  lead  the  way  where  pre¬ 
viously  there  had  been  no  path. 

The  False  Hydrogen  Spectrum. 

In  1897  the  American  astronomer,  Pickering,  dis¬ 
covered  in  the  spectrum  of  a  star,  in  addition  to  the  usual 
lines  given  by  the  Balmer  series,  a  series  of  lines  each 
of  which  lay  about  midway  between  two  lines  of  the 
Balmer  series  ;  the  frequencies  of  these  lines  could  be 
represented  by  a  formula  which  was  very  similar  to  the 
Balmer  formula  ;  it  was  necessary  merely  to  substitute 
n=  3|,  4J,  5 J,  etc.,  in  the  formula  on  p.  57  instead  of 
n—  3,  4,  5,  etc.  It  was  later  discovered  that  in  many 
stars  there  was  a  line  corresponding  to  n"  =  3/2  or  w'=2 
in  the  usual  Balmer- Ritz  formula  (p.  59).  It  was  con¬ 
sidered  that  these  must  be  hydrogen  lines,  and  that  the 
spectral  formula  for  this  element  should  properly  be 
written  .  I  . 

where  n"  and  nr  can  assume  integral  values.  This  was 
done  since  it  was  not  to  be  believed  that  the  spectral 
properties  of  chemically  different  elements  could  be  so 
similar.  This  view  was  very  much  strengthened  when 
Fowler,  in  1912,  discovered  the  Pickering  lines  in  the 
light  from  a  vacuum  tube  containing  a  mixture  of 
hydrogen  and  helium.  It  could  not  quite  be  understood, 
however,  why  the  new  lines  did  not  in  general  appear 
in  the  hydrogen  spectrum. 

According  to  the  Bohr  theory  for  the  hydrogen 
spectrum  it  was  impossible — except  by  giving  up  the 
agreement  (cf.  p.  129)  with  electrodynamics  in  the  region 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  143 


of  high  orbit  numbers — to  attribute  to  the  hydrogen 
atom  the  emission  of  lines  corresponding  to  a  formula 
where  the  whole  numbers  were  halved.  The  formula 
given  above  might,  however,  also  be  written  as 


If  the  earlier  calculations  had  been  carried  out  a 
little  more  generally,  i.e.,  if  instead  of  equating  the 
nuclear  charge  with  i  elementary  electric  quantum  e , 
as  in  hydrogen,  it  had  been  equated  with  Ne  where  N 
is  an  integer,  then  the  frequency  might  have  been 
written  as 


This  formula  is  evidently  the  same  as  that  just  given 
when  N  equals  2.  Now  we  know  that  helium  has  the 
atomic  number  and  nuclear  charge  2  (cf.  p.  90)  ;  a 
normal  neutral  helium  atom  has  two  electrons  and  it  is, 
therefore,  very  different  from  a  hydrogen  atom.  If, 
however,  a  helium  atom  has  lost  one  electron  and  there¬ 
fore  has  become  a  positive  ion  with  one  charge,  it  is  a 
system  like  the  hydrogen  atom  with  only  one  single 
electron  moving  about  the  nucleus.  It  differs  in  its 
“  outer  ”  characteristics  from  the  hydrogen  atom  only 
in  having  a  nuclear  charge  twice  as  great,  i.e.  its  spectral 
formula  must  be  given  with  N  =2,  or  N2=4.  The 
formula  for  the  supposed  hydrogen  lines  would  con¬ 
sequently  fit  the  case  of  a  helium  atom  which  has 
lost  an  electron.  Bohr  was  aware  of  this,  and  he  there¬ 
fore  suggested  that  the  lines  in  question  were  due,  not 
to  hydrogen,  but  to  helium. 

At  first  all  the  authorities  in  the  field  of  spectroscopy 


144  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


were  against  this  view  ;  but  most  of  the  doubt  was 
dispelled  when  Evans  showed  that  the  lines  could  be 
produced  in  a  vacuum  tube  where  there  was  only  helium 
with  not  a  trace  of  hydrogen. 

In  a  letter  to  Nature  in  September  1913,  Fowler 
objected  to  the  Bohr  theory  on  the  ground  that  the 
disputed  line-formula  did  not  exactly  correspond  to 
the  formula  with  4K,  but  that  there  was  a  slight  dis¬ 
agreement.  Bohr’s  answer  was  immediate.  He  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that — since  temporarily  he  had 
sought  only  a  first  approximation — in  his  calculations 
he  had  taken  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  to  be  infinite 
in  comparison  to  the  mass  of  the  electron,  so  that  the 
nucleus  could  be  considered  exactly  at  the  focus  of  the 
ellipse  described  by  the  electron.  In  reality,  he  said, 
it  must  be  assumed  that  nucleus  and  electron  move 
about  their  common  centre  of  gravity,  just  as  in  the 
motion  in  the  solar  system  it  must  be  assumed  that  not 
the  centre  of  the  sun,  but  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the 
entire  system  remains  fixed.  This  motion  of  the  nucleus 
leads  to  the  introduction  of  a  factor  M/(M+m)  in  the 
expression  for  the  constant  K  given  on  p.  129,  where 
M  is  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  and  m  that  of  the  electron, 
which  in  hydrogen  is  1/1835  that  of  the  nucleus.  In 
helium,  M  is  four  times  as  large  as  in  hydrogen,  so  that 
the  given  factor  here  has  a  slightly  different  value. 
The  difference  in  the  values  for  K  for  the  hydrogen 
and  for  the  helium  spectrum  which  was  found  by  Fowler, 
is  0-04  per  cent.,  which  agrees  exactly  with  the  theoretical 
difference. 

Bohr  thus  turned  Fowler’s  objection  into  a  strong 
argument  in  favour  of  the  theory. 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM 


145 


The  Introduction  of  more  than  one  Quantum  Number. 

During  the  first  years  after  1913,  Bohr  was  practically 
alone  in  working  out  his  theory,  at  that  time  still 
assailed  by  many,  and  in  showing  its  application  to 
many  problems.  In  1916,  however,  the  theorists  in 
other  countries,  led  by  the  well-known  Munich  professor, 
Sommerfeld,  began  to  associate  themselves  with  the 
Bohr  theory,  and  their  investigations  gave  rise  to  much 
essential  progress.  We  shall  here  mention  some  of  the 
most  important  contributions. 

In  the  theory  for  the  hydrogen  spectrum  pro¬ 
pounded  above,  it  was  assumed  that  we  had  to  do  with 
a  single  series  of  stationary  orbits,  each  characterized 
by  its  quantum  number.  But  as  shown  by  theoretical 
investigations  each  of  the  stationary  orbits  must,  when 
more  detail  is  asked  for,  also  be  indicated  by  an  additional 
quantum  number. 

This  is  closely  connected  with  the  fact  that  the 
motion  of  the  electron  is  not  quite  so  simple  as  previously 
assumed.  We  have  assumed  that  the  electron  moves 
about  the  nucleus  just  as  a  planet  moves  about  the 
sun  (according  to  Kepler’s  Laws),  in  an  ellipse  with 
the  sun  at  one  focus,  since  the  electron  is  influenced 
by  an  attraction  inversely  proportional  to  the  square 
of  the  distance,  just  as  the  planets  are  attracted  by  the 
sun  according  to  Newton’s  Law.  We  must,  however, 
remember  that  we  are  here  concerned  with  the  electric 
attraction  which  at  a  given  distance  is  determined,  not 
by  mass,  but  by  the  electric  charges  in  question.  If 
the  latter  remain  unchanged,  while  the  mass  of  the 
electron  varies,  the  motion  will  be  changed,  because  the 
same  force  has  less  effect  upon  a  greater  mass.  Accord- 


10 


146  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


in g  to  the  Einstein  principle  of  relativity,  the  mass  of 
the  electrons,  in  accordance  with  ideas  expounded  long 
ago  by  J.  J.  Thomson,  will  not  be  constant,  but  to  a 
certain  extent  depend  upon  the  velocity,  which  will  vary 
from  place  to  place,  when  the  orbit  is  an  ellipse.  As  a 
result  of  this,  the  motion  becomes  a  central  motion  of 
more  general  nature  than  a  Kepler  ellipse.  Since  the 

^ - ^ 


Fig.  26. — A  compound  electron  motion  produced  by  the 
very  rapid  rotation  of  an  elliptical  orbit. 

influence  of  the  change  of  mass  is  very  small,  the  orbit 
can  still  be  considered  as  an  approximate  Kepler 
ellipse  ;  but  the  major  axis  will  slowly  rotate  in  the 
plane  of  the  orbit.  In  reality,  the  orbit  will  not  there¬ 
fore  be  closed,  but  will  have  the  character  which  is 
shown  in  Fig.  26 ;  this,  however,  corresponds  to  a 
much  more  rapid  rotation  of  the  major  axis  than  that 
which  actually  takes  place  in  the  hydrogen  atom, 
where  —  even  in  case  of  the  swiftest  rotation  —  the 
electron  will  revolve  about  40,000  times  round  the 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  147 


nucleus  at  the  same  time  as  the  major  axis  turns 
round  once. 

If  the  electron  moves  in  a  fixed  Kepler  ellipse,  the 
energy  content  of  the  atom  will  be  determined  by  the 
major  axis  of  the  ellipse  only.  If  these  axes  for  the 
stationary  states  with  quantum  numbers  i,  2,  3  .  .  .  are 
respectively  denoted  by  2 av  2 a2,  2 a3  .  .  .  the  frequency, 
for  instance,  in  the  transition  from  No.  3  to  No.  2 — 
since  it  is  determined  by  the  loss  of  energy — will  be 
the  same  whether  the  orbits  are  circles  or  ellipses.  If, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  electron  moves  in  an  ellipse 
which  itself  rotates  slowly,  the  energy  content,  as  can 
be  shown  mathematically,  will  depend  not  only  upon 
the  major  axis  of  the  ellipse,  but  also  to  a  slight  degree 
upon  its  eccentricity,  or,  in  other  words,  on  its  minor 
axis.  Then  in  the  transition  3-2  we  shall  get  different 
energy  losses  and  consequently  different  frequencies, 
according  as  the  ellipse  is  more  or  less  elongated.  If 
it  were  the  case  that  the  eccentricity  of  the  ellipses  for  a 
certain  quantum  number  could  take  arbitrary  values, 
then  in  the  transition  between  two  numbers  we  could 
get  frequencies  which  may  take  any  value  within  a 
certain  small  interval,  i.e.,  a  mass  of  hydrogen  with  its 
great  quantity  of  atoms  would  give  diffuse  spectral 
lines,  i.e.  lines  which  are  broadened  over  a  small  con¬ 
tinuous  spectral  interval.  This  is,  however,  not  the 
case ;  but  long  before  the  appearance  of  the  Bohr 
theory  it  had  been  discovered  that  the  hydrogen  lines, 
which  we  hitherto  have  considered  as  single,  possess 
what  is  called  a  fine  structure.  With  a  spectroscopic 
apparatus  of  high  resolving  power  each  line  can  be 
separated  into  two  lying  very  close  to  each  other. 
This  fine  structure  can  now  be  explained  by  the  fact 


148  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


that  in  a  stationary  state  with  quantum  number  3 
and  major  axis  of  the  orbit  2a3,  for  instance,  the  eccen¬ 
tricity  of  the  orbit  has  neither  one  single  definite  value 
nor  all  possible  values,  but,  on  the  contrary,  it  has 
several  discrete  values  of  definite  magnitude,  to  which 
there  correspond  slightly  different  but  definite  values 
of  the  energy  content  of  the  atom.  It  is  now  possible 
to  designate  the  series  of  stationary  orbits,  which  have 
the  major  axis  2 a3  with  the  principal  quantum  number  3, 
with  subscripts  giving  the  auxiliary  quantum  number 
for  stationary  orbits  corresponding  to  the  different 
eccentricities,  so  that  the  series  is  known  as  3X,  32,  33. 
Instead  of  a  single  line  corresponding  to  the  transition 
3-2,  there  are  then  obtained  several  spectral  lines  lying 
closely  together  and  corresponding  to  transitions  such 
as  33-22,  32-2!,  etc.  By  theoretical  considerations, 
requiring  considerable  mathematical  qualifications,  but 
of  essentially  the  same  formal  nature  as  those  Bohr 
had  originally  applied  to  the  determination  of  the 
stationary  orbits  in  hydrogen,  Sommerfeld  was  led  to 
certain  formal  quantum  rules  which  permit  the  fixing  of 
the  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen  atom  corresponding 
to  such  a  double  set  of  quantum  numbers.  The  results 
he  obtained  as  regards  the  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen 
lines  agree  with  observation  inside  the  limit  of  experi¬ 
mental  error. 

Although  Sommerfeld’s  methods  have  also  been  very 
fruitful  when  applied  to  the  spectra  of  other  elements, 
they  were  still  of  a  purely  formal  and  rather  arbitrary 
nature  ;  it  is,  therefore,  of  great  importance  that  the 
Leiden  professor,  Ehrenfest,  and  Bohr  succeeded  later 
in  handling  the  problem  from  a  more  fundamental  point 
of  view,  Bohr  making  use  of  the  correspondence  principle 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  149 


previously  mentioned.  It  should  be  said  here,  by  way 
of  suggestion,  that  Bohr  used  the  fact  that  the  motions 
of  the  electrons  are  not  simple  periodic  but  “multiple 
periodic.”  We  see  this  most  simply  if  we  think  of  the 
revolution  of  the  electrons  in  the  elliptical  orbit  as  repre- 


Fig.  27. — 'The  model  of  the  hydrogen  atom  with  stationary  orbits 
corresponding  to  principal  quantum  numbers  and  auxiliary 
quantum  numbers. 


senting  one  period,  and  the  rotation  for  the  major  axis 
of  the  ellipse  as  representing  a  second  period. 

Fig.  27  shows  a  number  of  the  possible  stationary 
orbits  in  the  hydrogen  atom  according  to  Sommerf eld’s 
theory  ;  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  the  orbits  are  drawn 
as  completely  closed  ellipses.  If  we  examine,  for 
instance,  the  orbits  with  principal  quantum  number  4, 
we  have  here  three  more  or  less  elongated  ellipses, 
4i,  42,  43,  and  the  circle  44 ;  in  all  of  them  the  major 


150  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


axis  has  the  same  length,  and  the  length  of  the  major 
axis  is  to  that  of  the  minor  axis  as  the  principal  quantum 
number  is  to  the  auxiliary  quantum  number  (for  the 
circle  4:4  =  1).  On  the  whole,  to  a  principal  quantum 
number  n  there  correspond  the  auxiliary  quantum 
numbers  1,  2  .  .  .  n,  and  the  orbit  for  which  the  auxiliary 
quantum  number  equals  the  principal  quantum  number 
is  a  circle.  We  see  that  in  the  more  complicated 
hydrogen  atom  model  there  is  possibility  for  a  much 
greater  number  of  different  transitions  than  in  the 
simple  model  (Fig.  25,  p.  119).  Some  of  the  transitions 
are  indicated  by  arrows.  Since  the  energy  content  of 
the  atom  is  almost  the  same  for  orbits  with  the  same 
principal  quantum  number  and  different  auxiliary 
quantum  numbers,  three  transitions  like  33-22,  32-2i 
and  31-22  will  give  about  the  same  frequency,  and 
therefore  spectral  lines  which  lie  very  close  together. 
In  a  transition  like  44~43  the  emitted  energy  quantum 
hv ,  and  also  v,  will  be  so  extremely  small  that  the 
corresponding  line  will  be  too  far  out  in  the  infra-red 
for  any  possibility  of  observing  it. 

It  must  be  pointed  out  that  the  above  considerations 
only  hold  if  the  hydrogen  atoms,  strictly  speaking,  are 
undisturbed.  Thus,  very  small  external  forces,  which 
may  be  due  to  the  neighbourhood  of  other  atoms,  etc., 
will  be  sufficient  to  cause  changes  in  the  eccentricity  of  the 
stationary  orbits.  In  such  a  case  the  above  definition 
of  the  auxiliary  quantum  number  becomes  obviously 
illusory,  and  the  original  character  of  the  fine  structure 
disappears.  This  is  in  agreement  with  the  experiments, 
since  the  Sommerfeld  fine  structure  can  be  found  only 
when  the  conditions  in  the  discharge  tube  are  especially 
quiet  and  favourable. 


THEORY  OF  HYDROGEN  SPECTRUM  151 


Influence  of  Magnetic  and  Electric  Fields  on  the  Hydrogen 
Lines. 

As  previously  mentioned  (p.  76),  the  spectral  lines 
are  split  into  three  components  when  the  atoms  emitting 
lights  are  exposed  to  magnetic  forces.  The  agreement 
found  here  between  observation  and  the  Lorentz 
electron  theory  was  considered  as  strong  evidence  of 


Fig.  28. — The  splitting  of  three  hydrogen  lines  under  the  influence 

of  a  strong  electric  field. 


the  correctness  of  the  latter.  According  to  the  Bohr 
theory,  the  picture  upon  which  this  explanation  rested 
must  be  abandoned  entirely  ;  but  fortunately  it  has 
been  shown  that  the  Bohr  theory  leads  to  the  same 
results ;  and,  moreover,  Bohr,  with  the  assistance  of  the 
correspondence  principle,  has  been  able  to  set  forth  the 
more  fundamental  reason  for  this  agreement. 

The  German  scientist,  Stark,  showed,  in  1912,  that 
hydrogen  lines  are  also  split  by  electric  fields  of  force. 
In  Fig.  28  it  is  shown  how  very  complicated  this  pheno- 


152  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

menon  is  ;  here  the  classical  electron  theory  could  not 
at  all  explain  what  happened.  This  phenomenon  could 
also  be  accounted  for  by  the  extended  Bohr  theory 
(with  the  introduction  of  more  than  one  quantum 
number),  as  it  was  shown  independently  by  Epstein 
and  by  Schwarzschild  in  1916  ;  further,  the  correspon¬ 
dence  principle  has  again  shown  its  superiority,  since  it 
makes  possible  an  approximate  determination  of  the 
different  intensities  of  the  different  lines.  A  calculation 
carried  out  by  H.  A.  Kramers  has  shown  that  the 
theory  gives  a  remarkably  good  agreement  with  the 
experiments. 

Not  until  we  think  of  the  extraordinary  accuracy  of 
the  measurements  which  are  obtained  by  spectrum 
analysis,  can  we  thoroughly  appreciate  the  importance 
of  the  quantitative  agreement  between  theory  and 
observation  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum  that  has  just 
been  mentioned.  Moreover,  we  must  remember  how 
completely  helpless  we  previously  were  in  the  strange 
puzzles  offered  even  by  the  simplest  of  all  spectra,  that 
of  hydrogen. 


CHAPTER  VI 


VARIOUS  APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR 

THEORY 


Introduction. 

We  have  dwelt  at  length  upon  the  theory  of  the 
hydrogen  spectrum  because  it  was  particularly  in  this 
relatively  simple  spectrum  that  the  Bohr  theory  first 
showed  its  fertility.  Moreover,  by  studying  the  case 
of  the  hydrogen  atom  with  its  one  electron,  it  is  easier 
to  gain  insight  into  the  fundamental  ideas  of  the  Bohr 
theory  and  its  revolutionary  character.  Naturally,  the 
theory  is  limited  neither  to  the  hydrogen  atom  nor  to 
spectral  phenomena,  but  has  a  much  more  general 
application.  As  has  already  been  said,  it  takes,  as  its 
problem,  the  explanation  of  every  one  of  the  physical 
and  chemical  properties  of  all  the  elements,  with  the 
exception  of  those  properties  known  to  be  nuclear 
(cf.  p.  94).  This  very  comprehensive  problem  can 
naturally,  even  in  its  main  outlines,  be  solved  but 
gradually  and  by  the  co-operation  of  many  scientists, 
and  it  is  quite  impossible  to  go  very  deeply  into  the 
great  work  which  has  already  been  accomplished,  and 
into  the  difficulties  which  Bohr  and  the  others  working 
on  the  problem  have  overcome.  We  must  be  content 
with  showing  some  especially  significant  features. 

153 


154  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


Different  Emission  Spectra. 

While  the  neutral  hydrogen  atom  consists  simply 
of  a  positive  nucleus  and  one  electron  revolving  about 
the  nucleus,  the  other  elements,  in  the  neutral  state, 
have  from  two  up  to  92  electrons  in  the  system  of 
electrons  revolving  around  the  nucleus.  Even  2  elec¬ 
trons,  as  in  the  helium  atom,  make  the  situation  far 
more  complicated,  since  we  have  in  this  case  a  system 
of  3  bodies  which  mutually  attract  or  repel  each  other. 
We  are  thus  confronted  with  what,  in  astronomy,  is 
known  as  the  three-body  problem,  a  problem  considered 
with  respect  by  all  mathematicians  on  account  of  its 
difficulties.  In  astronomy,  the  difficulties  are  restricted 
very  much  when  the  mass  of  one  body  is  many  times 
greater  than  that  of  the  others,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
mass  of  the  sun  in  relation  to  that  of  the  other  planets. 
Here,  by  comparatively  simple  methods,  it  is  possible 
to  calculate  the  motions  inside  a  finite  time-interval 
with  a  high  degree  of  approximation  even  when  there 
are  not  two  but  many  planets  involved. 

We  might  now  be  tempted  to  believe  that  in  the 
atom  we  had  to  deal  with  comparatively  simple  systems 
— solar  systems  on  small  scale — since  the  mass  of  the 
nucelus  is  many  times  greater  than  that  of  the  electrons. 
But  even  if  the  suggested  comparison  illustrates  the 
position  of  the  nucleus  as  the  central  body  which  holds 
the  electrons  together  by  its  power  of  attraction,  the 
comparison  in  other  respects  is  misleading.  While 
the  orbits  of  the  planets  in  the  solar  system  may  be  at 
any  distance  whatsoever  from  the  sun,  and  the  motions 
of  the  planets  are  everywhere  governed  by  the  laws 
of  mechanics,  the  atomic  processes,  according  to  the 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  155 


Bohr  theory,  are  characterized  by  certain  stationary 
states,  and  only  in  these  can  the  laws  of  mechanics 
possibly  be  applied.  But  in  addition,  the  forces  between 
nucleus  and  electrons  are  determined  not  at  all  by  the 
masses,  but  rather  by  the  electric  charges.  In  the 
helium  atom  the  nuclear  charge  is  only  double  that  of 
an  electron,  and  the  attraction  of  the  nucleus  for  an 
electron  will  therefore  be  only  twice  as  large  as  the 
repulsions  between  two  electrons  at  the  same  distance 
apart.  This  repulsion  under  these  circumstances  will, 
therefore,  also  have  great  influence  on  the  ensuing 
motion.  In  elements  with  higher  atomic  numbers  the 
nuclear  charge  has  greater  predominance  over  the 
electron  charges ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  there  are  then 
more  electrons.  The  situation  is  in  each  case  more 
complicated  than  in  the  hydrogen  atom. 

Nevertheless,  the  line  spectra  of  the  elements  of 
higher  atomic  number  show  how  the  lines,  as  in  the 
hydrogen  spectrum,  are  arranged  in  series  although  in 
a  more  complicated  manner  (cf.  p.  59)  ;  in  any  case 
in  many  instances  there  is  great  similarity  between  the 
radiation  from  the  hydrogen  atom  and  that  from  the 
more  complicated  atoms.  Thus  in  the  line  spectra  of 
many  elements,  just  as  in  that  of  hydrogen,  the  frequency 
v  of  every  line  can  be  expressed  as  a  difference  between 
two  terms ,  involving  certain  integers  which  can  pass 
through  a  series  of  values.  From  the  combinations  of 
terms,  two  at  a  time,  the  values  of  v  corresponding  to 
the  different  spectral  lines  can  be  derived.  This  so- 
called  combination  principle  enunciated  by  the  Swiss 
physicist,  Ritz,  can  evidently  be  directly  interpreted  on 
the  basis  of  Bohr’s  postulates,  since  the  different  com¬ 
binations  may  be  assumed  to  correspond  to  definite 


156  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


atomic  processes,  in  which  there  is  a  transition  between 
two  stationary  states,  each  of  which  corresponds  to  a 
spectral  term. 

Moreover,  the  terms  (cf.  p.  59)  may  often  be 
approximately  given  by  the  Rydberg  formula 

K 

(w  +  a)2 

where  K  has  about  the  same  value  as  in  hydrogen,  and 
a  can  take  on  a  series  of  values  otv  cc2  .  .  .  uk,  while  n 
takes  on  integer  values.  Since  we  thus  determine  the 
different  lines  by  assigning  values  to  the  two  integers 
n  and  k  in  each  term,  we  have  in  this  respect  something 
like  the  fine  structure  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  where 
the  stationary  states  are  determined  by  a  principal 
quantum  number  and  an  auxiliary  quantum  number. 
The  spectra  of  which  we  are  speaking  here,  and  for 
which  the  terms  have  the  form  given  above,  are  often 
called  arc  spectra,  because  they- are  emitted  particularly 
in  the  light  from  the  electric  arc  or  from  the  vacuum 
tube.  We  must  expect  that  the  similarity  which  exists 
in  the  law  for  the  distribution  of  spectral  lines  will 
correspond  to  a  similarity  in  the  atomic  processes  of 
hydrogen  and  the  other  elements. 

The  hydrogen  atom  emits  radiation  corresponding 
to  the  different  spectral  lines  when  an  electron  from  an 
outer  stationary  orbit  jumps,  with  a  spring  of  varying 
size,  to  an  orbit  with  lower  number,  and  at  last  finds  rest 
in  the  innermost  orbit  in  a  normal  state,  where  the  energy 
of  the  atom  is  as  small  as  possible.  Similarly,  we  must 
assume  that  the  electrons  in  other  atoms,  during  processes 
of  radiation,  may  proceed  in  towards  the  nucleus  until 
they  are  collected  as  tightly  as  possible  about  the 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  157 


nucleus,  corresponding  to  the  normal  state  of  the  atom, 
where  its  energy  content  is  as  small  as  possible  : 
“  capture  ”  of  electrons  by  the  nucleus.  The  region  in 
space  which,  in  the  normal  state,  includes  the  entire 
electron  system,  must  be  assumed  to  be  of  the  same  order 
of  magnitude  as  the  dimensions  of  the  atom  and  molecule 
which  are  derived  from  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases. 
This  normal  state  may  be  called  a  “  quiescent  ”  state, 
since  the  atom  cannot  emit  radiation  until  it  has  been 
excited  by  the  introduction  of  energy  from  without. 
This  excitation  process  consists  of  freeing  one  (or  more) 
electrons,  in  some  way  or  other,  from  the  normal  state 
and  either  removing  it  out  to  a  stationary  orbit  farther 
away  from  the  nucleus  or  ejecting  it  completely  from 
the  atom.  Not  all  electrons  can  be  equally  easily 
removed  from  the  quiescent  state.  Those  moving  in 
small  orbits  near  the  nucleus  will  be  tighter  bound 
than  those  moving  in  larger  orbits  farther  from  the 
nucleus.  The  arc  spectrum  is  now  caused  by  driving 
one  of  the  most  loosely  bound  electrons  out  into  an 
orbit  farther  from  the  nucleus  or  removing  it  com¬ 
pletely  from  the  atom.  In  the  latter  case  the  rest  of 
the  atom,  which  with  the  loss  of  the  negative  electron 
becomes  a  positive  ion,  easily  binds  another  electron, 
which,  with  the  emission  of  radiation,  corresponding  to 
lines  of  the  series  spectrum,  can  approach  closer  to 
the  nucleus. 

Let  us  now  assume,  first,  that  this  radiating  electron 
moves  at  so  great  a  distance  from  the  nucleus  and  the 
other  electrons  that  the  entire  inner  system  can  be 
considered  as  concentrated  in  one  point  ;  then  the 
situation  is  quite  as  if  we  had  to  deal  with  a  hydrogen 
atom.  If  the  atomic  number  is  as  high  as  29  (copper), 


158  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


for  instance,  the  nuclear  charge  will  consist  of  twenty-nine 
elementary  quanta  of  positive  electricity ;  but  since 
there  are  twenty-eight  electrons  in  the  inner  system, 
the  resultant  effect  is  that  of  only  one  elementary 
quantum  of  positive  electricity,  as  in  the  case  of  a 
hydrogen  nucleus.  The  spectral  lines  which  are  emitted 
in  the  jumps  between  the  more  distant  paths  will  be 
practically  the  same  as  hydrogen  lines.  But,  since  in 
the  jumps  between  these  distant  orbits,  very  small 
energy  quanta  will  be  emitted,  the  frequencies  are  very 
small,  the  wave-lengths  very  great,  i.e.,  the  lines  in 
question  lie  far  out  in  the  infra-red. 

When  the  electron  has  come  in  so  close  to  the  nucleus 
that  the  distances  in  the  inner  system  cannot  be  assumed 
to  be  small  in  comparison  to  the  distance  of  the  outer 
electron  from  the  nucleus,  the  situation  is  changed. 
The  force  with  which  the  nucleus  and  the  inner  electrons 
together  will  work  upon  the  outer  electron  will  be  appreci¬ 
ably  different  from  the  inverse  square  law  of  attraction 
of  a  point  charge.  The  consequence  of  this  difference 
is  that  the  major  axis  in  the  ellipse  of  the  electron 
rotates  slowly  in  the  plane  of  the  orbit  as  described  in 
case  of  the  theory  of  the  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen 
lines  (cf.  p.  146),  and  even  if  the  cause  is  different  the 
result  is  the  same  ;  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron 
in  the  stationary  states  will  be  characterized  by  a 
quantum  number  n  and  an  auxiliary  quantum  number  k. 
If  the  electron  comes  still  closer  to  the  nucleus,  its 
motion  is  even  more  complicated.  When  the  electron 
in  its  revolution  is  nearest  the  nucleus  it  will  be  able  to 
dive  into  the  region  of  the  inner  electrons,  and  we  can 
get  motions  like  those  shown  in  Fig.  29  for  one  of  the 
eleven  sodium  electrons.  The  inner  dotted  circle  is 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  159 


the  boundary  of  the  inner  system  which  is  given  by 
the  nucleus  and  the  ten  electrons  remaining  in  the 
“  quiescent  ”  state — little  disturbed  by  the  restless 


Fig.  29. — Different  stationary  orbits  which  the  outermost  (nth) 
electron  of  sodium  may  describe. 

No.  11.  In  the  figure  we  can  see  greater  or  smaller 
parts  of  No.  n’s  different  stationary  orbits  with 
principal  quantum  numbers  3  and  4.  We  shall  not 
account  further  for  the  different  orbits  and  the  spectral 
lines  produced  by  the  transitions  between  orbits,  but 


160  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

shall  merely  remark  that  the  yellow  sodium  line,  which 
corresponds  to  the  Fraunhofer  D-line  (cf.  p.  49)  > 
produced  by  the  transition  32-3i,  between  two  orbits 
with  the  same  principal  quantum  number.  The  sketch 
shows  to  a  certain  degree  how  fully  many  details  of 
the  atomic  processes  can  already  be  explained.  The 
theory  can  even  give  a  natural  explanation  of  why  the 

D-line  is  double. 

We  have  restricted  ourselves  to  the  case  where  only 
one  electron  is  removed  from  the  normal  state  of  the 
neutral  atom.  It  may,  however,  happen  that  two  elec¬ 
trons  are  ejected  from  the  atom  so  that  it  becomes  a 
positive  ion  with  two  charges.  When  an  electron  from 
the  outside  is  approaching  this  doubly  charged  ion  it 
will,  at  a  distance,  be  acted  upon  as  if  the  ion  were  a 
helium  nucleus  with  two  positive  charges.  The  situa¬ 
tion,  in  other  words,  will  be  as  in  the  case  of  the  false 
hydrogen  spectrum  (cf.  p.  I42)>  where  the  constant  K 
in  the  formula  for  the  hydrogen  spectrum  is  replaced  by 
another  which  is  very  close  to  4^*  But  if  the  atom  is 
not  one  of  helium,  but  one  with  a  higher  atomic  number, 
the  stationary  orbits  of  the  outer  electron  which  approach 
closely  to  the  nucleus  will  not  coincide  exactly  with  those 
in  the  ionized  helium  atom,  corresponding  to  the  fact 
that  the  terms  in  the  formula  for  the  spectrum,  instead 
of  the  simple  form  4K/#2,  have  the  more  complicated 
form  4K /(w  +  a)2.  Spectra  of  this  nature  are  often 
called  spark  spectra,  since  they  appear  especially  strong  in 
electric  sparks  ;  they  appear  also  in  light  from  vacuum 
tubes,  when  an  interruptor  is  placed  in  the  circuit, 
making  the  discharge  intermittent  and  more  intense. 

An  atom  with  several  electrons  can,  however,  be 
much  more  violently  excited  from  its  quiescent  state 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  161 


when  an  electron  in  the  inner  region  of  the  atom  is 
ejected  by  a  swiftly  moving  electron  (a  cathode  ray 
particle  or  a  /3-particle  from  radium)  which  travels 
through  the  atom.  Such  an  invasion  produces  a  serious 
disturbance  in  the  stability  of  the  electron  system  ;  a 
reconstruction  follows,  in  which  one  of  the  outer,  more 
loosely  bound  electrons  takes  the  vacant  position.  In 
the  transitions,  in  which  these  outer  electrons  come  in, 
rather  large  energy  quanta  are  emitted.  The  emitted 
radiation  has  therefore  a  very  high  frequency  ;  mono¬ 
chromatic  X-rays  are  thus  emitted.  Since  these  have 
their  origin  in  processes  far  within  the  atom,  it  can  be 
understood  that  the  different  elements  have  different 
characteristic  X-ray  spectra,  which  can  give  very 
valuable  information  about  the  structure  of  the  electron 
system  (cf.  p.  91). 

Between  these  X-ray  spectra  and  the  series  spectra 
previously  mentioned  there  lie,  as  connecting  links, 
those  spectra  which  are  produced  when  electrons  are 
ejected  from  a  group  in  the  atom  which  does  not  belong 
to  the  innermost  group,  but  does  not,  on  the  other  hand, 
belong  in  the  outermost  group  in  the  normal  atom.  We 
have  very  little  experimental  knowledge  about  such 
spectra,  because  the  spectral  lines  involved  have  wave¬ 
lengths  lying  between  about  1*5  and  100  fjbfju.  Rays 
with  these  wave-lengths  are  absorbed  very  easily  by  all 
possible  substances ;  they  have  very  little  effect  on 
photographic  plates,  where  they  are  absorbed  by  the 
gelatine  coating  before  they  have  an  opportunity  to 
influence  the  molecules  susceptible  to  light.  But  there 
can  be  scarcely  any  doubt  that,  in  the  course  of  a  few 
years,  experimental  technique  will  have  reached  such 
efficiency  that  this  domain  of  the  spectrum,  so  important 


162  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


for  the  atomic  theory,  will  also  become  accessible  to 
experiment.  In  individual  cases,  wave-lengths  as  small 
as  20  [Jj[l  have  already  been  obtained  by  Millikan. 

Of  entirely  different  character  from  these  spectra 
are  the  band  spectra.  They  are  in  general  produced  by 
electric  discharges  through  gases  which  are  not  very 
highly  attenuated  (cf.  p.  55)  ;  they  are  not  due  to  purely 
atomic  processes,  but  can  be  designated  as  molecular 
spectra.  Their  special  character  is  due  to  motions  in  the 
molecule,  not  only  motions  of  the  electrons,  but  also  oscil¬ 
lations  and  rotations  of  the  nuclei  about  each  other. 
We  shall  not  go  into  these  problems  here  ;  in  what 
follows  we  shall  investigate  a  certain  type  of  band 
spectra  somewhat  more  closely  in  connection  with  the 
absorption  of  radiation. 

While  the  band  spectra  with  a  spectroscope  of  high 
resolving  power  can  be  more  or  less  completely  resolved 
into  lines,  this  is  not  the  case  with  the  continuous  spectra. 
They  are  emitted  not  only  by  glowing  solids  (cf.  p.  54), 
but  also  by  many  gaseous  substances.  When  such 
gases  are  exposed  to  electric  discharges  they  emit,  in 
addition  to  the  line  spectra  and  band  spectra,  continuous 
spectra  which  in  certain  parts  of  the  spectrum  furnish  a 
background  for  bright  lines  which  come  out  more  strongly. 
It  might  seem  impossible  to  correlate  these  with  the 
Bohr  theory  ;  but  in  reality  a  spectrum  does  not  always 
have  to  consist  of  sharp  lines.  This  can  at  once  be  seen 
from  the  correspondence  principle.  If  the  motions  in  the 
stationary  states  are  of  such  nature  that  they  can  be 
resolved  into  a  number  of  discrete  harmonic  oscillations 
each  with  its  own  period  (for  instance  the  orbit  of  an 
electron  in  a  rotating  ellipse ;  cf.  p.  149),  then,  according 
to  the  correspondence  principle,  in  the  transition 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  163 


between  two  such  stationary  states  there  are  produced 
sharp  spectral  lines  “  corresponding  ”  to  these  harmonic 
components.  But  not  all  motions  of  atomic  systems 
can  be  thus  resolved  into  a  number  of  definite  harmonic 
oscillations.  When  this  cannot  be  done,  the  stationary 
states  cannot  be  expected  to  be  such  that  transitions 
between  them  produce  radiation  which  can  be  resolved 
into  sharp  lines. 

A  simple  example,  where  it  is  easily  intelligible  that 
the  Bohr  theory  will  not  lead  to  sharp  lines,  is  obtained 
in  a  simple  consideration  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  Let 
us  examine  the  lines  belonging  to  the  Balmer  series 
which  are  produced  when  an  electron  passes  to  the  No.  2 
orbit  from  an  orbit  with  higher  orbit  number,  which  is 
farther  from  the  nucleus.  As  has  been  said,  we  obtain 
here  an  upper  limit  for  the  frequency  corresponding  to  a 
value  of  the  outer  orbit  number  which  is  infinite  ;  this 
means,  in  reality,  that  the  electron  in  one  jump  comes 
in  from  a  distance  so  great  that  the  attraction  of  the 
nucleus  is  infinitely  small.  The  energy  released  by  such 
a  jump  is  the  same  as  the  ionizing  energy  A2  which  is 
required  to  eject  the  electron  from  the  orbit  No.  2  and 
drive  it  from  the  atom.  It  is  here  assumed,  however, 
that  the  electron  out  in  the  distance  was  practically  at 
rest.  If  the  captured  electron  has  a  certain  initial 
velocity  outside,  it  will  have  a  corresponding  kinetic 
energy  A.  When  in  one  jump  this  electron  comes  from 
the  outside  into  orbit  No.  2,  the  energy  lost  by  the 
electron  and  emitted  in  the  form  of  radiation  will  be  the 
sum  of  the  ionizing  energy  A2  and  the  original  kinetic 
energy  A.  The  frequency  v  will  then  become  greater  than 
that  corresponding  to  A2 ;  and  since  the  velocity  of  the 
electron  before  it  is  captured  is  not  restricted  to  certain 


164  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


definite  values,  neither  is  the  value  of  v.  The  radiation 
from  a  great  quantity  of  hydrogen  atoms  which  are 
binding  electrons  in  this  way  will,  in  the  spectrum,  not 
be  concentrated  in  certain  lines,  but  will  be  distributed 
over  a  region  in  the  ultra-violet  which  lies  outside  of  the 
limit  calculated  from  the  Balmer  formula  ;  still  in  a 
certain  sense  this  continuous  spectrum  is  correlated  with 
the  Balmer  series.  In  the  spectra  from  certain  stars 
there  has  actually  been  discovered  a  continuous  spectrum, 
which  lies  beyond  the  limits  of  the  Balmer  series  and 
may  be  said  to  continue  it. 

Also  the  X-rays,  which  are  generally  used  in  medicine, 
have  varying  frequencies  ;  this  is  caused  by  the  fact  that 
some  of  the  electrons  which,  in  an  X-ray  tube,  strike  the 
atoms  of  the  anticathode  and  travel  far  into  it  at  a  high 
speed,  lose  a  part  or  all  of  their  velocity  without  ejecting 
inner  electrons.  The  lost  kinetic  energy  then  appears 
directly  as  radiation.  These  remarks  ought  to  be  sufficient 
to  show  that  the  radiation,  for  instance,  from  a  glowing 
body,  where  the  interplay  of  atoms  and  molecules  is  very 
complicated,  can  give  a  continuous  spectrum. 

Electron  Collisions. 

The  excitation  of  an  atom  in  the  normal  state  (cf.  p. 
157),  by  which  one  of  its  electrons  is  removed  to  an  outer 
stationary  orbit,  may  be  caused  by  a  foreign  electron 
which  strikes  the  atom.  A  study  of  collisions  between 
atoms  and  free  electrons  is  therefore  of  the  greatest 
importance  when  investigating  more  closely  the  condi¬ 
tions  by  which  series  spectra  are  produced. 

These  investigations  can  be  carried  out  by  giving 
free  electrons  definite  velocities  by  letting  them  pass 
through  an  electric  field,  where  the  “  difference  of 


I 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOIIR  THEORY  105 

potential  ”  is  known  in  the  path  traversed  by  the 

electrons.  When  an  electron  moves  through  a  region 

with  a  difference  of  potential  of  one  volt  (the  usual 

technical  unit),  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  electron  will 

be  increased  by  a  definite  amount  (of  i-6xicr12  erg).  ! 

If  its  initial  velocity  is  zero,  its  passage  through  this  1 

field  will  make  the  velocity  600  km.  per  second  ;  if  the 

potential  difference  were  4  volts,  9  volts,  etc.,  the  velocity 

obtained  by  the  electron  would  be  2,  3,  etc.,  times  larger. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  we  shall  say  that  the  kinetic 
energy  of  an  electron  is,  for  instance,  15  volts,  when  we 
mean  that  the  kinetic  energy  is  as  great  as  would  be 
given  by  a  difference  of  potential  of  15  volts. 

In  1913  the  German  physicist  Franck  began  a  series 
of  experiments  by  methods  which  made  it  possible  to 
regulate  accurately  the  velocity  of  the  electrons,  and  to 
determine  the  kinetic  energy  before  and  after  collisions 
with  atoms.  He  first  applied  the  methods  to  mercury 
vapour,  where  the  conditions  are  particularly  simple, 
since  the  mercury  molecules  consist  of  only  one  atom. 

Franck  bombarded  mercury  vapour  with  electrons  all 
of  which  had  the  same  velocity.  He  then  showed  that 
if  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  electrons  was  less  than  4-9 
volts  the  collisions  with  the  atoms  were  completely 
“  elastic,”  i.e.}  the  direction  of  the  electron  could  be 
changed  by  the  collision,  but  not  its  velocity.  If,  how¬ 
ever,  the  velocity  of  the  impinging  electrons  was  in¬ 
creased  so  much  that  it  was  somewhat  larger  than  4-9 
volts,  there  was  an  abrupt  change  in  the  situation, 
since  many  of  the  collisions  became  completely  inelastic, 
i.e.,  the  colliding  electron  lost  its  entire  velocity  and  gave 
up  its  entire  kinetic  energy  to  the  atom.  If  the  initial 
velocity  was  even  greater,  so  that  the  kinetic  energy  of 


k 


166  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


the  colliding  electron  was  6  volts,  for  instance,  then  when 
the  collision  took  place  there  would  always  be  lost  a 
kinetic  energy  of  4*9  volts,  since  the  electrons  would 
either  preserve  their  kinetic  energy  intact  or  have  it 
reduced  to  i-i  volt  (cf.  Fig.  30). 

This  remarkable  phenomenon  can  be  understood 


6  Volt. 


R 


Fig.  30. — Schematic  drawing  of  Franck's  experiment  with  electron 
collisions.  G  is  a  glowing  metal  wire  which  emits  electrons. 
If  between  G  and  the  wire  net  T  there  is  a  difference  of 
potential  of  6  volts,  the  electrons  will  pass  through  the  holes 
of  the  net  with  great  velocity  out  into  the  space  R,  where 
there  is  mercury  vapour,  a  represents  a  free  electron  F  and 
a  mercury  atom  Hg  before  the  collision,  while  b  represents 
them  after  the  collision  ;  with  the  collision  F  loses  a  kinetic 
energy  corresponding  to  4-9  volts  ;  at  the  same  time  a  bound 
electron  B  in  the  atom  goes  over  to  a  larger  stationary  orbit. 


from  the  Bohr  theory  if  we  assume  that  to  send  the  most 
loosely  bound  electron  in  the  mercury  atom  out  to  the 
nearest  outer  stationary  orbit  there  is  required  an 
energy  of  4-9  volts,  since  in  that  case,  according  to  the 
first  postulate,  an  energy  of  less  than  this  magnitude 
cannot  be  absorbed  by  the  atom.  The  use  of  the  word 
“  understanding  ”  must  here  be  qualified  ;  if  the  forces 
which  influence  the  free  electron  as  it  comes  into  the 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  167 

electron  system  of  the  mercury  atom  are  no  other  than 
the  usual  repulsion  from  the  electrons  and  the  attraction 
from  the  nucleus,  the  conduct  of  the  colliding  electron  can 
in  no  way  be  explained  by  the  laws  of  mechanics.  But 
what  happens  is  in  agreement  with  the  characteristic 
stability  of  the  stationary  states,  and  Bohr  had  pro¬ 
phesied  how  it  would  happen.  Curiously  enough  Franck 
believed  in  the  beginning  that  his  experiment  disagreed 
with  the  Bohr  theory  because  he  made  the  mistake  of 
supposing  that  what  happened  was  merely  ionization, 
i.e.,  complete  disruption  of  a  bound  electron  from  a 
mercury  atom. 

Franck’s  experiments  showed,  moreover,  that  mercury 
vapour,  as  soon  as  the  inelastic  collisions  appeared,  began 
to  emit  ultra-violet  light  of  a  definite  wave-length, 
namely,  253*7  ft  ft-  The  product  of  the  frequency  v  of 
this  light  and  Planck’s  constant  h  agrees  exactly  with 
the  energy  quantum  possessed  by  an  electron  which 
has  passed  a  potential  difference  of  4-9  volts  ;  but  this 
also  agrees  with  what  might  be  expected,  according  to 
the  Bohr  theory,  from  the  radiation  the  removed  electron 
would  emit  upon  returning  to  the  normal  state.  The 
energy  which  is  respectively  absorbed  and  emitted  in 
the  two  transitions  must  be  indeed  hv. 

Since  an  electron  can  not  only  be  driven  out  to  the 
next  stationary  orbit,  but  also  to  an  even  more  distant 
one  (or  entirely  ejected)  and  thence  can  come  in  again 
in  one  or  more  jumps,  it  is  evident  that  a  far  more 
complicated  situation  may  arise.  The  Franck  experi¬ 
ment,  which  now  has  been  extended  to  many  othei 
elements,  clearly  gives  extraordinarily  valuable  informa¬ 
tion  in  such  cases.  In  mercury  it  has  been  found  that 
the  energy  a  free  electron  must  have  in  order  to  eject  an 


168  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


electron  from  an  atom  and  turn  the  atom  into  a  positive 
ion,  corresponds  to  a  difference  of  potential  of  io*8  volts, 
a  value  which  Bohr  had  predicted.  At  the  same  time 
that  Franck’s  experiments,  in  this  respect  and  in  others, 
have  strengthened  the  Bohr  theory  in  the  most  satis¬ 
factory  way,  they  have  also  advanced  its  development 
very  much.  Indeed  it  may  be  said  that  they  have  been 
of  the  greatest  help  in  atomic  research.  Even  if  the 
spectroscope  has  greater  importance,  the  investigations 
on  electron  collisions  make  the  realities  in  the  Bohr 
theory  accessible  to  study  in  a  more  direct  and  palpable 
manner. 


Fig.  31. — Stratification  of  light  in  a  vacuum  tube. 


The  peculiarities  in  the  electron  collisions  appear 
most  clearly  in  an  old  and  well-known  phenomenon  of 
light,  namely,  the  stratification  of  the  light  in  a  vacuum 
tube  (Fig.  31).  This  stratification,  which  previously 
seemed  so  incomprehensible,  agrees  exactly  with  the 
feature  so  fundamental  in  the  atomic  theory  that  a  free 
electron  cannot  give  energy  under  a  certain  quantum  to 
an  atom.  We  can  imagine  that,  in  the  non-illuminated 
central  space  between  the  bright  strata,  the  electrons 
each  time  under  the  influence  of  the  outer  electric  field 
obtain  the  amount  of  kinetic  energy  which  must  serve  to 
excite  the  atoms  of  the  attenuated  vapour. 

As  has  been  said  (p.  161) ,  electron  collisions  may  cause 
the  emission  of  characteristic  X-rays  ;  but  to  produce 


v  ■ 

\ 

APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  169 

them  very  great  energy  is  required.  Therefore  the  elec¬ 
trons  which  are  to  produce  this  effect  must  have  an 
opportunity  to  pass  freely  through  a  certain  region  under 
the  influence  of  a  proportionately  strong  electric  field 
(with  potential  of  from  1000  to  100,000  volts  and  more). 
The  electrons  find  such  a  field  in  a  highly  exhausted 
X-ray  tube,  where  the  electrons  under  strong  potential 
are  driven  from  the  cathode  against  the  anti-cathode, 
into  which  they  penetrate  deeply. 

Absorption. 

In  the  experiments  previously  described  it  was  the 
electron  collisions  which  furnished  the  energy  required 
to  excite  the  atoms,  i.e.,  to  carry  them  from  the  normal 
state  over  into  a  stationary  state  with  greater  energy. 
This  “  excitation  energy  ”  may,  however,  also  be 
furnished  to  the  atoms  in  the  form  of  radiation  energy  ; 
we  shall  now  examine  this  case  more  closely. 

Let  us  assume  that  to  transfer  an  atom  from  the 
normal  state  to  another  stationary  state,  or,  in  other 
words,  to  transfer  one  of  the  electrons  to  an  outer  sta¬ 
tionary  orbit,  a  certain  quantity  of  energy  E  is  demanded  ; 
then  the  radiation  emitted  by  the  atom  when  it  returns 
to  the  normal  state  will  have  a  frequency  v  depending 
upon  the  relation  E  —hv  or  j/=E/A,  where  h,  as  usual, 
is  the  Planck  constant.  But  just  as  the  atom  in  the 
transition  from  the  stationary  state  to  the  normal  state 
can  emit  radiation  only  with  the  definite  frequency  v,  then 
the  opposite  transition  can  only  be  performed  by  absorp¬ 
tion  of  radiation  with  the  same  frequency  ;  when  this 
happens  the  absorbed  radiation  energy  has  exactly  the 
value  E  —hv. 

This  reciprocity,  which  may  be  considered  as  a 


170  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


direct  consequence  of  the  Bohr  postulates,  agrees  with 
what  has  been  said  (cf.  p.  50)  about  the  correspon¬ 
dence  between  the  lines  in  the  line  spectrum  of  an 
element  and  the  dark  absorption  lines  of  that  element — 
e.g.,  the  Fraunhofer  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum.  Let 
us  examine,  as  an  example,  the  yellow  sodium  line, 
the  D-line.  Light  with  the  corresponding  frequency, 
526  X  io12  vibrations  per  second,  is  emitted  by  a  sodium 
atom,  when  the  loosest  bound  electron  goes  over  from  a 
stationary  orbit  with  quantum  numbers  32  to  the  orbit  3X, 
which  belongs  to  the  normal  state  of  the  sodium  atom. 
The  transition  in  the  opposite  direction,  3X  to  32,  can 
take  place  under  absorption  of  radiation  only  when  in 
the  light  from  some  other  source  of  light,  which  passes 
the  sodium  atoms,  there  are  found  rays  with  the  fre¬ 
quency  526  X  io12.  Even  if  there  is  present  radiation 
energy  with  some  other  frequency,  the  sodium  atoms 
take  no  notice  of  this  energy  ;  they  ‘absorb  only  rays 
with  the  frequency  stated,  and  every  time  an  atom 
absorbs  energy  from  a  ray  the  energy  taken  is  always 
an  energy  quantum  of  the  magnitude  hv,  i.e.  about 
6-54  x  io-27  x  526  x  io12  =3  44  x  io-12  ergs  (1  erg  is  the  unit 
of  energy  used  in  the  determination  of  h).  When  there 
are  present  a  large  number  of  sodium  atoms  (as,  for 
instance,  in  the  previously  mentioned  common  salt 
flame),  the  transition  3X  to  32  can  take  place  in  some 
atoms,  the  transition  32  to  3X  in  others  ;  therefore,  at 
the  same  time  there  can  be  absorption  and  radiation 
of  the  light  in  question.  Whether  absorption  or 
radiation  at  any  given  time  has  the  upper  hand  depends 
upon  various  conditions  (temperature,  etc.). 

For  the  sake  of  simplicity  we  have  here  tacitly 
understood  that  there  can  be  but  one  definite  transition 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  171 


(from  the  normal  state)  corresponding  to  the  assumption 
that  the  sodium  spectrum  had  no  other  lines  than  the 
D-line.  In  reality  this  is  not  the  case,  and  there  can 
equally  occur  absorption  of  rays  with  larger  frequencies 
belonging  to  other  spectral  lines  in  the  sodium  atom  and 
corresponding  to  other  possible  transitions  between 
stationary  states  in  the  sodium  atom.  If  the  tem¬ 
perature  of  the  sodium  vapour  is  sufficiently  low,  in 
which  case  almost  all  the  atoms  are  in  the  normal  state, 
it  is  evident  that  in  the  absorption  only  those  lines  will 
appear  which  correspond  to  transitions  from  the  normal 
state,  and  which  therefore  form  only  a  part  of  all  the 
lines  of  the  sodium  spectrum.  We  thus  obtain  an  ex¬ 
planation  of  the  previously  enigmatical  circumstance  that 
not  all  spectral  lines  which  can  appear  in  emission  will 
be  found  in  absorption.  At  the  same  time  we  get,  in 
absorption  experiments,  valuable  information  about  the 
structure  of  the  atom  beyond  what  the  observations  in 
the  emission  spectra  are  able  to  give. 

Interesting  phenomena  may  arise  owing  to  the  fact 
that  the  jumps  between  the  stationary  states  of  the  atom 
sometimes,  as  we  know,  take  place  in  single  jumps, 
sometimes  in  double  or  multiple  jumps,  so  that  the  inter¬ 
mediate  stationary  states  are  jumped  over.  There  is 
then  evidently  a  possibility  that  absorption  can  take 
place,  for  instance,  with  a  double  jump  of  an  electron, 
which  may  later  return  to  the  original  stationary  orbit 
in  two  single  jumps.  The  absorbed  radiation  energy 
will  then  appear  in  emission  with  two  frequencies  which 
are  entirely  different  from  the  frequency  of  the  absorbed 
rays  (this  latter  in  this  case  will  be  the  sum  of  the  other 
two).  When  an  element  is  illuminated  with  a  certain 
kind  of  rays,  it  can,  in  other  words,  emit  in  return  rays 


172  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


of  a  different  nature.  Such  changes  of  frequencies  have 
also  been  observed  in  experiment  ;  they  contain,  in 
principle,  an  explanation  of  the  characteristic  phenom¬ 
enon  called  fluorescence. 

We  shall  not  go  further  into  this  problem,  but  dwell 
for  a  time  on  the  characteristic  phenomenon  of  ab¬ 
sorption  which  is  known  as  the  photo-electric  effect.  In 
this  phenomenon  (cf.  p.  116)  a  metal  plate,  by  illumina¬ 
tion  with  ultra-violet  light,  is  made  to  send  out  electrons 
with  velocities  the  maximum  value  of  which  is  in¬ 
dependent  of  the  strength  of  the  illumination,  but 
depends  only  on  the  frequency  of  the  rays.  What 
happens  is  that  some  of  the  electrons  in  the  metal  which 
otherwise  have,  as  their  function,  the  conduction  of 
the  electric  current,  by  absorbing  radiation  energy,  free 
themselves  from  the  metal  and  leave  it  with  a  certain 
velocity.  The  reason  why  the  rays  for  most  metals 
must  be  ultra-violet  (i.e.  have  a  high  frequency  and 
consequently  correspond  to  a  proportionately  large 
energy  quantum)  depends  upon  the  fact  that  the  energy 
quantum  absorbed  by  the  electrons  must  be  large 
enough  to  carry  out  the  work  of  freeing  the  electrons. 
But  as  long  as  the  frequency  of  the  rays  (and  therefore 
their  energy  quantum)  is  no  less  than  what  is  needed  for 
the  freeing  process,  it  does  not  need  to  have  certain  fixed 
values.  If  the  energy  quantum  hv  which  the  rays  can 
give  off  is  greater  than  is  required  to  free  the  electrons, 
the  surplus  becomes  kinetic  energy  in  the  electrons, 
which  thus  acquire  a  velocity  which  is  the  greater  the 
greater  the  frequency  v,  and  which  coincides  with  the 
maximum  velocity  observed  in  the  experiments.  What 
happens  here  is  evidently  something  which  can  be 
considered  as  the  reverse  of  the  process  which  leads 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  173 


to  the  production  of  the  continuous  hydrogen  spectrum 
(described  on  p.  163).  In  the  latter  case,  electrons  with 
different  velocities  are  bound  by  the  hydrogen  atoms, 
which  thus  emit  rays  with  frequencies  increasing  with 
increasing  velocity,  while,  vice  versa,  in  the  photo¬ 
electric  effect  rays  with  different  frequencies  free  the 
electrons  and  give  them  velocities  increasing  with 
increasing  frequencies. 

It  must  be  acknowledged  that  there  is  something 
very  curious  in  this  effect.  If  the  electromagnetic 
waves,  as  has  been  assumed,  are  distributed  evenly  over 
the  field  of  radiation,  it  is  not  easy  to  understand  why 
they  give  energy  to  some  atoms  and  not  to  others,  and 
why  the  selected  ones  always — with  a  given  frequency 
— acquire  a  definite  energy  quantum,  independent  of  the 
intensity  of  the  radiation.  For  small  intensities  of  the 
incident  radiation,  the  atom,  in  order  to  acquire  the 
proper  quantum,  must  absorb  energy  from  a  greater 
part  of  the  field  of  radiation  (or  for  a  longer  time)  than 
for  large  intensities.  When  the  atoms  acquire  energy 
in  electron  collisions,  the  situation  is  apparently  easier 
to  understand,  since  in  this  case  the  colliding  electrons 
give  their  kinetic  energy  to  definite  atoms,  namely, 
those  which  they  strike. 

Einstein,  in  1905,  when  there  was  not  yet  any  talk 
of  the  nuclear  atom  or  the  Bohr  theory,  enunciated  his 
theory  of  light  quanta,  according  to  which  the  energy 
of  radiation  is  not  only  emitted  and  absorbed  by  the 
atoms  in  certain  quanta,  with  magnitudes  determined 
by  the  frequency  v,  but  is  also  present  in  the  field  of 
radiation  in  such  quanta.  When  an  atom  emits  an 
energy  quantum  hv,  this  energy  will  not  spread  out  in 
waves  on  all  sides,  but  will  travel  in  a  definite  direction 


174  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


— like  a  little  lump  of  energy,  we  might  say.  These  light 
quanta,  as  they  are  called,  can,  like  the  electrons,  hit 
certain  atoms. 

But  even  if  in  this  theory  the  difficulties  mentioned 
are,  apparently,  overcome,  far  greater  difficulties  are 
introduced  ;  indeed  it  may  be  said  that  the  whole  wave 
theory  becomes  shrouded  in  darkness.  The  very 
number  v  which  characterizes  the  different  kinds  of  rays 
loses  its  significance  as  a  frequency  and  the  phenomena  of 
interference — reflection,  dispersion,  diffraction,  and  so 
on — which  are  so  fundamental  in  the  wave  theory  of 
the  propagation  of  light,  and  on  which,  for  instance,  the 
mechanism  of  the  human  eye  is  based,  receive  no  explana¬ 
tion  in  the  theory  of  light  quanta. 

For  instance,  in  order  to  understand  that  grating 
spectra  can  be  produced  at  all,  we  must  think  of  a  co¬ 
operation  of  the  light  from  all  the  rulings  (cf.  Fig.  io,  p.  47), 
and  this  co-operation  cannot  arise  if  all  the  slits  at  a 
given  moment  do  not  receive  light  emitted  from  the  same 
atom.  In  a  bundle  of  rays  which  comes  in  at  right  angles 
to  a  grating,  we  must,  in  order  to  explain  the  inter¬ 
ference,  assume  that  the  state  of  oscillation  at  a  given 
moment  is  the  same  in  all  slits,  that,  for  instance,  there 
are  wave  crests  in  all  at  the  same  time,  if  we  borrow  a 
picture  from  the  representation  of  water  waves.  Only 
in  this  case  there  can  behind  the  grating  at  certain 
fixed  places — for  which  the  difference  in  the  wave¬ 
length  of  the  distances  from  successive  slits  is  a  whole 
number  of  wave-lengths — steadily  come  wave  crests 
from  all  the  slits  at  one  moment  and  wave  troughs  from 
all  at  another  moment  (the  classical  explanation  of  the 
“  mechanism  ”  of  a  grating).  If  we  imagine,  however, 
that  some  slits  are  hit  by  light  quanta  from  one  atom 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  175 


and  others  from  a  second  atom,  it  is  pure  chance  if  there 
are  wave  crests  simultaneously  in  all  slits,  because  the 
different  atoms  in  a  source  of  light  emit  light  at  different 
times,  depending  purely  on  chance.  An  understanding 
of  the  observed  effect  of  a  grating  on  light  seems  then  out 
of  question. 

The  theory  of  light  quanta  may  thus  be  compared 
with  medicine  which  will  cause  the  disease  to  vanish 
but  kill  the  patient.  When  Einstein,  who  has  made  so 
many  essential  contributions  in  the  field  of  the  quantum 
theory,  advocated  these  remarkable  representations 
about  the  propagation  of  radiation  energy  he  was  natur¬ 
ally  not  blind  to  the  great  difficulties  just  indicated. 
His  apprehension  of  the  mysterious  light  in  which  the 
phenomena  of  interference  appear  on  his  theory  is  shown 
in  the  fact  that  in  his  considerations  he  introduces  some¬ 
thing  which  he  calls  a  “  ghost  ”  field  of  radiation  to  help 
to  account  for  the  observed  facts.  But  he  has  evidently 
wished  to  follow  the  paradoxical  in  the  phenomena  of 
radiation  out  to  the  end  in  the  hope  of  making  some 
advance  in  our  knowledge. 

This  matter  is  introduced  here  because  the  Einstein 
light  quanta  have  played  an  important  part  in  discussions 
about  the  quantum  theory,  and  some  readers  may  have 
heard  about  them  without  being  clear  as  to  the  real 
standing  of  the  theory  of  light  quanta.  The  fact  must 
be  emphasized  that  this  theory  in  no  way  has  sprung 
from  the  Bohr  theory,  to  say  nothing  of  its  being  a 
necessary  consequence  of  it. 

In  the  Bohr  theory,  absorption  and  radiation  must  be 
said  to  be  completely  reciprocal  processes,  i.e.  processes 
of  essentially  the  same  nature,  but  proceeding  in  oppo¬ 
site  directions.  In  itself  it  cannot  be  said  to  be  more 


176  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


incomprehensible  that  an  atom  absorbs  energy  from  a 
field  of  radiation  in  agreement  with  the  Bohr  postulates 
than  that  it  emits  energy  into  the  field  ;  but  in  both 
cases  we  naturally  encounter  the  great  difficulties  men¬ 
tioned  in  Chap.  V. 

We  have  hitherto  restricted  ourselves  to  the  purely 
atomic  processes.  But  just  as  in  the  emission  of  radia¬ 
tion  we  meet  spectra  which  owe  their  characteristics  to 
molecular  processes  (band  spectra,  cf.  p.  162),  we  have 
also  absorption  spectra  with  characteristics  depending 
essentially  upon  motions  of  the  atomic  nuclei  in  the 
molecules.  A  particularly  interesting  and  instructive 
example  of  this  nature  is  met  with  in  the  infra-red 
region  of  the  spectrum  in  certain  broad  absorption  lines 
or  absorption  bands,  which  are  due  to  gases  having 
molecules  containing  several  atoms.  In  hydrogen 
chloride,  for  instance,  there  is  found,  in  the  region  of  the 
spectrum  which  corresponds  to  a  wave-length  of  about 
3-5  (A,  such  an  absorption  band,  which  by  more  accurate 
investigation  has  been  shown  to  consist  of  a  great  number 
of  absorption  lines. 

The  explanation  of  this  collection  of  lines  must  be 
sought  in  the  motions  which  the  hydrogen  nucleus  and 
the  chlorine  nucleus  perform,  as  they  in  part  vibrate  with 
respect  to  each  other  and  in  part  rotate  about  their  com¬ 
mon  centre  of  gravity.  Just  as  in  the  case  of  the  motions 
of  the  electrons  in  the  atom,  there  are  also  certain 
stationary  states  for  the  nuclear  motions.  When  the 
molecule  absorbs  radiation  energy  it  will  go  from  one  of 
these  states  to  another,  where  the  energy  content  is 
greater.  This  absorption  of  energy  proceeds  according 
to  the  quantum  rule,  i.e.,  the  product  of  the  Planck 
constant  h  and  the  frequency  v  for  the  absorbed  radiation 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  177 


must  be  equal  to  the  difference  in  energy  between  the 
two  stationary  states ;  only  those  rays  which  have 
frequencies  fulfilling  this  condition  are  absorbed. 

In  hydrogen  chloride,  at  standard  temperature,  the 
molecules  will  be  in  different  stationary  states  of  rotation 
(cf.  the  remarks  on  p.  27),  corresponding  to  different 
definite  values  of  the  rotation  frequency,  while  the 
nuclei,  on  the  other  hand,  must  be  assumed  to  be  at 
rest  with  reference  to  each  other,  i.e.}  they  preserve  their 


Fig.  32. — Schematic  representation  of  possible  motions  in 
a  molecule  of  hydrogen  chloride.  0  is  the  centre 
of  gravity  of  the  molecule.  The  black  circles  give 
the  states  of  equilibrium  of  the  nuclei,  the  circles  s 
their  outer  positions  in  oscillating,  and  the  circles  r 
positions  during  the  rotation  of  the  nuclei. 

-  « 

mutual  distance.  In  Fig.  32,  H  and  Cl  indicate  the 
circles  which  the  two  nuclei  will  describe  about  the  centre 
of  gravity  ;  here,  however,  it  must  be  remarked  that  the 
hydrogen  circle  is  drawn  too  small  in  comparison  with 
that  of  chlorine.  If  heat  rays  with  all  possible  wave- 


178  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


lengths  around  3-5  fb  are  sent  through  the  hydrogen 
chloride,  that  radiation  energy  will  be  absorbed  which 
can  in  part  set  the  nuclei  in  oscillation  and  in  part  change 
the  state  of  rotation.  Let  us  for  a  moment  assume  that 
only  the  former  change  could  happen.  Then  a  ray  with 
wave-length  3*46  [L  would  be  absorbed,  this  frequency 
corresponding  to  the  energy  in  the  stationary  state  of 
oscillation  into  which  the  molecule  goes  ;  this  frequency 
is  very  nearly  equal  to  the  frequency  with  which  the 
nuclei  vibrate  relatively  to  each  other.  In  reality,  at 
the  same  time  that  the  nucleus  is  set  in  oscillation,  there 
will  always  be  a  change  in  the  state  of  rotation — con¬ 
sisting  either  in  an  increase  or  in  a  decrease  in  the 
velocity  of  rotation.  The  energy  absorbed,  and  therefore 
the  frequency  for  the  radiation  absorbed,  is  thereby 
changed  a  little,  so  that  in  the  spectrum  of  the  rays  sent 
through  we  do  not  obtain  an  absorption  line  correspond¬ 
ing  to  3-46  [h,  but  a  line  somewhat  removed  from  that. 
Since  there  are,  however,  many  stationary  states  of 
rotation  to  start  from,  and  since  in  some  molecules  there 
is  one  transition,  in  others  another,  we  get  many  absorp¬ 
tion  lines  on  each  side  of  3-46 

Even  before  Bohr  propounded  his  theory,  at  a  time 
when  the  quantum  theory  did  not  yet  have  a  clarified 
form,  the  Danish  chemist,  Niels  Bjerrum,  had  predicted 
that  the  infra-red  absorption  lines  ought  to  have  such  a 
structure.  This  structure  must  be  interpreted  in  the 
above  way  which  differs  somewhat  from  Bjerrum's  ideas, 
but  his  prediction  was  essentially  strengthened  by 
investigations,  and  it  was  one  of  the  most  significant 
features  in  the  development  of  the  quantum  theory 
prior  to  1913.  The  first  to  detect  the  structure  of  the 
infra-red  absorption  bands  was  the  Swedish  physicist, 


APPLICATIONS  OF  THE  BOHR  THEORY  179 


Eva  von  Bahr.  Her  experiments  were  later  extended  in 
a  most  significant  way  by  the  work  of  Imes  and  other 
American  investigators.  They  enable  us  to  calculate 
exactly  the  distance  between  the  two  nuclei  in  the 
molecule. 

It  may  be  asked  what  becomes  of  the  energy  which 
the  hydrogen  chloride  molecule  thus  absorbs,  and 
whether  it  necessarily  after  a  longer  or  shorter  time 
must  be  re-emitted  as  radiation.  The  latter  is  not  the 
case.  In  a  collision  between  molecules  or  atoms,  the 
energy  which  one  molecule  (or  atom)  has  absorbed  by 
radiation  can  undoubtedly  be  transferred  to  another 
molecule,  the  velocity  of  which  is  thereby  increased. 
The  theoretical  necessity  of  the  occurrence  of  such  colli¬ 
sions  was  clearly  shown  for  the  first  time  in  a  very 
significant  investigation  by  two  of  Bohr’s  students,  Klein 
and  Rosseland.  Without  collisions  of  this  nature  the 
radiation  energy  absorbed  could  never  be  transformed 
into  heat  energy.  Here  we  come  to  a  very  great  and 
important  field,  which  has  a  very  close  connection  with 
the  theory  of  the  chemical  processes  and  to  a  better  ex¬ 
planation  of  which  the  more  recent  experiments  of  Franck 
and  his  co-workers  have  made  important  contributions. 


CHAPTER  VII 


THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 
CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

Introduction. 

We  have  hitherto  restricted  ourselves  mainly  to 
those  applications  of  the  Bohr  theory  which  have  a 
direct  connection  with  the  processes  of  radiation.  We 
have  shown  how  fertile  the  theory  has  proved  to  be, 
how  many  problems,  previously  inexplicable,  have  been 
solved,  and  what  exact  agreement  has  been  established 
between  experiment  and  theory  in  this  comprehensive 
field.  We  may  now  ask  how  the  theory  accounts  for 
the  chemical  behaviour  of  the  different  elements.  As 
early  as  1913,  Bohr,  in  connection  with  his  researches 
on  spectral  phenomena,  had  considered  the  chemical 
properties  of  the  elements  and  had  pointed  out  interest¬ 
ing  possibilities. 

The  Combination  of  Atoms  into  Molecules. 

In  his  discussion  of  hydrogen,  Bohr  suggested  a 
model  for  the  structure  of  its  molecule,  which  we  shall 
give  here,  because,  by  a  simple  example,  it  illustrates 
how  two  neutral  atoms  may  form  a  molecule  (cf.  p.  13). 
In  Fig.  33,  a,  K1E1  and  K2E2  are  two  neutral  hydrogen 
atoms  which  are  approaching  each  other  with  the  orbits 

180 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  181 

of  the  two  electrons  parallel.  The  nucleus  K1  and  the 
electron  E2  then  attract  each  other  as  do  the  nucleus  K2 
and  the  electron  Ev  The  two  electrons  repel  each  other 
as  do  the  two  nuclei ;  but  when  the  electrons  are  in 
opposite  positions  of  their  orbits,  the  forces  of  attraction 
outweigh  the  effect  of  the  forces  of  repulsion.  Cal¬ 
culation  shows  that  when  the  atoms  are  allowed  to 


Eig.  33. — Early  representation  of  the  formation  of  a  hydrogen 

molecule  (Bohr,  1913). 


approach  each  other  the  positions  of  the  atoms  will  be 
as  is  shown  in  Fig.  33,  b,  where  the  orbits  are  closer 
to  each  other  than  the  nuclei.  Finally,  for  small 
distances  of  the  two  nuclei,  the  two  orbits  will  be  merged 
into  one,  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  33,  c.  This  orbit  will  be 
slightly  larger  than  the  original  ones.  The  two  hydrogen 
atoms  may,  in  this  way,  combine  into  one  molecule. 
In  fact,  an  equilibrium  position  can  be  found  for  which 


182  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


the  nuclei  are  held  together,  in  spite  of  their  mutual 
repulsion,  by  the  attractive  forces  existing  between 
them  and  the  electrons  which  are  moving  in  their 
common  orbit.  It  must,  however,  be  assumed,  for 
reasons  which  cannot  be  given  here,  that  the  hydrogen 
molecule  is,  in  reality,  constructed  somewhat  differently  ; 
probably  the  orbits  of  the  electrons  make  an  angle  with 
each  other. 

The  formation  of  a  hydrogen  molecule  may  also  be 
supposed  to  occur  when  a  positive  hydrogen  ion,  i.e.,  a 
hydrogen  nucleus,  and  a  negative  hydrogen  ion,  i.e.,  a 
hydrogen  nucleus  with  two  electrons,  are  drawn  together 
by  their  mutual  attractions.  The  forces  of  attraction 
would  be  much  stronger  than  in  the  first  example  given, 
and  the  formation  of  a  neutral  molecule  would  not  take 
place  in  the  same  way.  More  energy  would  also  be 
released,  but  the  final  result  will  be  the  same. 

Just  as  in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen  molecule,  other 
molecules  may  be  formed  from  atoms  belonging  to  the 
same  or  to  different  elements.  The  method  of  forma¬ 
tion  of  molecules  varies  according  as  it  is  a  union  of 
neutral  molecules  in  the  normal  state,  or  a  union  of 
positive  and  negative  ions.  Conversely,  by  chemical 
decomposition  a  molecule  can  be  separated  either  into 
neutral  parts  or  into  ions.  If,  for  instance,  common 
salt  (sodium  chloride,  NaCl)  is  dissolved  in  water,  the 
salt  molecules  are,  under  the  influence  of  the  water 
molecules,  decomposed  in  Na-ions  with  one  positive 
charge  and  Cl-ions  with  one  negative  charge,  correspond¬ 
ing  to  the  monovalent  electropositive  character  of 
sodium  and  the  monovalent  electronegative  character  of 
chlorine. 

The  possibilities  are,  however,  far  from  being  ex- 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  183 

hausted  by  these  two  methods  of  composition  and  de¬ 
composition.  An  atom  may  exist  not  only  in  the  normal 
state  where  it  has  its  complete  number  of  electrons 
collected  as  tightly  as  possible  about  the  nucleus,  and 
in  the  ionized  state  with  one  or  more  too  many  or  too 
few  electrons  ;  but  in  a  neutral  atom  one  or  more  of  the 
outer  electrons  may  be  in  a  stationary  orbit  at  a  greater 
distance  from  the  nucleus  than  corresponds  to  the 
normal  stationary  state.  It  is  easy  to  understand  that 
an  atom  in  such  an  “  excited  ”  or  (as  it  is  called  in 
chemistry)  active  state  often  finds  it  easier  to  act  in 
concert  with  other  atoms  than  when  it  is  in  the  normal 
state  ;  in  this  latter  state  the  atom  is  often  more  like  a 
little  compact  lump  of  neutral  substance  than  in  the 
active  state. 

It  will,  in  any  case,  be  understood  that  the  interplay 
between  the  atoms,  which  reveals  itself  in  the  chemical 
processes  or  reactions  between  different  elements,  offers 
many  opportunities  for  the  Bohr  theory  to  give  in  the 
future  a  more  detailed  explanation  than  was  possible  to 
the  earlier  theories  of  chemistry.  We  must  also  mention 
the  fact  that  it  has  become  possible  to  elucidate  in  main 
features  the  phenomena,  hitherto  unexplained,  of  the 
chemical  effects  of  light,  as  on  a  photographic  plate 
( photochemistry )  and  of  catalysis ,  which  consists  in 
bringing  about,  or  accelerating,  the  chemical  inter¬ 
action  between  two  substances  by  the  presence  of  a 
third  substance  which  does  not  itself  enter  in  the  com¬ 
pound,  and  often  needs  only  to  be  present  in  very  small 
quantities.  It  must,  however,  be  emphasized  that  at 
present  we  do  not  yet  possess  a  detailed  theory  of 
molecular  constitution  comparable  with  our  knowledge 
of  the  structure  of  the  atoms, 


184  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


The  Periodic  System. 

Instead  of  inquiring  how  the  chemical  processes 
may  take  place,  we  shall  now  study  the  general  correla¬ 
tion  between  the  chemical  properties  and  the  atomic 
numbers  of  the  elements,  a  correlation  which  has  found 
its  empirical  expression  in  the  natural  or  periodic  system 
of  the  elements  (cf.  p.  23).  The  explanation  of  the 
puzzles  of  this  system  must  be  said  to  be  one  of  the 
finest  results  which  Bohr  has  obtained,  and  it  constitutes 
a  striking  evidence  in  favour  of  the  quantum  theory  of 
atoms. 

There  is  nothing  new  in  the  idea  of  connecting  the 
arrangement  of  the  elements  in  the  peroidic  system  with 
an  arrangement  of  particles  in  the  atom  in  regular  groups , 
the  character  of  which  varies,  so  to  say,  periodically 
with  increasing  number  of  particles.  In  the  atom  model 
of  Lord  Kelvin  and  j.  j.  Thomsom  (cf.  p.  86),  with  the 
positive  electricity  distributed  over  the  volume  of  the 
whole  atom,  Thomson  tried  to  explain  certain  leading 
characteristics  of  the  periodic  system  by  imagining  the 
electrons  as  arranged  in  several  circular  rings  about  the 
centre  of  the  atom.  He  pointed  out  that  the  stability 
of  the  electronic  configurations  of  this  type  varied  in  a 
remarkable  periodic  way  with  the  number  of  electrons 
in  the  atom.  By  considerations  of  this  nature  Thomson 
was  able  to  enunciate  a  series  of  analogies  to  the 
behaviour  of  the  elements  in  the  periodic  system  as 
regards  the  tendency  of  the  neutral  atoms  to  lose  one  or 
more  electrons  (electropositive  elements)  or  to  take  up 
one  or  more  electrons  (electronegative  elements).  But, 
setting  aside  possible  objections  to  his  considerations 
and  calculations,  the  connection  with  the  system  was 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 


185 


very  loose  and  general,  and  his  theory  lost  its  funda¬ 
mental  support  when  his  atomic  model  had  to  give  way 
to  Rutherford’s.  With  Bohr’s  theory  the  demand  for 
a  stable  system  of  electrons  was  placed  in  an  entirely 
new  light. 

In  his  treatise  of  1913,  Bohr  tried  to  give  an  explana¬ 
tion  of  the  structure  of  the  atom,  by  thinking  of  the 
electrons  as  moving  in  a  larger  or  smaller  number  of 
circular  rings  about  the  nucleus.  His  theory  did  not 
exclude  the  possibility  of  orbits  of  electrons  having 
different  directions  in  space  instead  of  lying  in  one  plane 
or  being  parallel.  The  tendency  of  the  considerations 
was  to  attain  a  definite,  unique  determination  of  the 
structure  of  the  atom,  as  is  demanded  by  the  pronounced 
stability  of  the  chemical  and  physical  properties  of  the 
elements.  The  results  were,  however,  rather  unsatis¬ 
factory,  and  it  became  more  and  more  clear  that  the 
bases  of  the  quantum  theory  were  not  sufficiently 
developed  to  lead  in  an  unambiguous  way  to  a  definite 
picture  of  the  atom.  Nowadays  the  simple  conception 
of  the  electrons  moving  in  circular  rings  in  the  field  of 
the  nucleus  is  definitely  abandoned,  and  replaced  by  a 
picture  of  atomic  constitution  of  which  we  shall  speak 
presently. 

In  the  following  years  the  general  conception  of  the 
group  distribution  of  the  electrons  in  the  atom  formed  the 
basis  of  many  theoretical  investigations,  which  in  various 
respects  have  led  to  a  closer  understanding  of  chemical 
and  physical  facts.  The  German  physicist,  Kossel, 
showed  that  the  characteristic  X-ray  spectra  of  the 
elements,  which  are  due  to  a  process  of  reconstruction 
of  the  atom  subsequent  to  the  removal  of  one  or  more  of 
the  innermost  electrons  (cf.  p.  161),  give  a  most  striking 


1 


./  ' 

186  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY  . 

jfm 

support  to  the  assumption  that  the  electrons  are  dis¬ 
tributed  in  different  groups  in  which  they  are  bound  with 
different  strength  to  the  atom. 

The  connection  between  the  electron  groups  and  the 
chemical  valence  properties  of  the  atoms,  to  which 
Thomson  had  first  drawn  attention  and  which  al^o  played 
an  important  part  in  Bohr’s  early  considerations,  was 
further  developed  in  a  significant  way  by  Kossel,  as 
well  as  by  Lewis  and  by  Langmuir  in  America.  These 
chemical  theories  had,  however,  little  or  no  connection 
with  the  quantum  theory  of  atomic  processes  ;  even  the 
special  features  of  the  Rutherford  atom,  which  are  of 
essential  importance  in  the  theory  of  the  hydrogen 
spectrum  and  of  other  spectra,  played  only  a  subordinate 

part. 

In  1920  Bohr  showed  how,  by  the  development  of  the 
quantum  theory  which  had  taken  place  in  the  meantime, 
and  the  main  features  of  which  consisted  in  the  intro¬ 
duction  of  more  than  one  quantum  number  for  the 
determination  of  the  stationary  states  and  in  the  estab¬ 
lishment  of  the  correspondence  principle,  the  problem 
of  the  structure  of  the  atom  had  appeared  in  a  new  light. 
In  fact,  he  outlined  a  general  picture  of  atomic  constitu¬ 
tion,  based  on  the  quantum  theory,  which  in  a  remarkable 
way  accounted  for  the  properties  of  the  elements.  In 
order  to  decide  doubtful  questions,  he  has  often  had  to 
call  to  his  aid  the  observed  properties  of  elements,  and  it 
must  be  readily  admitted  that  the  finishing  touches  of 
the  theory  are  still  lacking.  But  from  his  general 
starting-point  he  has  been  able  to  outline  the  architecture 
of  even  the  most  complex  atomic  structures  and  to  explain, 
not  only  the  known  regularities,  but  also  the  apparent 
irregularities  of  the  periodic  system  of  the  elements, 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 


187 


The  method  Bohr  used  in  his  attempt  to  solve  the  prob¬ 
lem  was  to  study  how  a  neutral  normal  atom  may  gradually 
be  formed  by  the  successive  capturing  and  binding  of  the 
individual  electrons  in  the  field  of  force  about  the  nucleus  of 
the  atom.  He  began  by  assuming  that  he  had  a  solitary 
nucleus  with  a  positive  charge  of  a  given  magnitude. 
To  this  nucleus  free  electrons  are  now  added,  one  after 
the  other,  until  the  nucleus  has  taken  on  the  number 
sufficient  to  neutralize  the  nuclear  charge.  Each  indi¬ 
vidual  electron  undergoes  a  “  binding  ”  process,  i.e.  it 
can  move  in  different  possible  stationary  orbits  about 
the  nucleus  and  the  electrons  already  bound.  With  the 
emission  of  radiation  it  can  go  from  stationary  states 
with  greater  energy  to  others  with  less  energy,  ending 
its  journey  by  remaining  in  the  orbit  which  corre¬ 
sponds  to  the  least  possible  energy.  We  may  designate 
this  state  of  least  energy  as  the  normal  state  of  the 
system,  which,  however,  is  only  a  positive  atomic  ion, 
so  long  as  all  the  electrons  needed  for  neutralization  are 
not  yet  captured. 

From  the  exposition  in  the  preceding  chapter  it  will 
be  seen  that  the  ordinary  series  spectra  (arc  spectra)  may 
be  considered  as  corresponding  to  the  last  stage  in  this 
formation  process,  since  the  emission  of  each  line  in  such 
a  spectrum  is  due  to  a  transition  between  two  stationary 
states  in  each  of  which  N-i  electrons  are  bound  in 
their  normal  state,  i.e.  as  tight  as  possible,  by  the  nucleus, 
while  the  Nth  electron  moves  in  an  orbit  mainly  outside 
the  region  of  the  other  electrons.  In  the  same  way  the 
spark  spectra  give  witness  of  the  last  stage  but  one  of  the 
formation  process  of  the  atom,  since  here  N-2  electrons 
are  bound  in  their  normal  state  while  an  N-ith  electron 
moves  in  an  orbit  large  compared  with  the  dimensions  of 


188  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

the  orbits  of  the  inner  electrons.  From  these  remarks 
it  will  be  clear  that  the  study  of  the  series  spectra  is  of 
great  importance  for  the  closer  investigation  of  the 
process  of  formation  of  the  atom  outlined  above. 
Furthermore,  the  general  ideas  of  the  correspondence 
principle,  which  directly  connects  the  possibility  of 
transition  from  one  stationary  state  to  another  with  the 
motion  of  the  electron,  has  been  very  useful  in  throwing 
light  on  the  individual  capturing  processes  and  on  the 
stability  of  the  electronic  configurations  formed  by 
these.  In  what  follows  we  cannot,  however,  reproduce 
Bohr’s  arguments  at  length ;  we  must  satisfy  ourselves 
with  some  hints  here  and  there,  and  for  the  rest 
restrict  ourselves  to  giving  some  of  the  principal 
results. 

Before  going  farther  we  shall  recall  what  has  pre¬ 
viously  been  said  about  the  quantum  numbers.  In  the 
undisturbed  hydrogen  atom,  the  stationary  orbits  can 
be  numbered  with  the  principal  quantum  numbers 
i,  2,  3  ...  n.  But  to  each  principal  quantum  number 
there  corresponds  not  one  but  several  states,  each  with 
its  auxiliary  quantum  number  i,  2,  3  .  .  .  k,  k  at  the  most 
being  equal  to  the  principal  quantum  number.  In  a 
similar  way,  the  stationary  orbits  of  the  electrons  in  an 
atom  containing  several  electrons  can  be  indicated  by 
two  quantum  numbers,  the  32  orbit,  for  instance,  being 
that  with  principal  quantum  number  3  and  auxiliary 
quantum  number  2.  But  while  in  the  hydrogen  atom 
the  principal  quantum  number  n,  in  the  stationary 
orbits  which  are  slowly  rotating  ellipses,  is  very  simply 
connected  with  the  length  of  the  major  axis  of  the 
ellipse,  and  k  :  n  is  the  ratio  between  the  minor  and 
major  axes,  still  in  other  atoms  with  complex  systems 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  189 

of  electrons  the  significance  of  the  principal  quantum 
number  is  not  so  simple  and  the  orbit  of  an  electron 
consists  of  a  sequence  of  loops  of  more  complicated  form 
(cf.  Fig.  29).  We  must  satisfy  ourselves  with  the 
statement  that  a  definition  of  their  significance  can  be 
given,  but  only  by  mathematical-physical  considerations 
which  we  cannot  enter  into  here.  It  may,  however,  be 
stated  that,  if  we  restrict  ourselves  to  a  definite  atom, 
the  rule  will  hold  that,  among  a  series  of  orbits  with 
the  same  auxiliary  quantum  number  but  different  princi¬ 
pal  quantum  numbers,  that  orbit  in  which  the  electron 
attains  a  greater  distance  from  the  nucleus  has  the  higher 
number.  Another  rule  which  holds  is,  that  an  orbit  with 
a  small  auxiliary  quantum  number  in  comparison  with 
its  principal  quantum  number  (as  4X,  for  instance,  cf. 
Fig.  29),  will  consist  of  very  oblong  loops  with  a  very 
great  difference  between  the  greatest  and  least  distances 
of  the  electron  from  the  nucleus,  while  the  orbit  will  be  a 
circle  when  the  two  quantum  numbers  are  the  same  as 
for  iv  22,  33.  Although  each  orbit  has  two  quantum 
numbers,  we  often  speak  simply  of  the  1-,  2-,  3 -  ...  n- 
quantum  orbits,  meaning  here  the  orbits  with  the 
principal  quantum  numbers  1,  2,  3  .  .  .  n. 

The  one  electron  of  hydrogen  will,  upon  being 
captured,  first  be  at  “  rest  ”  when  it  reaches  the  irpath, 
and  we  might  perhaps  be  led  to  expect  that  in  the 
atoms  with  greater  nuclear  charges  the  electrons  in  the 
normal  state  also  would  be  in  the  one  quantum  orbit  iv 
because  to  this  corresponds  the  least  energy  in  hydrogen. 
This  assumption  formed  actually  the  basis  of  Bohr’s 
work  of  1913  on  the  structure  of  the  heavier  atoms. 
It  cannot  be  maintained,  however.  Considerations  of 
theoretical  and  empirical  nature  lead  to  the  assump- 


190 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


tion  that  the  electrons  which  already  are  gathered 
about  the  nucleus  can  make  room  only  to  a  certain  extent 
for  new  ones,  moving  in  orbits  of  the  same  principal 
quantum  number.  Those  electrons  which  are  captured 
later  are  kept  at  an  appropriate  distance ;  they  are,  for 
instance,  prevented  from  passing  from  a  3-quantum 
orbit  to  a  2-quantum  one,  if  the  number  of  electrons 
moving  in  2-quantum  orbits  has  reached  a  certain 
maximum  value.  When  it  is  said  that  the  captured 
electrons  end  in  the  stationary  state  which  corresponds 
to  the  least  energy,  it  must,  therefore,  mean,  not  the 
i-quantum  orbit,  but  the  innermost  possible  under  the 
existing  circumstances.  The  final  result  will  be  that  the 
electrons  are  distributed  in  groups ,  which  are  characterized 
each  by  their  quantum  numbers  in  such  a  way  that  passing 
from  the  nucleus  to  the  surface  of  the  atom ,  the  successive 
groups  correspond  to  successive  integer  values  of  the 
quantum  number ,  the  innermost  group  being  characterized 
by  the  quantum  number  one.  Moreover ,  each  group  is 
subdivided  into  sub-groups  corresponding  to  the  different 
values  which  the  auxiliary  quantum  number  may 
take. 

That  the  electrons  first  collected  keep  the  late¬ 
comers  at  an  appropriate  distance  must  be  understood 
with  reservations  ;  a  new  electron  moving  in  an  elon¬ 
gated  orbit  can  very  well  come  into  the  territory  already 
occupied  ;  in  fact,  it  may  come  closer  to  the  nucleus 
than  some  of  the  innermost  groups  of  electrons.  In  case 
an  outer  electron  thus  dives  into  the  inner  groups,  it 
makes  a  very  short  visit,  travelling  about  the  nucleus 
like  a  comet  which  at  one  time  on  its  elongated  orbit 
comes  in  among  the  planets  and  perhaps  draws  closer 
to  the  sun  than  the  innermost  planet,  but  during  the 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 


191 


greater  part  of  its  travelling  time  moves  in  distant 
regions  beyond  the  boundaries  of  the  planetary  system. 
It  is  a  very  important  characteristic  of  the  Bohr  theory 
of  atomic  architecture  that  the  outer  electrons  thus 
penetrate  far  into  the  interior  of  the  atom  and  thus 
chain  the  whole  system  together. 

Such  a  “  comet  electron  ”  has,  however,  a  motion  of 
a  very  different  nature  from  that  of  a  comet  in  the  solar 
system.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  nuclear  charge  is  55 
(Caesium),  that  there  already  are  fifty-four  electrons 
gathered  tightly  about  the  nucleus,  and  that  No.  55  in 
an  orbit  consisting  of  oblong  loops  moves  far  away  from 
the  nucleus,  but  at  certain  times  comes  in  close  to  it. 
Then,  for  the  greater  part  of  its  orbit,  this  electron  will 
be  subject  to  approximately  the  same  attraction  as  the 
attraction  towards  one  single  charge,  as  a  hydrogen 
nucleus  ;  but  when  No.  55  comes  within  the  fifty-four 
electrons  it  will  for  a  very  short  time  be  influenced  by 
the  entire  nuclear  charge  55.  Together  with  the  near¬ 
ness  of  the  nucleus,  this  will  cause  No.  55  to  acquire  a 
remarkably  high  velocity  and  to  move  in  an  orbit  quite 
different  from  the  elliptical  one  it  followed  outside. 
Moreover,  the  great  velocity  of  the  electron  during  its 
short  visit  to  the  nucleus  is  in  a  considerable  degree 
determinative  of  its  principal  quantum  number  ;  this 
will  be  higher  than  would  be  expected  from  the 
dimensions  of  the  outer  part  of  the  orbit  if  we  supposed 
the  motion  to  take  place  about  a  hydrogen  nucleus 
(cf.  Figs.  27  and  29). 

After  these  general  remarks  we  shall  try  in  a  few 
lines  to  sketch  the  Bohr  theory  of  the  structure  of  the 
atomic  systems  from  the  simplest  to  the  most  compli¬ 
cated.  We  shall  not  examine  the  entire  periodic  system 


192  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


with  its  ninety-two  elements,  but  here  and  there  we  shall 
bring  to  light  a  trait  which  will  illustrate  the  problem — 
partly  in  connection  with  the  schematic  representations 
in  the  atomic  diagrams  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

Description  of  the  Atomic  Diagrams. 

The  curves  drawn  represent  parts  of  the  orbital 
loops  of  the  electrons  in  the  neutral  atoms  of  different 
elements.  Although  the  attempt  has  been  made  to  give 
a  true  picture  of  these  orbits  as  regards  their  dimensions, 
the  drawings  must  still  be  considered  as  largely  sym¬ 
bolic.  Thus  in  reality  the  orbits  do  not  lie  in  the  same 
plane,  but  are  oriented  in  different  ways  in  space.  It 
would  have  been  impracticable  to  show  the  different 
planes  of  the  orbits  in  the  figure.  Moreover,  there  is 
still  a  good  deal  of  uncertainty  as  to  the  relative  positions 
of  these  planes.  On  this  account  the  orbits  belonging 
to  the  same  sub-group,  i.e.,  designated  by  the  same 
quantum  numbers,  are  placed  in  a  symmetric  scheme  in 
the  sketch.  For  groups  of  circular  orbits  the  rule  has 
been  followed  to  draw  only  one  of  them  as  a  circle, 
while  the  others  in  the  simpler  atoms  are  drawn  in  pro¬ 
jection  as  ellipses  within  the  circle,  and  in  the  more 
complicated  atoms  are  omitted  entirely.  The  two 
circular  orbits  of  the  helium  atom  are  both  drawn  in 
projection  as  ellipses.  Further,  for  the  sake  of  clear¬ 
ness,  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  draw  the  inner  loops 
of  the  non-circular  orbits  of  electrons  which  dive  into 
the  interior  of  the  atom.  In  lithium  only,  the  inner 
loop  of  the  orbit  of  the  2X  electron  has  been  shown  by 
dotted  lines. 

In  order  to  distinguish  the  groups  of  orbits  with 
different  principal  quantum  numbers  two  colours  have 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  193 

been  used,  red  and  black,  the  red  indicating  the 
orbits  with  uneven  quantum  numbers,  as  i,  3,  5,  the 
black  those  with  even  quantum  numbers,  as  2,  4,  6. 

.  Wherever  possible  the  nucleus  is  indicated  by  a  black 
dot ;  but  in  the  sketches  of  atoms  with  higher  atomic 
numbers  the  i-quantum  orbits  are  merged  into  one 
little  cross  and  the  nucleus  has  been  omitted.  It  should 
be  noticed  that  the  radium  atom  is  drawn  on  a  scale 
twice  as  great  as  that  for  the  other  atoms 

We  shall  begin  with  the  capture  of  the  first  electron. 
If  the  nucleus  is  a  hydrogen  nucleus  the  hydrogen  atom 
is  completed  when  the  electron  has  come  into  the  i± 
orbit,  a  circle  with  diameter  of  about  io~8  cm.  (cf.  the 
diagram) .  If  the  nucleus  had  had  a  greater  nuclear  charge 
the  No.  1  electron  would  have  behaved  in  the  same  way, 
but  the  radius  of  its  orbit  would  have  been  less  in  the 
same  ratio  as  the  nuclear  charge  was  greater.  For  a 
lead  nucleus,  with  charge  (atomic  number)  82,  the  radius 
of  the  ix  orbit  is  1/82  that  of  the  hydrogen  nq  orbit. 
Since  atoms  with  high  atomic  numbers  thus  collect  the 
electrons  more  tightly  about  them  it  is  understandable 
that,  in  spite  of  their  greater  number  of  electrons,  they  can 
be  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  the  simpler  atoms. 

Let  us  now  examine  the  helium  atom.  The  first 
electron,  which  its  nucleus  (charge  2)  catches,  moves  as 
shown  in  a  circle  ilf  but  with  a  smaller  radius  than  in 
the  case  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  Electron  No.  2  can  be 
caught  in  different  ways,  and  the  closer  study  of  the 
conditions  prevailing  here,  which  are  still  comparatively 
simple  since  there  are  only  two  electrons,  has  been  of 
greatest  importance  in  the  further  development  of  the 
whole  theory.  We  cannot  go  into  it  here,  but  must 
r3 


194 


THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 

content  ourselves  with  saying  that  the  stable  final 
result  of  the  binding  of  the  second  electron  consists  m 
the  two  electrons  moving  in  circular  i-quantum  orbits  of 
the  same  size  with  their  planes  making  an  angle  with 
each  other  (cf.  the  diagram).  This  state  has  a  very  stable 
character,  and  the  helium  atom  is  therefore  very  dis¬ 
inclined  to  interplay  with  other  atoms,  with  other 
helium  atoms  as  well  as  with  those  of  other  elements. 
Helium  is  therefore  monatomic  and  a  chemically  inactive 

gas. 

In  all  atomic  nuclei  with  higher  charges  than  the 
helium  nucleus  the  first  two  orbits  are  also  bound  into 
two  i-quantum  circular  orbits  at  an  angle  with  each 
other;  this  group  cannot  take  up  any  new  electron 
having  the  same  principal  quantum  number.  It  takes 
on  an  independent  existence  and  forms  the  innermost 
electron  group  in  all  atoms  of  atomic  number  higher 

than  2.  .  , 

Electron  No.  3  will  accordingly  not  be  bound  m  the 

same  group  with  1  and  2.  It  must  be  satisfied  with  a 
2-quantum  orbit,  2V  which  consists  of  oblong  loops,  and, 
when  nearest  the  nucleus,  comes  into  the  territory  of 
the  i-quantum  orbits.  It  is  but  loosely  bound  com¬ 
pared  to  the  first  two  electrons,  and  the  lithium  atom, 
which  has  only  three  electrons,  can  therefore  easily  let 
No.  3  loose  so  that  the  atom  becomes  a  positive  ion. 
Lithium  is  therefore  a  strongly  electropositive  monovalent 
metal.  The  element  beryllium  (No.  4)  will  probably 
have  two  electrons  in  the  orbits  2t ;  it  will  therefore  be 
divalent.  But  during  the  short  visit  of  these  electrons 
to  the  nucleus  they  are  subject  to  a  greater  nuclear 
charge  than  in  lithium.  The  2X  electrons  are  therefore, 
in  beryllium,  more  firmly  bound  than  in  lithium,  and  the 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  195 

electropositive  character  of  beryllium  is  therefore  less 
marked. 

\ . 

We  have  something  essentially  new  in  the  boron 
atom  (atomic  No.  5)  where  the  two  electrons  No.  3  and 
No.  4  are  taken  into  2X  orbits,  but  where  No.  5  will  very 
probably  be  bound  in  a  circular  22  orbit.  How  the 
conditions  will  be  in  the  normal  state  of  the  following 
atoms  preceding  neon  is  not  known  with  certainty.  We 
only  know  that  the  electrons  coming  after  the  first  two 
will  be  captured  in  2-quantum  orbits,  the  dimensions  of 
which  get  smaller,  according  as  the  atomic  number 
increases. 

The  neon  atom  (compare  the  diagram)  has  a  parti¬ 
cularly  stable  structure,  both  "  closed  ”  and  symmetric, 
which  besides  two  34-orbits  contains  four  electrons  in 
2X  orbits  and  four  electrons  in  22  orbits.  As  regards  the 
four  electrons  in  21  orbits,  they  do  not  have  symmetri¬ 
cal  positions  at  every  moment  or  move  simultaneously 
either  towards  or  away  from  the  nucleus  ;  on  the  contrary, 
it  must  be  assumed  that  the  electrons  come  closest  to  the 
nucleus  at  different  moments  at  equal  intervals  of  time. 

The  name  of  inert  or  inactive  gases  is  given  to  the 
entire  series  of  helium  (2),  neon  (10),  argon  (18),  krypton 
(36),  xenon  (54)  and  niton  (86),  the  O-column  in  the 
periodic  system  given  in  the  table  on  p.  23.  All  these 
elements  are  monatomic  and  quite  unwilling  to  enter  into 
chemical  compounds  with  other  elements  (although  there 
is  about  1  per  cent,  of  argon  in  the  air  about  us  this 
element  has,  on  this  account,  escaped  the  observation 
of  chemists  until  about  1895,  when  it  was  discovered  by 
the  English  chemist,  Ramsay).  This  complete  chemical 
inactivity  is  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  atoms  of  all 
these  elements  have  a  nicely  finished  “  architecture  ” 


196  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


Table  showing  the  Distribution  of  the  Electrons 
OF  DIFFERENT  ORBITAL  TYPES  IN  THE  NEUTRAL 

Atoms  of  the  Inactive  Gases. 


Atomic 

Number. 

- - - - 

Quantum  Numbers. 

2l 

3, 

3i 

32 

1  1 

3s  4i 

42 

43 

44 

5’ 

5a 

53 

54 

1 

61 

62 

63 

64 

6« 

7,1 

72 

73 

_ 

_ 

_ 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Helium  .  . 

Neon  .  .  . 

Argon  .  .  . 

Krypton  .  . 

Xenon  .  .  . 

Niton  .  .  . 

? 

2 

IO 

18 

36 

54 

*6 

118 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

6 

6 

6 

6 

4 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

4 

6 

8 

8 

4 

6 

8 

8 

6 

8 

8 

8 

8 

4 

6 

8 

4 

6 

8 

6 

8 

8 

- 

4 

6 

4 

6 

6 

_ 

: 

- 

4 

4 

— 

with  all  the  electrons  firmly  bound  in  symmetrical  con¬ 
figurations.  They  may  be  said  to  form  the  mile  posts  of 
the  periodic  system,  and  to  be  the  ideals  towards  which 
the  other  atoms  aspire.  The  table  shows  how  the 
electrons  in  the  atoms  of  these  gases  are  divided  among 
the  types  of  orbits  corresponding  to  the  different  quantum 

numbers. 

The  elements  fluorine,  oxygen  and  nitrogen  can  attain 
the  ideal  neon-architecture  by  binding  respectively  one, 
two  and  three  additional  electrons.  Naturally  they  do 
not  become  neon  atoms,  but  merely  negative  atomic 
ions  with  single,  double  or  triple  charge;  and  their 
tendency  in  this  direction  appears  in  their  character  of 
monovalent,  divalent  and  trivalent  electronegative 
elements  respectively.  If  we  return  to  carbon  it  can 
probably  not  become  a  tetravalent  negative  ion  by 
binding  four  free  electrons  ;  but  in  the  typical  carbon 
compound,  methane  (CH4),  the  neon  ideal  is  realized  in 
another  manner.  In  fact,  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that 
the  four  electrons  of  the  hydrogen  atoms  together  with 
the  six  of  the  carbon  atom  give  approximately  a  neon 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  197 

architecture.  The  four  hydrogen  nuclei  naturally  cannot 
be  combined  with  the  carbon  nucleus  ;  the  mutual  re¬ 
pulsions  keep  them  at  a  distance.  They  will  probably 
assume  very  symmetrical  positions  within  the  electron 
system  which  holds  them  together.  The  nitrogen  atom 
may  in  a  similar  way  find  completion  in  a  neutral  mole¬ 
cule  with  neon-architecture,  if  it  unites  with  three 
hydrogen  atoms  to  form  ammonia  NH3  ;  but  the  three 
hydrogen  nuclei,  although  having  symmetrical  positions, 
will  not  lie  in  the  same  plane  as  the  nitrogen  nucleus. 
The  electric  centre  of  gravity  for  the  positive  nuclei  will 
therefore  not  coincide  with  the  centre  of  gravity  for  the 
negative  electron  system.  The  molecule  obtains  thus 
what  might  be  called  a  positive  and  a  negative  pole, 
and  this  dipolar  character  appears  in  the  electrical 
action  of  ammonia  (its  dielectric  constant).  Something 
similar  holds  true  for  the  water  molecule,  where,  in  a 
neon-architecture  of  electrons,  in  addition  to  the  oxygen 
nucleus  in  the  centre  there  are  two  hydrogen  nuclei 
which  are  not  co-linear  with  the  oxygen  nucleus. 

If  we  go  on  from  neon  in  the  periodic  system  we  come 
to  sodium  (n).  When  the  sodium  nucleus  captures 
electron  No.  n,  this  cannot  find  room  in  the  neon- 
architecture  formed  by  the  first  ten  electrons.  Since 
the  eleventh  electron  thus  cannot  find  a  place  in  either  a 
2X  or  a  22  orbit,  it  is  bound  in  a  3X  orbit  (cf.  Fig.  29  and 
diagram  at  the  end) .  The  atom  then  has  a  character  like 
that  of  the  lithium  atom,  and  we  can  therefore  under¬ 
stand  the  chemical  relationship  between  the  two  elements, 
which  are  both  monovalent  electropositive  metals. 

We  shall  not  dwell  longer  upon  the  individual  elements 
of  the  atomic  series.  If  we  pass  from  neon  through 
sodium  (11),  magnesium  (12),  aluminium  (13),  etc.,  to 


198  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


argon  (18),  we  get  what  is  essentially  a  repetition  of  the 
situation  in  the  series  from  lithium  to  neon.  We  first 
get  two  orbits  of  the  type  in  magnesium,  a  32  orbit  is 
for  the  first  time  added  in  aluminium,  and  for  the  atomic 
number  18,  eight  3-quantum  orbits,  together  with  the 
eight  orbits  of  the  inner  2-quantum  group  and  the  two  of 
the  innermost  i-quantum  group,  give  the  symmetric 
architecture  of  argon  (cf.  table  on  p.  196,  and  diagram  at 
the  end) . 

The  architecture  of  the  argon  atom  is  in  a  certain 
sense  less  complete  than  that  of  the  neon  atom.  In 
argon  there  are  indeed  four  orbits  of  the  3X  type  and  four 
of  the  32  type,  but  the  third  kind  of  3-quantum  orbit,  the 
circular  33  one,  is  missing.  Nor  does  it  appear  in  the 
next  element,  potassium  (19).  The  electron  No.  19 
prefers,  instead  of  the  3S  orbit,  the  4X  orbit,  which  consists 
of  oblong  loops  and  which  gives  a  firmer  binding  because 
it  dives  in  among  the  electrons  bound  earlier,  while  the 
circle  33  would  lie  outside  them  all.  We  thus  obtain  an 
atom  of  type  similar  to  the  lithium  and  sodium  atoms. 
But  the  slighted  33  path  lies,  so  to  speak,  on  the  watch 
to  steal  a  place  for  itself  in  the  neutral  atom,  and  this 
has  grave  results  for  the  subsequent  development. 
Even  in  calcium  (20),  after  the  first  eighteen  electrons  are 
bound  in  the  argon  architecture,  both  the  nineteenth  and 
the  twentieth  go  into  a  41  orbit,  and  the  behaviour  of 
calcium  is  like  that  of  magnesium.  But  since  the  in¬ 
creasing  nuclear  charge  means  for  the  electron  No.  19 
a  decrease  in  the  dimensions  and  an  increase  in  the  bind¬ 
ing  of  the  orbits  corresponding  to  the  quantum  number 
33,  a  point  will  finally  be  attained  where  the  33  orbit  of 
the  nineteenth  electron  lies  within  the  boundaries  of  what 
may  be  called  the  argon  system,  i.e.,  the  architecture 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  199 

corresponding  to  the  first  eighteen  electrons,  and  corre¬ 
sponds  to  a  stronger  binding  than  a  4i  orbit  would  do. 
In  scandium  (21)  the  33~tyPe  orbit  occurs  for  the  first 
time  in  the  neutral  atom  and  will  not  only  come  into 
competition  with  the  4i  type,  but  will  also  cause  a  disturb¬ 
ance  in  the  3-quantum  groups,  which  in  the  following 
elements  must  undergo  reconstruction.  As  long  as  this 
lasts  the  situation  is  very  complicated  and  uncertain. 
When  the  reorganization  is  almost  completed,  we  come 
to  the  blotting  out  of  chemical  differences,  particularly 
known  from  the  triad,  iron,  cobalt  and  nickel.  More¬ 
over,  there  comes  a  fluctuation  in  the  valency  of 
the  elements.  Iron  can,  as  has  been  said,  be  divalent, 
tri valent  or  hexa valent.  This  oscillation  in  valency 
begins  in  titanium. 

We  should  perhaps  expect  that  the  reconstruction 
would  be  completed  long  before  nickel  (28)  is  reached, 
because  even  with  twenty-two  electrons  we  could  get 
four  orbits  of  each  of  the  3-quantum  types  (3X,  32  and 
33)  ;  but  from  the  chemical  facts  we  are  led  to  assume 
that  in  a  completed  group  of  3-quantum  orbits  there 
can  be  room  for  six  electrons  in  each  sub-group.  At 
first  sight  we  should,  then,  expect  the  end  of  the  re¬ 
construction  with  nickel,  which  has  indeed  eighteen 
electrons  more  than  neon  where  the  group  of  2-quantum 
orbits  was  completed.  We  might  expect  that  nickel 
would  be  an  inert  element  in  the  series  with  helium,  neon, 
and  argon.  On  the  contrary,  nickel  merely  imitates 
cobalt.  This  is  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  group  of 
eighteen  3-quantum  orbits,  although  it  has  a  symmetric 
architecture,  is  weakly  constructed  if  the  nuclear  charge 
is  not  sufficiently  large.  The  binding  of  this  group  is 
too  weak  for  it  to  exist  as  the  outer  group  in  a  neutral 


200  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


atom.  In  nickel  the  electrons,  in  a  less  symmetical 
manner,  will  probably  arrange  themselves  with  seventeen 
3-quantum  orbits  and  one  4-quantum  orbit. 

The  group  of  eighteen  3-quantum  orbits  becomes 
stable,  however,  when  the  nuclear  charge  is  equal  to  or 
larger  than  29,  in  which  case  it  can  become  the  outer 
group  in  a  positive  ion.  In  this  we  find  the  explanation 
of  the  properties  of  the  atom  of  copper.  The  neutral 
copper  atom  has  its  twenty-ninth  electron  bound  in  a 
4X  orbit  consisting  of  oblong  loops  (cf .  diagram  at  the  end) ; 
this  electron  can  easily  be  freed  and  leaves  a  positive 
monovalent  copper  ion  with  a  symmetrical  architecture. 
Even  under  these  circumstances,  although  possessing  a 
certain  stability,  the  ion  is  not  very  firmly  constructed. 
Thus  the  fact  that  copper  can  be  both  monovalent  and 
divalent,  must  be  explained  by  the  assumption  that  for 
a  nuclear  charge  29,  the  3-quantum  group  still,  easily 
loses  an  electron. 

When  we  come  to  zinc  (30)  the  group  of  eighteen  is 
more  firmly  bound  ;  zinc  is  a  pronounced  divalent  metal 
which  in  its  properties  reminds  us  of  calcium  and  mag¬ 
nesium.  From  zinc  (30)  to  krypton  (36)  we  have  a 
series  of  elements  which  in  a  certain  way  repeat  the  series 
from  magnesium  (12)  to  argon  (18). 

In  Fig.  34  is  shown  Bohr’s  arrangement  of  the 
periodic  system  in  which  the  systematic  correlation  of 
the  properties  of  the  element  appears  somewhat  clearer 
than  in  the  usual  plan  (cf.  p.  23).  It  shows  great 
similarity  with  an  arrangement  proposed  nearly  thirty 
years  ago  by  the  Danish  chemist,  Julius  Thomsen.  The 
elements  from  scandium  to  nickel,  where,  in  the  neutral 
atom,  the  electron  group  of  3-quantum  orbits  is  in  a 
state  of  reconstruction,  are  placed  in  a  frame  ;  the 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 


201 


Fig.  34. — The  periodic  system  of  the  elements.  The  elements  where 
an  inner  group  of  orbits  is  in  a  stage  of  reconstruction  are 
framed.  The  oblique  lines  connect  elements  which  in  physical 
and  chemical  respects  have  similar  properties. 


202  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


oblique  lines  connect  elements  which  are  “homologous,” 
i.e.,  similar  in  chemical  and  physical  (spectral)  respect. 

In  krypton  (36)  we  again  have  a  stable  architecture 
with  an  outer  group  of  eight  electrons,  four  in  4  orbits  and 
four  in  4  orbits.  Owing  to  the  appearance  of  43  orbits 
in  the  normal  state  of  the  atoms  of  elements  with  atomic 
number  higher  than  38,  there  follows  in  the  fifth  period 
of  the  natural  system  a  reconstruction  and  provisional 
completion  of  the  4-quantum  orbits  to  a  group  of  eighteen 
electrons,  which  shows  a  great  simplicity  with  the  comple¬ 
tion  of  the  3-quantum  group  in  the  fourth  period.  In  Fig. 
34  the  elements  where  the  4-quantum  group  is  in  a  state  of 
reconstruction  are  framed.  The  4-quantum  group  with 
eighteen  electrons  is  of  more  stable  construction  than  the 
group  of  eighteen  3-quantum  orbits  in  the  elements  with 
an  atomic  number  lower  by  eighteen.  This  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  all  the  orbits  in  the  first-mentioned  group  are 
oblong  and  therefore  moored,  so  to  say,  in  the  inner 
groups,  while  in  the  complete  group  of  3-quantum 
orbits  there  are  six  circular  orbits.  This  is  the  reason 
why  silver,  in  contrast  to  copper,  is  monovalent. 

The  next  inactive  gas  is  xenon  (54),  which  outside  of 
the  4-quantum  group  has  a  group  of  eight  electrons  in 
5-quantum  orbits,  four  in  5X  orbits  and  four  in  52  orbits. 
We  notice  that  in  xenon  the  group  of  4-quantum  orbits 
still  lacks  the  44  orbits.  On  the  theory  we  must,  there¬ 
fore,  expect  to  meet  a  new  process  of  completion  and 
reconstruction  when  proceeding  in  the  system  of  the 
elements.  The  theoretical  argument  is  similar  to  that 
which  applies  in  the  case  of  the  completion  of  the  3- 
quantum  group  which  takes  place  in  the  fourth  period 
of  the  natural  system.  In  fact,  in  the  formation  of 
the  normal  atoms  of  the  elements  next  after  xenon, 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  203 

caesium,  55,  and  barium,  56,  the  fifty-four  electrons  first 
captured  will  form  a  xenon  configuration,  while  the 
fifty- fifth  electron  will  be  bound  in  a  6X  orbit,  consisting 
of  very  oblong  loops,  which  represents  a  much  stronger 
binding  than  a  circular  44  orbit.  Calculation  shows, 
however,  that  with  increasing  nuclear  charge  there  must 
soon  appear  an  element  for  which  a  44  orbit  will  re¬ 
present  a  stronger  binding  than  any  other  orbit.  This 
is  actually  the  case  in  cerium  (58),  and  starting  from  this 
element  we  meet  a  series  of  elements  where,  in  the 
normal  neutral  atom,  the  4-quantum  group  is  in  a  state 
of  reconstruction.  This  reconstruction  must  occur  far 
within  the  atom,  since  the  group  of  eighteen  4-quantum 
orbits  in  xenon  is  already  covered  by  an  outer  group 
of  eight  5-quantum  orbits.  The  result  is  a  whole  series 
of  elements  with  very  slight  outward  differences  between 
their  neutral  atoms,  and  therefore  with  very  similar 
properties.  This  is  the  rare  earths  group,  which  in  such 
a  strange  way  seemed  to  break  down  the  order  of  the 
natural  system  (cf.  p.  21),  but  which  thus  finds  its  natural 
explanation  in  the  quantum  theory  of  the  structure  of 
the  atom. 

The  elements  in  which  the  4-quantum  group  is  in  a 
state  of  reconstruction  are,  in  Fig.  34,  enclosed  in  the 
inner  frame  in  the  sixth  period.  Moreover,  in  the  outer 
frame  all  elements  are  enclosed  where  the  group  of 
5-quantum  orbits  is  in  a  state  of  reconstruction,  which 
started,  even  before  cerium  in  lanthanum  (57),  where 
the  fifty-fifth  electron  in  the  normal  state  is  bound  in  a 
53  orbit.  The  element  cassiopeium,  with  atomic  number 
71,  which  is  the  last  of  the  rare  earths,  stands  just  outside 
the  inner  frame,  because  in  the  normal  neutral  atom  of 
this  element  the  4-quantum  group  is  just  completed  ; 


204  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


this  group,  instead  of  eighteen  electrons  with  six  electrons 
in  each  sub-group,  consists  now  of  thirty-two  electrons 
with  eight  electrons  in  each  sub-group.  The  theory 
was  able  to  predict  that  the  element  with  atomic  number 
72,  which  until  a  short  time  ago  had  never  been  found, 
and  the  properties  of  which  had  been  the  subject  of 
some  discussion,  must  in  its  chemical  properties  differ 
considerably  from  the  trivalent  rare  earths  and  show  a 
resemblance  to  the  tetra valent  elements  zirconium  (40), 
and  thorium  (90).  This  expectation  has  recently  been 
confirmed  by  the  work  of  Hevesy  and  Coster  in  Copen¬ 
hagen,  who  have  observed,  by  means  of  X-ray  investiga¬ 
tions,  that  most  zircon  minerals  contain  considerable 
quantities  (1  to  10  per  cent.)  of  an  element  of  atomic 
number  72,  which  has  chemical  properties  resembling 
very  much  those  of  zirconium,  and  which  on  this  account 
had  hitherto  not  been  detected  by  chemical  investigation. 
A  preliminary  investigation  of  the  atomic  weight  of  this 
new  element,  for  which  its  discoverers  have  proposed  the 
name  hafnium  (Hafnia=  Copenhagen),  gave  values  lying 
between  178-180,  in  accordance  with  what  might  be 
expected  from  the  atomic  weight  of  the  elements  (71) 
and  (73).  (Cf.  p.  23.) 

The  further  completion  of  the  groups  of  5-  and  6- 
quantum  orbits,  which  in  the  rare  earths  had  tempor¬ 
arily  come  to  a  standstill,  is  resumed  in  hafnium  and 
goes  on  in  a  way  very  similar  to  that  in  which  the  4-  and 
5-quantum  groups  in  the  fifth,  and  the  3-  and  4-quantum 
groups  in  the  fourth  period  underwent  completion. 
Thus  the  reconstruction  of  the  5-quantum  group  which 
began  in  lanthanum,  and  which  receives  a  characteristic 
expression  in  the  triad  of  the  platinum  metals,  has  come 
to  a  provisional  conclusion  in  gold  (79),  gold  being  the 


205 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 

first  element  outside  the  two  frames  which,  in  Fig.  34> 
appear  in  the  sixth  period.  The  neutral  gold  atom 
possesses,  in  its  normal  state — besides  two  i-quantum 
orbits,  eight  2-quantum  orbits,  eighteen  3-quantum 
orbits,  thirty-two  4-quantum  orbits  and  eighteen 
5-quantum  orbits — one  loosely  bound  electron  in  a  6^ 

orbit. 

In  niton  (86),  finally,  we  meet  again  an  inactive  gas, 
the  structure  of  the  atom  of  which  is  indicated  in  the 

table  on  p.  196. 

In  this  element  the  difference  between  nuclear  and 
electron  properties  appears  very  conspicuously,  since 
the  structure  of  the  electron  system  is  particularly 
stable,  while  that  of  the  nucleus  is  unstable.  Niton,  in 
fact,  is  a  radioactive  element  which  is  known  in  three 
isotopic  forms  ;  one  of  these  is  the  disintegration  product 
of  radium,  the  so-called  radium  emanation ;  it  then  has 
a  very  brief  life.  In  the  course  of  four  days  over  half  of 
the  nuclei  in  a  given  quantity  of  radium  emanation  will 

explode. 

In  the  diagram  at  the  end  of  the  book,  as  an  example 
of  an  atom  with  very  complicated  structure,  there  is  given 
a  schematic  representation  of  the  atom  of  the  famous 
element  radium ,  on  a  scale  twice  as  large  as  the  one  used 
in  the  other  atoms.  It  follows  clearly  enough,  from  what 
has  been  said  in  Chap.  IV.,  that  the  structure  of  the  elec¬ 
tron  system  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  radioactivity. 
All  the  remarkable  radiation  activities  are  due  to  the 
nucleus  itself.  There  has  not  even  been  room  in  the 
figure  to  draw  the  nucleus  ;  the  i-quantum  orbits 
consist  only  of  a  small  cross,  and  in  the  other  groups 
we  have  contented  ourselves  with  summary  indications. 
The  electron  system,  with  its  eighty-eight  electrons,  is, 


206  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


however,  in  itself  very  interesting,  with  its  symmetry  in 
the  number  of  electrons  in  the  different  groups.  In 
the  different  quantum  groups  from  i  to  7  there  are  found 
respectively  two,  eight,  eighteen,  thirty-two,  eighteen, 
eight  and  two  electrons.  The  last  group  is  naturally 
of  a  very  different  nature  from  the  first  ;  they  are 
‘‘valence  electrons,”  which  easily  get  loose  and  leave 
behind  a  positive  radium  ion  with  stable  niton 
architecture.  Radium  then  belongs  to  the  family  of 
the  divalent  metals,  magnesium,  calcium,  strontium 
and  barium. 

Four  places  from  radium  is  uranium  (92)  and  the  end 
of  the  journey,  if  we  restrict  ourselves  to  the  elements 
which  are  known  to  exist.  One  could  very  well  continue 
the  building-up  process  still  further  and  discuss  what 
structure  would  have  to  be  assumed  for  the  atoms  of  the 
elements  with  higher  atomic  numbers.  That  they  can¬ 
not  exist  is  not  the  fault  of  the  electron  system  but  of 
the  nuclei,  which  would  become  too  complicated  and  too 
large  to  be  stable.  In  the  table  on  p.  196  there  is  shown 
the  probable  structure  of  the  atom  of  the  inert  gas 
following  niton  ;  it  must  be  assumed  to  have  one  hundred 
and  eighteen  electrons  distributed  in  groups  of  two, 
eight,  eighteen,  thirty-two,  thirty-two,  eighteen  and 
eight  among  the  quantum  groups  from  1  to  7. 

As  has  been  said,  in  all  this  symmetrical  structure  of 
the  atoms  of  the  elements,  Bohr  has  in  many  cases  had 
to  rely  upon  general  considerations  of  the  information 
that  observation  gives  about  the  properties  of  the 
individual  elements.  It  must,  however,  not  be  forgotten 
that  the  backbone  of  the  theory  is  and  remains  the 
general  laws  of  the  quantum  theory,  applied  to  the 
nucleus  atom  in  the  same  way  as  they  originally  were 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  207 

applied  to  the  hydrogen  atom,  leading  thereby  to  the 
interpretation  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum. 

We  have,  further,  a  most  striking  evidence  as  to  the 
correctness  of  Bohr’s  ideas  in  the  fact  that  not  only  do 
the  pictures  of  the  atoms  which  he  has  drawn  agree 
with  the  known  chemical  facts  about  the  elements,  but 
they  are  also  able  to  explain  in  the  most  satisfactory 
manner  possible  the  most  essential  features  of  the 
characteristic  X.-ray  spectra  of  the  different  elements,  a 
field  we  shall  not  enter  upon  here. 


In  all  that  has  been  said  above  we  have  been  con¬ 
sidering  the  Bohr  theory  simply  as  a  means  of  gaining 
a  deeper  understanding  of  the  laws  which  determine 
activities  in  the  atomic  world.  Perhaps  we  shall  now 
be  asked  if  we  can  “  utilize  ”  the  theory,  or,  in  other 

words,  if  it  can  be  put  to  practical  use. 

To  this  natural  and  not  unwarranted  question  we 
may  first  give  the  very  general  answer,  that  progress  in 
our  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  nature  always  contributes 
sooner  or  later,  directly  or  indirectly,  to  increase  our 
mastery  over  nature.  But  the  connection  between 
science  and  practical  application  may  be  more  or  less 
conspicuous,  the  path  from  science  to  practical  applica¬ 
tion  more  or  less  smooth.  It  must  be  admitted  that 
the  Bohr  theory,  in  its  present  state  of  development, 
hardly  leads  to  results  of  direct  practical  application. 
But  since  it  shows  the  way  to  a  more  thorough  under¬ 
standing  of  the  details  in  a  great  number  of  physical  and 
chemical  processes,  where  the  peculiar  properties  of  the 
different  elements  play  parts  of  decided  importance, 
then  in  reality  it  offers  a  wealth  of  possibilities  for  making 


208  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


predictions  about  the  course  of  the  processes — predic¬ 
tions  which  undoubtedly  in  the  course  of  time  will  be  of 
practical  use  in  many  ways.  In  this  connection  the  dis¬ 
covery  of  the  element  hafnium,  discussed  on  p.  204,  may 
be  mentioned.  It  must  be  for  the  future  to  show  what 
the  Bohr  theory  can  do  for  technical  practice. 


Below  is  given  an  explanation  of  the  different  symbols 

which  occur  at  various  places  in  the  book  ;  also  the  values 

of  important  physical  constants. 

i  m.  =  i  metre  ;  i  cm.  =  i  centimetre  =0-394  inches. 

1  fj.  =  i  mikron  =1/1000  of  a  millimetre  =0-0001  cm.  =10  4  cm. 

1  up  =1/1,000,000  of  a  millimetre  =  1  o-7  cm. 

1  cm.3  =  1  cubic  centimetre. 

1  g.  =  1  gram  ;  1  kg.  =  1  kilogram  =  2-2  pounds. 

1  kgm.  =  1  kilogrammetre  (the  work  or  the  energy  required 
to  lift  1  kg.  1  m.). 

1  erg  =  1-02  x  io"8  kgm.  =7-48  x  io  8  foot-pounds. 

X  represents  wave-length. 

v  represents  frequency  (number  of  oscillations  in  1  second). 

<0  represents  frequency  of  rotation  (number  of  rotations  in 
1  second). 

n  represents  an  integer  (particularly  the  Bohr  quantum 
numbers) . 

The  velocity  of  light  is  c  =3  X  io10  cm.  per  second  =9-9  x  io8 
feet  per  second. 

The  wave-length  of  yellow  sodium  light  is  0-589  /x  =589  hlx  — 
2-32  x  io'5  inches. 

The  frequency  of  yellow  sodium  light  is  526  x  io12  vibrations 
per  second. 

The  number  of  molecules  per  cm.3  at  o°  C.  and  atmospheric 
pressure  is  about  27  X  io18. 

The  number  of  hydrogen  atoms  in  1  g.  is  about  6-io23. 

The  mass  of  a  hydrogen  atom  is  1-65  X  io-24  g. 

The  elementary  quantum  of  electricity  is  4-77  x  io10  “  electro¬ 
static  units.” 


14 


210  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  BOHR  THEORY 


The  negative  electric  charge  of  an  electron  is  i  elementary 
quantum  (i  negative  charge). 

The  positive  electric  charge  of  a  hydrogen  nucleus  is  i  ele¬ 
mentary  quantum  (i  positive  charge). 

The  mass  of  an  electron  is  1/1835  that  of  the  hydrogen  atom. 

The  diameter  of  an  electron  is  estimated  to  be  about  3  x 
10  13  cm. 

The  diameter  of  the  atomic  nucleus  is  of  the  order  of  magni¬ 
tude  10  13  to  io~12  cm. 

The  diameter  of  a  hydrogen  atom  in  the  normal  state  Rhe 
diameter  of  the  first  stationary  orbit  in  Bohr’s  model)  is 
1-056  x  io-8  cm. 

The  Balmer  constant  K  =3-29  x  io15. 

The  Planck  constant  h=  6-54  x  io'27. 

An  energy  quantum  is  E  =  hv. 

The  Balmer-Ritz  formula  for  the  frequences  of  the  lines  in 
the  hydrogen  spectrum  is 


Thallium 


Sodium 


Barium 


STRUCTURE  OF  THE  RADIUM  ATOM 


I 


1;;  r ' 

\  |  i  | 

'  )  | 


t 


RraaierS^n.A.  &  Holst, H. 


541.2 

K89 


Th*  atom  &  the  Bohr  theory  of 


its  structure. 


1923. 


M.  I.  T.  LIBRARY  1Soo0;s 
This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date 
stamped  below. 


i-  «  #  * 


JAM  2  4  -mi 

AVti  1  g  lit 

JUL  5  132| 

10V  *  3  Mr 

:..;t  2  ••  v 


•'nest  10  !’•’ 


■I; 


i  Ucili  b.‘VOl>£ 


JAN  3  19$ 


JAN 


i  2  0  1325 


I  'I 


-  I  [ftjlt 


FES  1  9  V* 


MPR  j  8  J932 

2  1  1932 


mAh  2  9  t 

A£R  2  3  M 

«V  *  3  K'2i, 


*» 


8 


NOY  9  192  fc 


°^T  1  7  )92c 

OCT  3  1  19J3 


/lP:  j  - 

rOM'V29  I1AR  2  0  1943 


NOV 


)EC  1  .  1928 


192  i 

JUM  2  8  iQ|n 

0CT  2  8  193b 

JUN  ’  V  1031 


•  state  du8 


n  1  0 1931 


Nol/  14  1332 
APP  1  193j 


l 

4 


R  1  1935  I 


-H 

4 

£ 


Form  L26-6000-12  July  ’26 


Rx 

If 


MASSACHUSETTS  INSTITUTE  OF  TECHNOLOGY 

MIT  LIBRARIES 

I  I  III  III  I II  I!  1 1  [1  III  II  II  I  I .  itute,  shall  be 

3  9080  02454  9633 

lost  or  seriously  injured,  as  by  any  marks  or  writing 
made  therein,  the  person  to  whom  it  stands  charged 
shall  replace  it  by  a  new  copy,  or  by  a  new  set  if  it 
forms  a  part  of  a  set. 


MASSACHUSETTS  INSTITUTE 
OF  TECHNOLOGY 

LIBRARY 

SIGN  THIS  CARD  AND  LEAVE 
IT  in  the  tray  upon  the  desk. 

NO  BOOK  may  be  taken  from  the  • 
room  UNTIL  it  has  been  REGISTERED 
in  this  manner. 

RETURN  this  book  to  the  DESK. 


form  L44-5000-5-23